Home

GLOBALCOM SMC User Manual - Low Res

1. 000222 22 259 Admin 261 Software Update 222222 eee eee ee 263 Backup Restore 222222002 2 eee 265 Table of Contents Lifeline Control 2 2222 2202222 e 269 USES eran a inoue iietedotee ce ance se 271 PDRP Languages 000000000000000000000000i 275 UserLog 2 eee tiie utd ete aE 277 Debug Utilities 00 20222 279 REDOG Sos ttu nse cote ae hee dee tease 279 File Management eee cece cece eee 280 Take Management eee eee eee ceeeee 282 Command Shell 2s c0cs3 e2ehe0esbencceohecceces 284 SLD E e eet tae ioe ele aN ots t ce 285 INGTIVIO Ia coalesce piace te ates Stare tee E E Cte eh pte 91 a Stas 285 Debug Messages badddc tang covewmeckesatnsaeese 288 Appendices 289 FAS Entry Codes acc sp ni tece eed 291 Basic Troubleshooting Guidelines 293 Basic Pinciples 2 2s ce tase etslt anseescdsecosaens 293 Mic Station Control Line Failure fault type 2 22 2222 294 Titan Amplifier Card Fault fault type 4 22 22 2222 294 Titan Amp Frame Internal Card Fault fault type 4 295 Titan Amplifier Frame Environmental Fault fault type 5 296 Communication Channel Fault fault type 9 2 2 2 296 Monitor lestPoint Failure 223 5 45acc otc tertorg deiis 297 VoIP User Interface 22 22222 301 Scheduled BGM Level Change 303 Step Config re Zones 2 tek oes reek Buckles 304 Step 2 Configure
2. Figure 5 6 My Controller Device Contiguration 43 ill TED Chapter 5 My System GLOBALCOM Remote Controllers My System Default Configuration Device Definition User Definition My Controller System 1 Remote Controllers Description System 2 Bridge Device Lifeline vACS System Number Group Offset IP Address RTP Transmitters f 3 ID Audio Port Audio IP 1 6001 2 6002 239 192 0 2 239 192 0 2 Type IP Address 2 WCF Port Remote TX Lifeline System Push Takes Push Config vACS System 2 Send Reset Command 1100DAB Digital Audio Bridc v J z 10 3 150 100 0 0 0 0 80 Lifeline vACS X W Push All Takes Digital Audio Type CobraN OK Cancel Figure 5 7 Remote Controller Configuration Type Select the type of remote controller that this entry represents Description Enter a descriptive text string for the system This text will appear in the Remote Controllers list to identify the system A hyperlink to the SMC for the remote system will appear below the description field You can click this link to open the SMC window for the remote controller Send Reset Command Click this button to restart the vACS service on the remote controller Note that this will take the announcement controller offline tor a briet period of time You can also use this to reset
3. Submit License Current Zones 16 Licensed 32 Current Frames 1 SMS False VOIP False Licensed Unlimited System Mode vACS Figure 3 3 Update License 26 First Run Setup Wizard The First Run Setup Wizard will appear when the System Management Console is started on a system for the first time or if the configuration tile has been removed The wizard will ask you to input some basic system information and then it will generate a configuration tile based on your inputs This greatly simplifies the process of configuring a new system and reduces the amount of data that you must manually configure You have the option of creating a configuration based on a default template or you can load a configuration tile that you created on another system Load Default Configuration Select this option and you can choose from a list of default configuration templates as shown in Figure 4 1 Simply select the type of system you wish to configure trom the list and then click the Load Default Configuration button This will then take you to the Configure Devices screen as shown in Figure 4 4 You can click the Details button to see a description of the item currently highlighted in the Default Configuration Files list 10 x E E http Mocalhost FirstRun SystemxXlv File Edit View Favorites Tools sly Favorites SystemXML Page LED System Management Center GO ma GLOBAL MAC Address E069954F7693 System Ve
4. Total Zones i 16 Is BGM Source _ of Channels 0 First BGM Input i v BGM Device i Titan 1 v x Channel Descriptions Zones Match To First Description Zone 49 50 Zone 50 51 Zone 51 52 Zone 52 53 Zone 53 i 54 Zone 54 55 Zone 55 56 Zone 56 57 Zone 57 58 Zone 58 59 Zone 59 Emg D O GA G G G Night O O O O O O O O O O O Monitor Test Delay BGM Channel 0 Channel 1 EQ Ambient 0 Channel 1 EQ Ambient 0 Channel 1 EQ PE 0 Channel 1 EQ p F 0 Channel 1 EQ Ambient 0 Channel 1 EQ Ambient 0 Channel 1 EQ Ambient 0 Channel 1 EQ Ambient _ 0 Channel 1 EQ Farrer 0 Channel 1 EQ Pare 0 Channel 1 EQ paren Figure 6 72 T9116 Zone Output Device Description Enter text here to give the device a descriptive name Location Enter text here to describe the physical location of the device IP Address Enter the IP address for the device here Dev Handle This is a sottware address used by the system It is assigned by the system and provided here for reference if needed Frame Number This is a unique ID number used to identity the Titan frames used in the system When you add the device the system will automatically assign the next available frame number 126 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 6 Devices Start Zone This is the zone number that represents the first zone in the device The system will automati
5. Triggers Activation Type Reverse Polarity 74 Zone 74 trigger Edit None Solid 75 Zone 75 trigger Figure 6 60 1522LR Logic Relay Module Device Setup Note The 1522LR is not automatically discovered by the system You must manually create it by adding it as a new device in the Devices section Description Enter text here to give the device a descriptive name Location Enter text here to describe the physical location of the device 108 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 6 Devices IP Address Enter the IP address for the device Mic Number This is the number used to identity the device as an input device within the announcement controller It must be a unique number within the local announcement controller This number is automatically assigned when you add the device but can be edited if necessary Start Relay Zone This is the zone number that represents the first relay zone on the device The system will automatically use the next available zone number as the starting zone number when you add a new device It can be edited here it needed Total Relays This number represents the total number of relay zones that will be present on this device Each output is numbered sequentially based on the start zone entered in the Start Relay Zone tield The 1522LR can have a total of 2 relay zones detined The total number of relay zones can be reduced to one if necessary Zones Match To First This button h
6. Define Mic Templates Mic templates determine the graphical button layout on the microphone stations that have a graphical display The buttons detined in the template need to be tied to actions which must be defined prior to creating the templates You will need to go back to the microphone station contiguration to assign a template to each station atter you have created the templates in this step unless you are not using logins for the microphone station If you are using logins then the template is determined by the passwords defined in the next step Ww TED Chapter 1 Introduction GLOBALCOM 10 11 LZ I3 14 15 Define Mic Passwords If you are not going to lock your microphone stations then you can skip this step If you will require users to log into microphone stations then you must define passwords for them You will need to have User Groups and Mic Templates defined before defining Mic Passwords Define Scheduled Actions and Events These do not link to any other defined actions but do require any inputs and outputs that you need to use already be defined These are usually not defined until very late in the system installation as you are working with the facility to determine what is needed Configure Output Levels and BGM Selections on Output Devices Your specific situation may dictate that BGM settings and output levels are set as required while you are installing the system What is critical is that
7. Fok I concel Figure 7 4 CombinedLive Action Type Announcement Class Select the appropriate announcement class for the action The announcement class determines the announcement priority relative to other announcements as well as various other behaviors as detined tor each announcement class CombinedLive Advanced This action type is only available tor the MS520 type of microphone station The following properties will only be visible atter selecting the Show All Fields button 16 TED Chapter 7 Action Types GLOBALCOM 162 Copy Action Type i CombinedLive Show Base Fields Description Combined Action Entry Code range i 11000 gt Announcement Class Li Medium Prority Pri planking ZoneGroup YM Se 7 mech A sen iA e T m S A E LE Figure 7 5 CombinedLive Action Type Show All Fields Blanking Zone Group Select the zone group to use as a blanking zone group from the drop down list box The zone group selected will effectively be muted when this action is executed Blanking zone groups are typically used to mute areas that are adjacent to where the announcement will be made to prevent other announcements messages or background music from interfering with the delivery of the announcement Click the X icon to clear the selection from the list Pre Announce Tone Enter the take number to be played at the start of the action to alert individuals to
8. Security Intruder Tornado Fire evac graphic Figure 15 1 Visual Alerts and Wayfinding The set of icons next to the Visual Alerts list is used to add edit or remove individual alert scenarios from the system The icons next to the Images list are used to add or remove individual images trom the highlighted alert For the Visual Alerts list aj Click this icon to add a new alert scenario to the list You will be prompted with a new window to enter the name Click this icon to edit the name of the currently selected alert x Click this icon to delete the currently selected alert 243 GLOBALCOM lei ED Chapter 15 Visual Alerts and Wayfinding For the Images list Click this icon to add a new image to the selected Visual Alert scenario Click this icon to delete the currently selected image Image This is a small thumbnail preview of the image tile selected Browse Click this button to choose the image tile to use This will open a standard Windows open tile dialog window as shown in Figure 15 2 From here you should locate and open the tile that you wish to use Once complete a preview of the file will appear in the Preview field of the image list Open x P K di v Documents v Visual Information Files Search Visual Information Fi 2 Organize New folder Fil we Favorites Documents library imaia tetden Visual Information Files G Libraries Name Date modified Type Documents a
9. Supervision of Ground Faults for channels 5A through 8B LVIO Unit 2 Supervision of amplitier good status lines and amplifier temperature sensors tor channels 5A through 8B Titan Amplifier Frame Environmental Fault fault type 5 This condition covers over temperature on amplitier heat sinks cooling tan failures and ground faults on speaker lines These appear in the system supervision listing with descriptions such as the tollowing examples e Amplitier Card 1 Over Temperature Titan IPAU e Fan 2 Fault Titan IPAU e Channel 3A Ground Fault Titan IPAU For the temperature and fan faults which may be inter related one can do the following checks at the indicated Titan amplifier frame T9160 1 Are tans all running 2 Any obstructions in the tan vanes 3 Any foreign objects sheets covering the air openings front and back of the frame 4 Unusually warm hot ambient air in the equipment rack of the affected Titan frame It desired the ground fault condition can be verified by removing the speaker line connection from the back of the amplifier frame and checking the impedance between each speaker line and earth ground using a multi meter Communication Channel Fault fault type 9 This condition indicates that the system supervision software has tailed to communicate over the network to the indicated device This tault occurs tor non microphone station devices and can be due to either the unit not being powered up the uni
10. ooooo Ececr gt 00 01 30 Fire Evac Building 11 ZG 105 00 01 45 Fire Evac Building 11 ZG 105 00 02 00 Fire Evac Building 11 ZG 105 00 02 00 In Place Alarm Building 12 ZG 104 00 02 15 Fire Evac Building 11 ZG 105 00 03 00 In Place Alarm Building 12 ZG 104 00 04 00 In Place Alarm Building 12 ZG 104 00 05 00 In Place Alarm Building 12 ZG 104 ooo cc Figure 14 2 Event Details Click this icon to add a new event to the list LOF ill TED Chapter 14 Events GLOBALCOM s Click this icon to delete the currently selected event from the list Description Enter a text descriptor for the event This text is displayed in the event list to name the event Actions Actions are added removed or modified from the actions list using the icons shown in Figure 14 4 Actions m t x Figure 14 3 Action Icons Click this icon to add a new action to the event This will automatically open the action definition window Once an action has been added it is configured identically to actions that are used by devices See Action Types on page 157 tor details on contiguring each action i This icon is used to edit the highlighted action This will open the action definition window for the highlighted action x Click this icon to delete the highlighted action thus removing it from the event The actions list displays the actions that are currently pr
11. 2 00 190 MOAI 2k Mak whee abst cs sieht neti a Shean gate Spates eters 192 MuteAll Advanced Properties 192 Prerecorded we ech ean beee nea seseeeeieuk eda 194 Prerecorded Advanced Properties 199 Record Takere tana e a a 201 INE EE A SN EETA EE E 202 HOPAN teed eraa E A T EE 203 TTS Text to Speech 2222 0 ee 204 TTS Advanced Properties e 206 Veva Aem sersan Gu a fee eRe oss ren ea Ot eddy 207 Announcement Classes 209 FORE ClO UNS eones ETNO EEES 213 User Groups uceni SA ESE 217 Mic Templates 222222222220020002000 221 Mic Template Editor gi 5 won eee out a uecesl ee dand 222 Mic Template Button Editor 22 2 022222 2 224 Seral 8 o Ce a eee METS ner a a AA 226 Mic Passwords 2222000eeee eee ee 229 Scheduled Actions 22222222022 231 Saa e 0 E E E EE E E 232 EVGNIS otusacieutnueciciwwadsetiaeesh ES 239 POMS di Sistecar EEEE Gea erate EE EN 240 Event SCnedule eo ute te caper haan ee 242 Visual Alerts and Wayfinding 243 Visual Alert Usage 24 525 2236 fe eos 245 Day Night Schedule 247 SMS ISHS eroria e E 249 System Supervision 22 2 251 SINMPERGOOINES 22 c chcra cucu ee dat ae 292 Po Desciphons 262 ete el ee aal elk 253 Windows System OG Jccuced aoc sade ai 254 Print Configuration
12. Licensed This number reflects the total number of Titan frames that are allowed with your current license The text will turn red it you attempt to configure more frames than the license allows If this text is red any configured frames in excess of the licensed number will not function SMS This will read True if SMS Short Message Service is enabled on the controller It will read False it it is not enabled SMS is used to send text messages to mobile devices VOIP This will read True if VoIP service is enabled on the controller It will read False if it is not enabled Update License This text is actually a button When clicked it will take you to the license page as shown in Figure 3 3 This page is used to update your current license You must provide the system specific Challenge key to IED support personnel They will give you the appropriate Response key to use for your system Once you have entered the Response key click the Submit License button to update the license ey http flocalhost LicenseEntry 4 X File Edit Wiew Favorites Tools iy Favorites LicenseEntry Page IP Add 10 2 128 161 ED i System Management Center Nemes 4 ad dd GLOBAL Sy stem 1 Overview Configuration Admin Mi Vat o login Current License 32 Please call IED at 502 267 7436 and provide the following challenge to obtain a valid license key Challenge 4F76 9321 E069 A595 Enter Response 7
13. Location Extra Info Mic 259 SIP Server 1601 SIP Extension 1601 Mic 258 SIP Server 1602 SIP Extension 1602 Mic 257 Main Equipment Room Rack 2 Frame 1 16384 16 Zones Start Zone 9 BGM SOURCE 1 channels D 10 2 128 162 System 1 Sound Card Other Devices IP MAC Description Location Extra Info Figure 2 10 Replacement Device Detected Double click on the new device and you will be taken to the device configuration window as shown in Figure 2 11 This is almost identical to the usual device configuration window used when adding devices in the Devices tab The difference is that you now have two new options at the top of the window wil TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 2 Overview Tab Add as New Device Replace Existing Device a Rack Station Tg MS528 Graphical Paging Station p cuir aos D Pate G gt 1 Figure 2 11 Device Contiguration Window Add as New Device Select this option to add the discovered device as a completely new device in the system configuration It will use the discovered IP address of the device and automatically assign any additionally required parameters and add it to the devices list Once added you can contigure it trom the Devices tab Replace Existing Device Select this option to use the settings of a device that already appears in the devices list but apply them to this newly discovered device Select the existing device contiguration that you want to use trom t
14. Initiated This is a date and time stamp of when the announcement was started Announcement ID This is a system assigned number to identity the announcement When you move the mouse pointer over a source as shown in Figure 2 3 Announcement Activity Double click entries to view details Initiated AnnouncementID Status Type Zones Source 4 9 2012 2 52 26 PM 2 Gone Prerecorded 9 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 20 21 9 4 9 2012 2 53 07 PM 4 9 2012 2 53 Kill 4 9 2012 2 54 47 Gone Prerecorded 9 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 20 21 8 Gone Prerecorded 9 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 20 21 255 Active Prerecorded 9 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 20 21 255 Clear Announcements Mic amp Zone Status System 1 LIR Titan 1 EIB Security Announc Figure 2 3 Announcement ID Status This field indicates the current status of the announcement e Gone Indicates that the announcement is finished and will not attempt any turther action e Active Indicates that the announcement is currently routing audio channels for either a live announcement or prerecorded message e Busy Indicates that the announcement or message is being held in queue for tuture playback This can be either because it is waiting for zones to be treed due to another active announcement or because it is waiting tor additional playbacks it multiple playbacks are used e Ready This status sometimes appears briefly indicating that all
15. Note Some network switches can take 30 60 seconds to turn on PoE power after a connection is made One may have to be patient at this point waiting for the 294 switch to re apply power to the network port Titan Amplifier Card Fault fault type 4 This condition indicates that an amplifier card in a Titan amplifier frame T9160 is not working It the Titan amplifier frame has a backup amp card this tailed card could be automatically backed up it tirst only amplifier in fault If it is not being backed up one may see an additional fault in the system supervision list that says Faulted Amplitier Not Backed Up One can make the tollowing checks at the Titan trame 1 The power LED on the front of the amplifier card is not lit indicating it is not powered up 2 The power switch on the front of the amp card is in the ON position One may try switch ing it to the OFF position and back to ON just in case the switch wasn t fully in the ON position previously 3 The amplifier card is fully seated into the frame and the two retaining screws are fully screwed down Remove and re seat if uncertain ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter B Basic Troubleshooting Guidelines Note Note Ifthe amplifier card is removed from the Titan frame this fault will clear and the automatic backup will stop If one desires to continue to have audio in the zones attected by the tailed amp card one should replace the tailed amp with a spare amp or move t
16. Serial Rev MAC Address IP Address i il ASD 408 EELE FA 00 60 26 06 09 51 10 2 128 152 Audioscieni Cobrahe Configure CobraMet O0 02 01 01 16 10 10 2 128 173 IED 5289H C O0 60 26 05 FR 0C 10 2 128 171 TED 5100 4 00 02 01 01 16 06 10 2 125 174 TED 5426H C Change IP Address Update Sudioscience Mrriware save Configuration Restore Configuration Figure 6 10 Change ASI IP Address Right click on the ASI5408 device in the list and you will see the pop up window as shown in Figure 6 10 Select the Change IP Address option to open the window shown in Figure 6 11 CobraWet change IP address x Auto assign a new dynamic IP address Set dynamic IP address Set static IP address IP Address ig fz 128 162 OK Cancel Figure 6 11 ASI IP Address Configuration Window 54 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 6 Devices The card must be contigured with a static IP address Use of dynamic IP address is not supported in the system Select the Set static IP address radio button as shown in the figure above and type in the IP address in the IP Address field Once entered click the OK button to set the card to the new IP address You can click the CANCEL button to close the window without changing the address Note The system standard is to set the IP address of the internal CobraNet card to 1 number higher than the address of the controller s Ethernet port If the contro
17. a note of the bundle number that is automatically assigned Next you add the 1502Al in the other controllers but you will manually assign the bundle number in all of the secondary controllers to the one assigned by the primarry controller 96 i TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 6 Devices Annuncicom 100 Device The Annuncicom 100 is a hardware device manutactured by Barix AG and is natively supported by the vACS as a remote device The Annuncicom 100 must be contigured using its own built in web server contiguration pages Consult the Annuncicom Product Manual available for download at www barix com Note The serial communications and logic O features of the Annuncicom 100 are not supported Annuncicom 100 Annuncicom 100 Device Description i Annuncicom 100 Show Base Fields Location i Remote Station A6 IP Address iJ 10 2 128 11 Mic Number i 261 i i P o m m wtert ZONE ta iy 1 Figure 6 53 Annuncicom 100 Device Setup Description Enter text here to give the device a descriptive name Location Enter text here to describe the physical location of the device IP Address Enter the IP address for the device here Mic Number Each input on the device must have its own unique mic number This is the number used to identity the input as a usable source within the announcement controller When you add the device each number is automatically defined It can be changed if needed Once
18. bus 100 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 6 Devices Master Device Select the Titan trame trom the drop down list that contains this audio output Pass Thru Audio Source If you have any other inputs on the Titan frame selected in the Master Device drop down list detined as External Titan Source then they will be available in this list as a source The source selected will be directly routed to this output when announcements or messages are not being transmitted by the Audio Bus Manager This allows tor a local source to be used and then overridden by announcements or messages coming trom the system head end External Titan Source External System Feed J E External Titan Source Description i External System Feed show Base Fields Location i Titan Frame 1 Input 14 He Mumba Input Channel ChiA v Audio Network Bus Figure 6 56 External Titan Source Setup Description Enter text here to give the device a descriptive name Location Enter text here to describe the physical location of the device Mic Number Each input on the device must have its own unique mic number This is the number used to identify the input as a usable source within the announcement controller When you add the device each number is automatically defined It can be changed if needed Once it has been defined here it will appear as an available source when defining actions Input Channel Select the input chann
19. 10 2 128 161 ED system Management Center Y etmasi MAC Address E069954F7693 GLOBAL Syste AR 1 Overview Configuration Admin System Version 1 0 4492 24518 login Announcement Activity Mic amp Zone Status Current Faults My Devices Other Devices Current License Information System Operating Mode Current Zones 16 Current Frames 1 SMS False VOIP False Licensed 32 Licensed Unlimited System Mode vacslp ee Figure 3 1 SMC Window Figure 3 2 shows a detailed view of the system licensing information This will show you what capacity and functionality is supported with your current license This is also where you will launch the window that allows you to update your license tor additional capacity Current Zones 16 Current Frames 1 SMS False VOIP False Licensed 32 Licensed Unlimited Figure 3 2 License Details Current Zones This number reflects the actual number of audio zones that are configured in the system Licensed This number reflects the total number of audio zones that are allowed with your current license The text willturn red it you attempt to contigure more zones than the license allows It this text is red any contigured audio zones in excess of the licensed number will not function Current Frames This number reflects the actual number of Titan audio frames T9160 T9116 etc that are configured in the system 25 ill TED Chapter 3 Licensing GLOBALCOM
20. 16 Current Frames 1 SMS False VOIP False Licensed 32 Licensed Unlimited System Mode vACS Figure 5 2 Detault Contiguration Device Definition Clicking on this text will take you to the VACS First Run Setup Wizard page as shown in Figure 5 3 From here you can specity system address intormation and the number of each device type in the system Refer to the vACS First Run Setup Wizard documentation for additional intormation Note The Internal CobraNet Audio Device has its own network port that must be contigured separately The System Management Center cannot directly set this address Refer to the Internal CobraNet Audio Device documentation for instructions on setting this address ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 5 My System IP Address 10 2 128 161 ED System Management Center Nemo Aea MAC Address E069954F7693 GLOBAL System 1l System Version 1 0 4444 16140 vACS First Run Setup Wizard This screen allows the definition of basic system components Using information provided on this page the wizard will make assumptions about your system and define basic properties for all devices More detailed setup will be performed on the device discovery page 10 2 128 161 Save System Description amp Define Users Current Zones 16 Current Frames 1 SMS False VOIP False Licensed 32 Licensed Unlimited System Mode vACS Figure 5 3 Device Definition User Definition Clicking on this text will take y
21. Devices 3 Amplifier Problem f x 1 Test Point Pass Fail Audible Test 1 1 UPS Failure 9 10 Communication Channel Network O O Figure 6 36 Barionet 50 Triggers Activation Type The Activation Type applies only to relays that function as fault indicators and have definitions in the Triggers field Solid The relay will activate while the fault condition is present and deactivate once the fault condition has cleared e Momentary The relay will activate for approximately 1 second and then deactivate e Pulsating The relay will cycle between active and inactive states at a rate of approximately 1 second on and 1 second oft Activation Type Momentary Pulsating Figure 6 37 Barionet 50 Activation Types Reverse Polarity Check this box to reverse the operating polarity of the relay Normally a relay is in its de energized state until it is triggered When this box is checked it will normally energize and will de energize when triggered This is most useful when a relay is used to indicate a fault to an external system or indicator panel That way a fault condition will be triggered if the unit loses power Actions When you open the Actions for the Barionet 50 device you will notice that there are two actions tor each logic input One is associated with the activation of the input and the other with the deactivation of the input You can differentiate between the two by looking tor On or
22. E069954F7693 System Version 1 0 4457 19275 Welcome Admin User logout This is a list of any announcements that are either active or being held in queue on the local announcement controller This list provides some history of past announcements only from the point where the System Management Center application was launched or trom the last time the Clear Announcements button was selected Announcement Activity Double click entries to view details Initiated N 4 9 2012 2 52 26 PM 4 9 2012 2 53 07 PM 4 9 2012 2 53 16 PM 4 9 2012 2 54 47 PM 4 9 2012 2 55 43 PM 4 9 2012 2 55 46 PM Kill 4 9 2012 2 55 52 PM Announcement ID 2 3 4 5 6 7 Kill 4 9 2012 2 55 54 PM f9 Status Type Zones Source Gone Prerecorded 9 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 20 21 9 Gone Prerecorded 9 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 20 21 8 Gone Prerecorded 9 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 20 21 255 Gone Prerecorded 9 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 20 21 255 Gone Prerecorded 9 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 20 21 1 Gone Prerecorded 9 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 20 21 1 Busy Prerecorded 9 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 20 21 9 Active Prerecorded 9 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 20 21 8 a Clear Announcements Figure 2 2 Announcement Activity 1 ill TED Chapter 2 Overview Tab GLOBALCOM Kill This button is only available when a user is logged in with a permission set of User or higher and will only appear on announcements that are active Click this button to kill the active announcement
23. Fire Evac Building 11 G 105 Fire Evac Building 11 2 G 105 Fire Evac Building 11 2 G 105 Fire Evac Building 11 7G 105 Fire Evac Building 11 7 G 105 Fire Evac Building 11 7G 105 Fire Evac Building 11 7G 105 Fire Evac Building 11 7G 105 In Place Alarm Building 12 6 104 In Place Alarm Building 12 7G 104 00 1 n Place Alarm Building 12 7 G 104 Figure 14 6 Event Schedule Visual Alerts and Wayfinding Visual Alerts allow you to display graphical images on visual displays to provide situational information to occupants in the facility Visual Alerts are activated within certain action types and will remain on the displays until cleared You can create simple scenarios that display a single static image on the displays to intorm occupants of a certain condition such as a fire or a weather alert The system supports more complex scenarios such as displaying directional arrows to guide people to the nearest emergency exit or to sheltered areas of the facility In this case each display is contigured to display a situation appropriate graphical image An action can trigger a single Visual Alert Within each alert you can have one or more images to be shown on displays while the alert is active In the configuration of each display you select the specific image to use for each visual alert Visual Alerts and Wayfinding Visual Alerts 4 9 Images 3 Fire Evacuation Image Description
24. Live EC 10 26 101 All Call Recorded EC 11 2G 101 Fire Evac EC 1701 26 101 Tomada EC 1702 26 101 me Security Intruder EC 1703 2G 101 Clear Fire Evae EC 1801 ID CH Emergency All Call EC 911 26 101 Timeout 1 De Clear Tornado EC 1802 3 Se Clear Securnty Intruder EC 1803 j Buttons Clear Muteall ECS 103 Pa MuteAll EC 102 m Mute EC 104 26 101 A x Clear Mute EC 105 JA V AIL Call Recon AW Default Text Color Chapter 11 Mic Templates Default Button Color Tex ED ED om D O Edit Action lcons Button Color Caption eo eon EED oru Figure 11 7 Assign an action to a button EC Entry Code You can directly type in the numeric entry code in this field Typically you will select the action from the drop down list but you must use this field when the microphone station is launching actions that are not part of the local system This is the case when you are using the optional Flight Announcement System FAS that utilizes the IED Enterprise software suite with an external SQL database Preview This field displays a simple preview of the button using the selected color scheme and captions Text Color Button Color New buttons are created using the colors selected in the Default Text Color Default Button Color in the template editor list You can use the fields here to change the individual button colors Caption Line 1 Caption Line 2 Each but
25. This allows you to archive the file as well as save it as a preset and load it into other channels Load From File Click this button to open a standard Windows tile dialog window From here you can locate an XML file that has been stored with an EQ curve and load it into the trame Apply Click this button to send the current EQ settings to the trame Copy Click this button to copy all of the current EQ settings to the clipboard You can then move to another channel and use the Paste button to copy settings between channels Paste Click this button to paste the EQ settings stored on the clipboard to the current channel This button will be dimmed it there are no available EQ settings to paste trom the clipboard Ambient DNA series amplitier trames are equipped with ambient noise compensation Ambient Analysis capabilities utilizing the eight 8 built in ambient sensor inputs Ambient Analysis adjusts the output attenuation of a channel in response to ambient noise level measured in the area served by the channel One 1 or two 2 ambient noise sensors can be used for each channel Channels can also be slaved to other zones Click the Ambient button for the channel you wish to configure to open a window such as that shown in Figure 6 82 144 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 6 Devices Program Sensors Gain Calc Filter Limit Ambient Out Overall Threshold Scaling Fast 100 m 20 1 4 Medium 90 Calibration Slow 16 C
26. ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 6 Devices b 1100TEL Telephone Interface 1100TEL Telephone Interface OY Apply Configuration Now Description i 1100TEL Telephone Interface Show Base Fields Location i Main Equipment Room IP Address i 10 2 128 179 SIP Server IP 10 2 128 1 SIP Server Port 5061 DTMF Payload Number 105 DTMF Type RFC2833 v Prompting Extensions Ext SIP User SIP Password SIP Port RTP Pot Template Locked 1601 1601 12345 5104 40084 Default Telephone Template i 1602 1602 12345 5097 40070 Default Telephone Template i 1603 1603 12345 5098 40072 Default Telephone Template v 1604 1604 5099 40074 Default Telephone Template v 5100 40076 Default Telephone Template 5101 40078 Default Telephone Template 5102 40080 Default Telephone Template 5103 40082 Default Telephone Template Ext SIP User SIP Password SIP Port RTP Port Action Performed Allcall 12345 5065 40006 Delayed All Call tee 2G 100 1606 Public 12345 5066 40008 Delayed All Public Areas EC 2 ZG 104 i 1608 AllCallEm 12345 5067 40010 Emergency All Call EC 3 ZG 100 9 5068 40012 Unused EC 4 5069 40014 Unused EC 5 Fo 5070 40016 Unused EC 6 Fo 5071 40018 Unused EC 7 Unused EC 8 Figure 6 57 1 1OOTEL Telephone Interface Configuration Description Enter text here to give the device a descriptive name Location Enter text here to describe the physical location of the
27. slider is set to 20dB as shown in Figure 6 69 then the maximum available setting tor the Limit slider will be 20dB Setting the Limit to 12dB will cause the output level to be increased by a maximum of 12dB above the setting of the Overall attenuation slider Thus with very loud ambient noise levels the output level will be effectively set to 8dB and reduced to 20dB when the ambient noise level is very low or has dropped below the threshold The ambient noise compensation will be continually adjusted within this range as long as the noise level remains above the threshold but below the amount required to drive the system to maximum level The Ambient Analysis algorithm differentiates between program audio and ambient noise level detected by the ambient noise sensor It is possible for the sensor level to be above the threshold with no ambient noise compensation applied when the level detected is program audio trom the system The limit is set by adjusting the slider with the mouse or by manually typing a value in the edit box below the slider using a positive numerical value Overall Level This slider controls the main output attenuator for paging BGM and program signals The meter indicates the current signal level that is teeding the analog input of the power amplitier Assign Sensors Clicking on the Assign Sensors button will launch the Ambient Sensor Assignment window as shown in Figure 6 70 This is where one or more amb
28. to detine Zone Groups and just about any of the Action Types will require zone groups or zones in order to be completely defined It is best to add all of your output devices so all zones will be available when you go to program actions You will need to return to the output devices after you have configured input sources in order to assign BGM adjust levels and contigure and calibrate ambient analysis and system supervision Define Zone Groups Since you just added the output devices now is a good time to go in and define the Zone Groups that you think may be needed for your system You can always come back here and add them as needed but it will save time if you can define as many as you can at this point so they are available when you go to define actions Define Input Devices Input devices include microphone stations 1502Al Titan inputs T9O32LVIO 1200LIR T9O4ONLR inputs and ambient noise sensors etc You may need to return to some input devices again to pertorm additional contiguration based on items added later On example will be that you need to return to an MS528 type microphone station to add a default template after you have defined templates Define Actions This point is where you will detine what happens with the inputs and outputs in the system You will need to have any input devices defined prior to programming actions for them You must have output devices and zone zone maps defined in order to use them in an action
29. 00 FF 00 00 00 00 00 Figure 26 13 Message Details 28 7 ill TED Chapter 26 Debug Utilities GLOBALCOM 288 Debug Messages This tab is used to display various system messages that can be used tor debugging purposes The top portion of the tab contains a list of checkboxes that allow you to enable or disable a specific type of message from appearing in the message window Using this will cut down significantly on the amount of data displayed in the window and make it easier for you to track a series of messages When a box is checked then its corresponding message type will be displayed in the message window It it is not checked it will be excluded trom the display Most of these debug messages are useful to factory personnel only but there are some instances where you may need to use them For example you could only select the LIR message type if you are troubleshooting a problem related to a contact closure connected to the built in 1200LIR board in a 1200ACS unit This will allow you to verity if the contact closure is being detected by the unit or not It it is being detected but not launching an action correctly then the problem may be in the way the action is configured If the closure is not showing up in the debug window then it is not being properly detected by the 1 200LIR board and could be a connectivity problem Debug Messages Select All Clear All W Other Wv Input W Sign Manager Wv Action lv L
30. 10 39 22 AM 14954 System 1 System 1 Mic Station Control Line Failure 2 3 4 10 2012 10 37 42 AM 4 10 2012 10 39 22 AM 14959 Titan 1 20kHz Test Zone 9 Speaker Circuit Titan 1 Channel 1A 128 8 4 10 2012 10 37 58 AM 4 10 2012 10 39 12 AM 14958 Titani 20kHz Test Zone 9 Amp Output Titan 1 Channel 1A 128 7 4 10 2012 10 37 58 AM 4 10 2012 10 39 12 AM 14960 Titan 1 20kHz Test Zone 10 Amp Output Titan 1 Channel 1B 128 17 4 10 2012 10 38 00 AM 4 10 2012 10 39 12 AM 14961 Titan 1 20kHz Test Zone 10 Speaker Circuit Titan 1 Channel 1B 128 18 4 10 2012 10 38 00 AM 4 10 2012 10 39 12 AM Figure 2 6 Current Faults ID This is an index number used to uniquely identity the fault Device This field displays the system device that has reported the fault Description This is a textual description of the fault Devices report a Fault Type and Fault Number and the System Management Center uses those two numbers to apply a description as defined in the System Supervision section of the application Fault Type This is the type number reported by the System Supervision module The System Management Center uses this along with the Fault Number to apply a description as defined in the System Supervision section of the application Fault Number This is the tault number reported by the System Supervision module The System Management Center uses this along with the Fault Type to apply a description as detined in the System S
31. 16 Zone Output Device 4 2 2 bck ede oub nbis 126 DNA7800 Series Amplifier 2 140 Generic CobraNet Device 2 22 2 eee eee eee 15 SIP Telephone Interface 2 22 22 eee eee eee eee 152 Action Types 2200022eee cece cece eee 157 WS o so Santa pase eed er ar A EA EE ee dene sea 159 ActivateEntryCode eee eee cece eee eeeeeeee 159 CompNedLVe aon 2 ctr nue n EEEN 161 CombinedLive Advanced eee 161 CombinedPrerecorded _ eee ee eeee 163 CombinedPrerecorded Advanced _ 165 Delayed aaraa atosee cache eeumscs eas E 166 Delayed Advanced Properties 020 168 DelayedFromAlternateSource 169 DelayedFromAlternateSource Advanced Properties 173 Eveni cst Scteeyns ocx Svendean saauteteneaacuueee 174 ROU GED ee cete tec de eee eee ao 175 POU E e IR es ca ee tee ee a eae ak sent 176 E EEE tet aia Sd yet Os res oe EE ts Vad w hate E 176 Live Advanced Properties ee 178 LiveFromAlternateSource cece ee cence 180 LiveFromAlternateSource Advanced Properties 182 LiveOrDelayed 2002 02 e eee eee eee ee eee 184 LiveOrDelayed Advanced Properties 185 Monia lt 2 0 sa ek ee a ils diy Digs BE ple ALE LLG 187 Monitor Advanced Properties 188 PON PEEL Mag tea me A Sd A eh AT ole E aces 189 Mute Advanced Properties
32. 1602 SIP 10 2 128 174 Information Information Mic 10 Template Default Tem b 10 2 128 161 System 1 LIR Mic 257 10 2 128 171 Titan 1 Main Equipment Room Rack 2 Frame 1 16384 16 Zones 128 7 20kHz Test Zone 9 Amp Output Titan 1 Channel 1A 10 2 128 162 System 1 Sound Card First Occurance 4 20 2012 12 41 01 PM s Last Occurance 4 20 2012 12 41 38 PM Other Devices a 128 8 20kHz Test Zone 9 Speaker Circuit Titan 1 Channel 1A First Occurance 4 20 2012 12 41 02 PM Last Occurance 4 20 2012 12 41 38 PM 128 17 20kHz Test Zone 10 Amp Output Titan 1 Channel 1B First Occurance 4 20 2012 12 41 03 PM Last Occurance 4 20 2012 12 41 38 PM 128 18 20kHz Test Zone 10 Speaker Circuit Titan 1 Channel 1B First Occurance 4 20 2012 12 41 04 PM Last Occurance 4 20 2012 12 41 38 PM Figure 2 9 Device Fault Pop up Window Location This displays the text description of the device trom the Location field in the device contiguration Extra Info This column displays additional intormation contained within the contiguration of each device The intormation listed varies tor each type ot device but it is easily readable as each property is listed with the appropriate title 17 Chapter 2 Overview Tab Other Devices This tab is used to display any devices detected on the network that do not match any of the contigured devices The system uses a background process known as the Di
33. 2 BGM sources that have the same signal One will be contigured to adjust based on the Day Night Schedule while the other will not be adjusted BGM Controlled BGM Uncontrolled Figure D 2 T9160 Zone Contiguration In the image above you will see both zones configured The BGM Controlled output has a level of 10 in the Night column This means that this channel will be turned down by 10dB when the Night schedule is active It will return to OdB of attenuation when the Night schedule is inactive The level of the BGM Uncontrolled channel will not change when the Night schedule is active because its Night level is set to O Step 2 Configure Input Channel You must select the Local input tor each BGM channel Basically you are telling the T9160 frame to use the local analog input on the back and route it directly through to the output of the channel on the T6002L card In our example the mono analog output of the BGM source has been wired to inputs 4A and 4B on the back of the frame You can select either of these channels to be the BGM source tor our BGM output zones wil TED GLOBALCOM Chapter D Scheduled BGM Level Change _ Amplifier Card Slots Match To First Slot 1 V Backup Enat led 2 a Match To First Description Gate C3 Gate C4 Baggage 1 2 a Ticketing 4 5 6 Curbside Zone 6 BGM Uncontrolled Figure D 3 Local Source Selection Step 3 Use BGM Source N
34. 500ACS Announcement Control System CAS Courtesy Announce ment System T CAS FAS Flight Announcement System IED On Call IED On Call amp Design and LANcom are all registered trademarks or trademarks of Innovative Electronic Designs LLC in the United States and or other countries CobraNet is a registered trade mark of Cirrus Logic in the United States and or other countries Microsoft Windows Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows Server SQL Server and Internet Explorer are all registered trademarks or trade marks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Innovative Electronic Designs LLC 9701 Taylorsville Road Louisville KY 40299 United States of America www iedaudio com Document Number 1250C Publication History April 10 2013 Added DNA device May 9 2013 Updated DNA device August 2 2013 Updated for sottware release December 10 2013 Added new action types Table of Contents End User License Agreement iii Getting Started INMOGUCHION sissioni naa ite weve 3 System Modes joer uswesbiciebid sch iauyiateiiae 6 System Definition Roadmap a 0000000000000000 8 Oyerview Di chs esceascdoua gs satecarduwansehes 11 Announcement Activity 0 02 ee eee eee 11 Mic amp Zone Status 2cccc cnaddcceunece Sees edeesuseas 13 Guren raais eisen ees E OS 15 My Devices 2555 ehineed era a ea a 16 CERI SVICSS 26a ces bret tise teh Ne iP actin oes 18 IGCONSING f
35. 560 w3isapi mof 07 13 2009 15 872 w3tp dl1l 07 13 2009 20 480 w3wp exe 07 13 2009 55 296 w3wphost dll 07 13 2009 32 256 wamreg dll 07 13 2009 24 064 wbhhstipm dll 07 13 2009 23 552 wbhst_pm dll 07 13 2009 447 858 WebAdministration mof 07 13 2009 157 184 webdav dll 07 13 2009 15 360 webdav_ simple lock dll 07 13 2009 15 360 webdav_ simple prop dll 07 13 2009 245 760 wmi appserver dll 07 13 2009 5 9 728 WMSvc exe 06 10 2009 23 165 wmsvc exe config 07 13 2009 S16 137 728 XPath dll 119 File s 12 826 937 bytes 7 Dir s 6 120 570 880 bytes free Clear Figure 26 9 Command Shell Use Shell Execution When checked the command entered will be executed at the Windows shell level and you will not see a response This option is only for major system debugging and should only be used when instructed by IED support personnel 284 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 26 Debug Utilities Send Command This will send the command directly to the command line shell This is the equivalent of typing in the command and pressing the ENTER key if you are directly accessing the Windows Command Prompt window Send XML When this button is clicked the command will be sent as an XML formatted message directly to the vACS This is only tor sending various debug commands to the vACS service and should only be used when instructed by IED support personnel Error Counters The vACS maintains several counters that increment
36. 7 My Devices Note If you are logged in then you can double click on a device in the list to open the device configuration for that device This will display the IP address of the device If the device is detected but the IP address does not match the configuration then the device will be highlighted with a gold background and you will see a Resolve button as shown in Figure 2 13 When you click the Resolve button you will see a window like the one shown in Figure 2 8 You can choose to set the IP address of the device to match that in the configuration or choose to change the configuration to match the IP address of the device Click the OK button to update the settings in the device and or contiguration ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 2 Overview Tab Use Discovered IP 10 2 128 172 Use Configured IP 10 2 128 173 J Figure 2 8 Resolve IP Address Description This displays the text description of the device trom the Description tield in the device contiguration Faults If an icon appears in this column then the device is reporting faults These faults will be listed in the Current Faults list but you can also display a list by hovering the mouse pointer over the icon to reveal a pop up window as shown in Figure 2 9 IP Description Faults Location Extra Info Wray 10 2 128 161 System 1 VoIP Interface 1 Mic 259 SIP Server 1601 SIP fre 10 2 128 161 System 1 VoIP Interface 2 Mic 258 SIP Server
37. All Call Frame 1 17 0 102 Ticketing 103 Security 104 Building 1 All Call 105 Building 11 All Call Figure 9 3 Remote Zone Groups From here you can add one or more references to zone groups located in other systems Click the icon to add a new item to the list Then select the appropriate system trom the drop down list in the System column Remote systems must first be configured as a Remote Controller in the My Systems tab of the software Once you have selected a controller enter the desired zone group ID in the Remote ZoneGroup ID field This field is edited by double clicking on the tield and then typing in the appropriate number The selected item in the list can be deleted by clicking on the X icon 219 i TED Chapter 9 Zone Groups GLOBALCOM Remote ZoneGroup ID Building 12 101 ung bung 12 q pn Figure 9 4 Adding Remote Zone Groups 216 User Groups User Groups are used to assign individual microphone station users and or microphones to a group such as a company or service entity For many systems this provides identitication text to go along with the graphical paging station displays X Name American Airline Alaska Airlines British Airways Continental Delta Air Lines Delta Connection Frontier Fire Dept TED Korean Air Police United Airlines US Airways Southwest Figure 10 1 User Groups When a microphone station is assigned to a specitic user group
38. Controller Default Configuration Device Definition User Definition System 1 Description System 1 Send Reset Command Remote Controllers x Broadcast IP Address 10 255 255 255 System 2 External Titan Monitor Test Configuration l SEa System Number 1 Lifeline vACS 2 Group Offset 0 IP Address 10 2 150 100 Netmask 255 0 0 0 WCF Port 80 AAS Manager Address Lifeline System Lifeline vACS x Kill Lifeline LJ Use Multi 500R Protocol LJ Max RTP Connections 2 Voices Name Language Gender Speed Volume Bitrate Sample Rate Microsoft Anna American EnglishFemale 0 100 16 22000 Microsoft Lili Spanish Female 0 100 16 22000 RTP Transmitters f ID Audio Port Audio IP Devices 4 Type Description Location Actions Extra Info s 1200 Logic Inp System 1 LIR 8 Zones Start Zone 1 Mic 256 D Internal Cobra System 1 PCI SIP Telephone System 1 Telephone Interface Mic 1 SIP Server Figure 5 5 My Controller Contiguration Description Enter a descriptive text string for the system This text will appear at the top of the SMC window to identity which controller page is currently accessed Send Reset Command Click this button to restart the vACS service Note that this will take the announcement controller offline for a brief period of time Broadcast IP Address This is the network address to use when broadcasting status messag
39. Devices GLOBALCOM MS524 4 Button Paging Station a Lobby East M5524 4 Button Paging Station amp Description i Lobby East Show Base Fields Location i East Lobby located behind counter IP Address Li 10 2 128 166 Mic Number i 5 Figure 6 22 MS524 4 Button Paging Station Properties Description Enter text here to give the station a descriptive name Location Enter text here to describe the physical location of the microphone station IP Address Enter the IP address for the microphone station here Mic Number This is the number used to identify the microphone station within the announcement controller It must be a unique number within the local announcement controller Note The 524 microphone station uses DIP switches to configure the Group Number and Mic Number on the hardware They must be set to match the System Number and Mic Number in the software Actions Actions tor 524 microphone stations are divided into Global and Device Specific actions Global actions will apply to all 524 microphone stations in the controller This allows you to quickly define actions that will be common to all 524 stations Device Specific actions are those that are only associated with an individual 524 microphone station Each button on the microphone station allows you to edit or define either the Global or Device Specific actions If you have a Device Specific action then it will override the Global a
40. FaultSet and FaultClear action types the most common application is using logic inputs on a 1200LIR T9O32LVIO or TPO4ONLR to monitor external equipment You can use the logic inputs to monitor a fault relay on a UPS so any failure gets reported You could monitor a door switch so there is a record of any time that the equipment room or rack door was accessed In Figure 18 4 we have defined a fault to indicate a failure in the system UPS In this example we have not yet assigned it to a device Device Specific Fault Descriptions Description Fault Type Fault Number Device were ee Figure 18 4 Device Specitic Fault Descriptions Click this icon to add a new item to the list A Click this icon to delete the currently selected item trom the list Description Enter a textual description tor the fault 293 ill TED Chapter 18 System Supervision GLOBALCOM Fault Type Assign a number to categorize the type of this fault This is useful if you are monitoring different types of devices with logic inputs For example you could assign all UPS failures to be a type 1 while having door sensors assigned to type 12 This is one of the parameters that you will need to enter when defining an action to set or clear the fault Fault Number This combined with the Fault Type will provide you with a unique ID number for the fault This is one of the parameters that you will need to enter when defining an action to set
41. From Disk Click this button when you want to restore the system contiguration trom a backup file stored on a disk or other remote storage device You will be warned and prompted as shown in Figure 21 5 If you click Yes then you will be shown a standard Open dialog window as shown in Figure 21 6 Are you sure you wish to overwrite the XML configuration file There is no undo for this operation Figure 21 5 Restore Contirmation Once you begin the restoration process the system will shut down all appropriate services and restart with the new configuration file This operation will take the controller off line tor a short period of time 26 Ww TED Chapter 21 Backup Restore GLOBALCOM Open x K J gt E Desktop v X Search Desktop 2 Organize New folder 5 Fil wr Favorites 4 A Computer al System Folder Libraries ali a Network 3 Documents A Syster Folder a Music Pictures F Documents F videos File folder jE Computer fy SYSTEM C ca LIBRARY D 2012_5_3 11_46_26 vbk a Removable Disk E al VBK File 45 9 KB Gia Network 2012_5_3 13_45_41 vbk VBK File 45 9 KB v File narne 2012_5_3 11_46_26 vbk v vACS Config Backup Files v Cancel Figure 21 6 Open File Window Backup on vACS This is a list of all backups that are stored on the local controller The tilename is actually a date time stamp for the backup It contains the year month day hour minute and second when the backup was cre
42. Input This drop down list allows you to select the first input channel on the device that will be used as a BGM input BGM Device Once you have detined one or more devices in the system as a BGM source it is then available as an item in this drop down list You select the device trom this list that will be used as the source device tor the BGM You can then select individual channels to be used tor each zone output You can click the X icon to the right of the drop down list to clear the selection Channel Descriptions This description is used to give a name to each BGM channel that will be sourced trom this device This name will appear in selection lists tor devices when you are contiguring outputs to receive BGM 127 Mijl TED Chapter 6 Devices GLOBALCOM Monitor Test Note This button is not available when the External Titan Monitor Test Configuration checkbox is checked in the My Controller section Click this button to open the Monitor Test window for the T9116 as shown in Figure 6 73 From here you can configure the supervision parameters of the device view the latest test results or manually execute a test or set The T9116 generates a test tone that is routed to each channel and then the level is measured at the analog output of each channel Three ditterent test signals are provided e 400Hz Ideal tor full range cone type loudspeakers e 1kHz Ideal for horn type loudspeakers e 20kHz Ideal fo
43. Input Channel 304 Step 3 Use BGM Source 4 5c 0c cs Yeas ed ecsewecsaces 305 ill TED GLOBALCOM End User License Agreement End User License Agreement SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT AND LIMITED WARRANTY THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN THE USER YOU AND INNOVATIVE ELECTRONIC DESIGNS IED RELATING TO SOFTWARE AND DOC UMENTATION COLLECTIVELY SOFTWARE PROVIDED WITH IED AUDIO COMPONENTS PRODUCTS OBTAINED FROM IED OR ITS AUTHOR IZED CONTRACTORS BY INSTALLING OR USING THE SOFTWARE YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ AND UNDERSTAND THIS LICENSE AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS License In return for payment of the license fee which is part of the price for the Products and Your agreement to abide by the terms ofthis License IED grants to You a non exclusive non transferable right to use the Software solely in connection with use of the Products You may not copy the Software except for archival or backup purposes You acknowledge that IED is the sole owner of all rights in the Software including copyrights patents trademarks and other intellectual property rights all copies modifications enhancements and derivative works created therefrom subject only to the license expressly granted herein This License does not provide You with ownership of the Software or a copy of it but only a right of limited use Restrictions You may not reverse engineer or assemble decompile decode or otherwise tra
44. Logic ID 4 Logic State On 90 Figure 6 46 TJO4ONLR Actions T9016RY T9032RY Titan Relay Device T9016 Relay Box T9016RY Titan Relay Device ri Apply Configuration Now Description T9016 Relay Box Show Base Fields A Location i Main Equipment Room IP Address i 10 2 128 192 Dev Handle 16416 Frame Number i 5 ii Start Relay Zone 109 Total Relays i 16 Zones Match To First Description Triggers Activation Type Reverse Polarity 109 Relay Zone 109 Edit None Solid v E i 110 Relay Zone 110 Edit None Solid X 111 Relay Zone 111 Edit None Solid z 112 Relay Zone 112 Edit None Solid X 113 Relay Zone 113 Edit None Solid 114 Relay Zone 114 Edit None Solid 115 Relay Zone 115 Edit None Edit None 117 Relay Zone 117 Edit None 118 Relay Zone 118 Edit None Solid 119 Relay Zone 119 Edit None Solid z 116 Relay Zone 116 a a k A a v vv Figure 6 47 T9OxxRY Titan Relay Device Setup Description Enter text here to give the device a descriptive name Location Enter text here to describe the physical location of the device IP Address Enter the IP address for the device Dev Handle This is a sottware address used by the system It is assigned by the system and provided here for reference it needed ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 6 Devices Frame Numbe
45. Number of Audio Zones This licensing parameter determines how many audio output zones are allowed on the system The number of relay and sign zones do not count towards the total number of zones in the license Licensing options are available in 32 64 128 or unlimited audio zone outputs Number of Frames This licensing parameter determines the total number of Titan output trames that are allowed in the system SMS Short Message Service SMS allows the system to send text messages to mobile devices based on a variety of triggers This option requires a connection to the Internet and requires a subscription to the SMS service VoIP This determines if VoIP functionality is enabled on the controller The 1100ACS 32 1200ACS 32 1 1OOMSG and 1200MSG devices support two 2 VoIP channels and will have them enabled by default For additional VolP channels you must use the 1 1OOTEL that supports up to eight 8 channels Text to Speech Text to speech TTS is another software option that must be licensed separately trom the main system software It is not part of the SMS vACS license key but wanted to mention it here since it is a system option that must be licensed separately Figure 3 1 shows the main System Management Center SMC window The bottom of the window displays a status bar that provides you with various licensing information as well as the current mode of the vACS application The lett portion of the bar indicates
46. Off in the Logic State tield in the Extra Info column This allows you to create an action that will remain active while a contact closure is held To do this you must define an action to start the announcement and then a separate action to stop it using the other logic state The number in the Entry Code tield corresponds to the physical input on the device 8 Ww TED Chapter 6 Devices GLOBALCOM To edit an action select the action and then click the edit icon located at the top of the window It is the small round gear shaped icon You can also double click on a row in the Type column to open the editor Refer to the Action Types section for information on contiguring actions Remote Logic Device Actions lt Type Description Entry Code Extra Info Unued tgeen 200 ewe Unused Logic Input 1 OFF 1 Logic ID 1 Unused Logic Input 2 ON 2 Logic ID 2 Unused Logic Input 2 OFF 2 Logic ID 2 Unused Logic Input 3 ON 3 Logic ID 3 Unused Logic Input 3 OFF 3 Logic ID 3 Unused Logic Input 4 ON 4 Logic ID 4 Figure 6 38 Barionet5O Remote Logic Relay I O Actions 1200 Logic Input Relay Output This is the configuration for the 1 200LIR card that is installed in the 1200ACS and 1200MSG controllers This device has eight 8 logic inouts capable of sensing contact closures or logic voltages It also has eight 8 form C relay outputs for interfacing with external devices You can assign actions to each of the logic inputs The relay output
47. a progress window like the one shown in Figure 20 3 263 Ww TED Chapter 20 Software Update GLOBALCOM Restoring File Uploading files Unpacking update package contents Figure 20 3 Update Successtul Once you see that the tiles were successtully installed click the OK button to close the window You can now proceed to update the next package Caution System operation may be interrupted while an update is in progress 264 Backup Restore This section allows you to create a backup of the current system contiguration The contiguration is automatically saved as a VBK tile type on the local system It also gives you the option of saving it to a ditterent location or to your local machine if you are accessing the System Management Center from a remote location Locally stored backups are easily restored by clicking the appropriate Restore button or you can load a backup file from a disk or other removable storage device Backup Restore The Backup Restore Utility allows the user to save off a copy of Backup Config the XML configuration data used by the vACS Click the Backup i i Backup Takes button to backup all relevant config files and navigate to the resulting backup file or click the Restore button to choose a previously generated backup file to restore Restore Config from Disk Backups on vACS ena bak 2012_5_3 11_45_53 vbk View Delete Restore La bak 201
48. action Repeat Interval This is the time between successive message playbacks Positive numbers are used to designate an interval in minutes while negative numbers are used to designate an interval in seconds 5 would be 5 minutes 30 would be 30 seconds This time is from the start of the first playback to the start of the next one It the interval is set to 30 seconds and the message is 10 seconds in duration then there will be approximately 20 seconds between playbacks TTS Advanced Properties The following properties will only be visible atter selecting the Show All Fields button Copy Action Type i Show Base Fields Description all Call Live Entry Code range i 10 gt Announcement Class i Medium Priority Pri v Zone ID Use Prompt Zone Group All Call Frame 1 101 Call Frame 1 101 v auca Frome 1 001 _ Use Prompt Figure 7 48 TTS Text to Speech Action Type Show All Fields Blanking Zone Group Select the zone group to use as a blanking zone group trom the drop down list box The zone group selected will ettectively be muted when this action is executed Blanking zone groups are typically used to mute areas that are adjacent to where the announcement will be made to prevent other announcements messages or background music trom intertering with the delivery of an announcement Click the X icon to clear the selection trom the list 206 ill TED GLOBA
49. action Zones are entered either by directly typing them into the entry box i e 1 2 3 7 18 or by opening the Zone Selector by clicking the button immediately to the right of the entry box Click on an individual zone to add or remove it trom the action To add a range of zones in the same device select the first zone and then the last zone in the range while holding down the SHIFT key 207 ill TED Chapter 7 Action Types GLOBALCOM Zone Group A zone group is assigned to the action by selecting one of the previously defined zone groups trom the drop down list Multiple zone groups can be assigned to an action by clicking the icon to add more fields each with its own drop down selection list Click the X icon to remove a zone group field Once defined the action will play cumulatively to all zones included in the selected zone groups Use Prompt This feature requires a graphical paging station such as the IEDA528 series microphone station When checked this action will prompt the station user for either the zone code or zone group code for the action This gives the operator flexibility to choose the announcement or message destination at the time of launch This requires the microphone station operator to know a valid Zone ID or Zone Group that is available for use Visual Alert Select one of the pre detined visual alerts to display on any visual displays included in the assigned zone group Visual alerts remain on the displays
50. be used by the announcement controller to send visual pages to the display Display This ID number is used to identify the video output that drives this display For a single display this ID will always be 1 For a processor that is driving multiple displays this ID will correspond to the monitor output as defined in the Windows setup This ID is used to identify the sign to the system server for content display Messages This is a list of content that will be shown on the display when a visual page is not in progress A message in the list actually points to either a file or an HTML page that is either stored on the local machine or on a server The display will cycle through the list in the order based on the ID field Ime Display Messages Visual Ale w x Fir ID URL Weathe 1 Securit http 10 2 128 1 prizm 5_3_1 4 li F Use this scroll bar to access all ofthe message fields Figure 6 29 Display Messages To edit the messages you will need to double click on the Messages field in the table for the display This will open a new table that you can edit as shown in Figure 6 29 Use the scroll bar at the bottom to access the individual message tields The behavior of each message is configured using the following fields in the table ote Click the icon to add a new message to the list Click the X icon to delete the currently highlighted message trom the list URL This can be either a link pointi
51. can be played multiple times Enter the total number of times to play the message once it has been launched All messages must play at least once thus requiring at least a 1 to be in this field Indefinite When checked the Play Count edit box disappears This will allow the message to play continuously at the specified Repeat Interval until it is stopped using a StopAnnc action type programmed to stop this action Repeat Interval This is the time between successive message playbacks Positive numbers are used to designate an interval in minutes while negative numbers are used to designate an interval in seconds 5 would be 5 minutes 30 would be 30 seconds This time is trom the start of the first playback to the start of the next one If the interval is set to 30 seconds and the message is 10 seconds in duration then there will be approximately 20 seconds between playbacks Audio Take List This section is where the individual audio takes are selected and organized in the proper playback order Use the check boxes to turn on or off individual languages The up down arrows to the right are used to change the order of language playback Take Browser Click the take browse button located immediately to the right of each audio take list entry box to open the Take Browser window as shown in Figure 7 39 From here individual takes are located in the Available Takes list and added to the Current Takes list by using the Append Take an
52. checkbox to enable the Day Night schedule for each day at the programmed Day Start and Night Start times When not checked the Day Start and Night Start fields will not display any time values and the level change will not be applied for that day Day Start Enter the time of day here where the system will go from the night level to the day level Enter the time in 24 hour time format For example you would enter 8 00 for 8AM and 20 00 for 8PM 247 il TED Chapter 16 Day Night Schedule GLOBALCOM Night Start Enter the time ot day here where the system will go from the day level to the night level Enter the time in 24 hour time format For example you would enter 8 00 for 8AM and 20 00 for 8PM Night Gain Offset Each output device that is capable of Day Night Schedule level adjustments will have a Night field for its zone configuration similar to what is shown in Figure 16 2 You must contigure this level for each zone that you wish to change as part of the schedule Leaving the default value of O will effectively remove the zone from the schedule Night Gain Offset Figure 16 2 DNA7800 Zones Contiguration 248 SMS Lists Short Message Service SMS allows the system to send text messages to one or more mobile devices SMS Lists are used to create a group of telephone numbers that are then used with action detinitions to determine who will receive a message This method simplities management of phone n
53. deleting them from the system Mode There are five 5 schedule modes available from the Mode drop down list The default mode type is Daily which will allow the action to play every day based on the date and time window defined Each mode type is explained below Scheduled Actions X Schedule Entry Foyer Welcome Message Parking Garage Safety a Entry Foyer Welcome Message C Figure 13 4 Scheduled Actions Mode Daily This schedule type will play the action at the specified interval every day of the week within the programmed start and stop dates It will only play during the time window detined with the start and stop times 2933 Wl TED Chapter 13 Scheduled Actions GLOBALCOM 4 Entry Foyer Welcome Message m C i 12 00 aM 3 5 gt Ea 11 59 PM 3 i Figure 13 5 Daily Schedule Mode Weekly This mode also allows you to define a date window and a daily time window for the action to play just like the daily schedule mode It adds the ability to choose which day s of the week to play the action A day ot week selection list appears as shown in Figure 13 6 The action will only play on those days that are checked Entry Foyer Welcome Message fh i Weekly ki G 1 3 A 12 00 AM 5 iy 12 31 A 11 59 PM gt EY Figure 13 6 Weekly Schedule Mode Monthly This mode will only play the action on a specific day of the month The day is entered in t
54. delivery of an announcement Click the X icon to clear the selection trom the list Pre Announce Tone Enter the take number to be played at the start of the action to alert individuals to the message or announcement being made Leave this field blank if you do not want to play a pre announce tone Visual Take List This section is used to select a visual take to display on any visual displays included in the assigned zone group This allows a visual take trom the take library to be displayed while the announcement is in progress Refer to the Prerecorded section for instructions on using the Take Browser to add takes to the list Match to Audible Takes This button has no function for this action type as there are no audible takes for a this type of action Visual Alert Select one of the pre detined visual alerts to display on any visual displays included in the assigned zone group Visual alerts are displayed atter the completion of the visual message it detined and remain on the displays until cleared Visual alerts can also be used without any visual takes or sign text Use the Clear Alert item if this action is used to end the alert Sign Text Type in the text to be shown on any visual displays included in the assigned zone group Sign text can be used as an alternative to visual takes to define a visual message to accompany a delayed announcement DelayedFromAlternateSource When an action is triggered trom a mi
55. device IP Address Enter the IP address for the device here SIP Server IP This is the IP address or host name of the PBX that will host this VoIP line SIP Server Port This is the primary SIP port used for the VoIP service This is automatically set and should not be edited unless required by the PBX vendor 103 ill TED Chapter 6 Devices GLOBALCOM DTMF Payload Number This determines the DTMF payload number used for the VoIP service This is automatically set and should not be edited unless required by the PBX vendor DTMF Type This drop down list selects the DTMF type used for the VoIP service This is automatically set and should not be edited unless required by the PBX vendor Prompting Extensions A prompting extension will answer the line and prompt the user to select what action they wish to pertorm The prompts will play back and tell the user what button to press for an action or to move to another menu tree level The prompt tree is implement by creating a telephone template and then applying that template to the extension Ext This is the extension number that this line will use to connect to the PBX You must obtain this intormation trom the PBX provider SIP User This is the user ID that this line will use to connect to the PBX You must obtain this information trom the PBX provider SIP Password This is the password associated with the SIP User that this line will use to connect to the PB
56. do not require user login you specity the template in the microphone station properties accessed trom the Devices tab as shown in Figure 11 1 Note that the Lock Enabled box is not checked therefore the station will be accessible without a login Security 7 ee D Security Show All Foekds Locations i Secunty IP Address i 10 2 128 165 l Select the appropriate pin Hade a mic template from this drop down list Figure 11 1 Mic template selection when logins are disabled For microphone stations that require user login you associate a template with a user in the Mic Passwords tab This is done by selecting the appropriate template trom the drop down list in the Template column as shown in Figure 1 1 2 X ID Name Company Template Phone Numbers FOX Accept Phone Login Password 1 IED HM IED Default Template 1234 i 2 Fire Department FD cenit AR 9111 Default Template Scheduled Actions Figure 11 2 Mic template selection when logins are enabled 221 ill TED Chapter 11 Mic Templates GLOBALCOM 222 The flexibility of using templates assigned to different users allows you to program a system that is very easy to operate and secure from unauthorized users A user will have the same access as they move between different microphone stations This allows you to grant general users access to page pre determined areas and launch specific messages while blocking them from e
57. each time a certain type of error occurs This tab displays the current value for each of those counters These are a useful aid in tracking down certain system problems For example it you see the Activate Titan counter incrementing each time an announcement is made then it may indicate that there is a problem communicating with a Titan frame Error Counters Clear Errors Announcement Mic Station Audio System No Action 0 Parse Prompt File Open Parse 0 Net Receive 0 Associate Announcement 9 SNMP 0 IP Address 0 SRM 0 Send Annc Request 0 Language Path 0 Update Data 9 LVIO 0 Send Message 0 Bad Channel 0 Delete Data 9 Multi vACS 0 Update 0 Take List 0 Update File 0 Schedule 0 Sound Card Subchannel 0 Visual Text 0 PCI Interface 0 Sign Manager 0 Audio Path 0 Activate Titan 0 Titan Remove Zone 0 Receive Request 0 No Zone 0 Figure 26 10 Error Counters Clear Errors Click this button to reset all error counters to O NetMon NetMon is a built in network monitoring tool used to monitor Ethernet messages sent between IED devices This tool is almost exclusively reserved tor use by IED personnel but it is shown here because you may be asked to use it while communicating with support personnel Using the tool is quite simple but the data displayed by the tool is very complex and beyond the scope of this document 285 ill TED Chapter 26 Debug Utilities GLOBALCOM Double click entrie
58. icon to edit the device properties for the currently selected device A Click this icon to delete the currently selected device Actions Certain device types have the ability to trigger actions Microphone stations and logic input devices are most commonly used to launch actions Devices that can use actions will have buttons that appear in the Actions column of the device list as shown in Figure 6 4 The button will appear dimmed for those that cannot use actions ation Booth ma Mic 6 1g Counter Station Actions 15 Mic 3 Template Du Y Actions 15 Mic 4 Template D Frame 1 16384 BGM SOURCE 1 ch Figure 6 4 Device Actions Button The details tor properties and actions are specific to the type of device Refer to the device specitic documentation in this section tor details on each device type For intormation on contiguring actions please refer to the Action Types chapter of the documentation Apply Configuration Now Apply Configuration Now Figure 6 5 Apply Contiguration Now Button Some devices will have this button located at the upper left corner of the device properties window Click this button to immediately send changes to the device without closing the window 5 ill TED Chapter 6 Devices GLOBALCOM Internal CobraNet Audio Device This device is found in an 1 1 OOACS 1200ACS 1100MSG or 1200MSG unit For the 1 1 OOACS and 1200ACS it is configured from the My Controller tab as shown i
59. in the edit box The gain can also be changed by clicking and dragging the diamond icon for the filter up or down in the frequency response graph Bandwidth Oct This is only available tor Peaking filter type The filter bandwidth is set by entering a numeric value in the edit box The value used is measured in Octaves For example if a 1 3 octave filter is required then a value of 0 333 would be used The bandwidth can also be altered using vertical line icons located on each side of the diamond filter icon in the frequency response graph Click a line and move the mouse laterally to change the bandwidth Class This is only available tor Hi Pass and Lo Pass filter types The mathematical function used to calculate the filter is selected by picking an available type trom the drop down list box Currently the only type of filter class available is the Butterworth type filter Slope dB Oct This is only available tor Hi Pass and Lo Pass filter types This value determines the frequency roll off rate tor the filter in decibels per octave Available values range trom 6 dB Octave to 18 dB Octave Set Flat This button resets all filters to a gain setting of OdB flat response and disables all bands except tor band 1 143 ill TED Chapter 6 Devices GLOBALCOM Show Phase When checked the phase response through the EQ will be shown as a red curve on the graph save To File Click this button to save the EQ curve as an XML file
60. in the edit box The gain can also be changed by clicking and dragging the diamond icon tor the tilter up or down in the frequency response graph Bandwidth Oct This is only available tor Peaking and Notch filter types The filter bandwidth is set by entering a numeric value in the edit box The value used is measured in Octaves For example if a 1 3 octave filter is required then a value of 0 333 would be used The bandwidth can also be altered using vertical line icons located on each side of the diamond filter icon in the frequency response graph Click a line and move the mouse laterally to change the bandwidth Class This is only available tor Hi Pass and Lo Pass filter types The mathematical function used to calculate the filter is selected by picking an available type trom the drop down list box There are three available class types listed below e Butterworth Bessel e Linkwitz Riley Slope dB Oct This is only available tor Hi Pass and Lo Pass filter types This value determines the frequency roll off rate tor the filter in decibels per octave Available values range trom a shallow 6 dB Octave to a very steep 48 dB Octave Bypass EQ When checked this removes the effects of all filter bands trom the signal path without resetting the filters to a flat response curve When the EQ is bypassed the signal will pass through the object without any moditications to the trequency characteristics Gain Slider Edit Box Th
61. in the local controller that will be used in local zone groups with actions to trigger remote actions on the 8000 This contigures the control zones so you must also include the appropriate audio zone in the zone group in order to get live audio to the 8000 4 Click this icon to add another zone to the list ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 6 Devices A Click this icon to delete the currently selected zone trom the list ID This ID is used to uniquely identity the zone to the controller This number is automatically assigned by the system based on the Start Zone number and the position of the item in the list Description Enter a textual description of the zone here Node ID This is the Node ID of the 8000 that corresponds to this zone Entry Code This is the entry code number that will be passed trom the controller to the 8000 system that matches the specified Node ID This number must be defined in the Actions section of the 8000 contiguration This number corresponds to the Button Number in the 8000 Action detinition Start Zone This is the zone number that represents the first zone that the local controller will use to identity an 8000 The system will automatically use the next available zone number as the starting zone number when you add a new device It can be edited here it needed Total Zones This number represents the total number of zones that will be allocated to communicate with external 8000 systems Each zone
62. is also possible to select a filter and edit its frequency gain and bandwidth directly in the Frequency Response display window using the mouse to drag the filter position cut boost or bandwidth Type Select a filter type in the drop down list The available options are e Peaking A typical bandpass type filter e Notch Sharp bandpass cut only filter e Hi Pass Filter for rolling off frequencies lower than the cutoff frequency e Lo Pass Filter for rolling off frequencies higher than the cutoff frequency e All Pass Filter used for phase adjustments near the center frequency e Disabled Turn this filter off Note The options for the filter parameters will change slightly depending on the filter type selected Center Frequency Hz The center frequency or cutoff frequency of the filter is set by entering a numeric value in the edit box The frequency parameter can also be changed by dragging the diamond icon in the graph laterally lett or right Gain dB This is only available tor Peaking and Notch filter types The filter gain is set by entering a numeric value using or values for relative dB in the edit box The gain can also be changed by clicking and dragging the diamond icon for the filter up or down in the frequency response graph ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 6 Devices Bandwidth Oct This is only available tor Peaking and Notch filter types The filter bandwidth is set by entering a n
63. is fixed to the button number for tixed button microphone stations i e IEDA524 IEDA520 It is automatically assigned the next available valid entry code number tor MS528 type microphone stations but can be manually edited it needed Stations can be locked to prevent direct code entry and only allow pre programmed button access using graphical button templates Use the gt button to the right of the field to automatically select the next available valid entry code number The tollowing ranges are reserved for the optional Flight Announcement System FAS and other specialized tunctions Entry codes within these ranges cannot be used for programming actions e 1 9 e 1000 1700 e 9800 9999 e 11000 11099 The range from 1701 through 1800 is a special range that will always prompt the user for a zone group number This range is used for actions that have the Use Prompt box checked Logic ID logic input devices only For actions on logic input devices IEDT9032LVIO IEDT9O40NLR 1200LIR this corresponds to the logic input on the device used to trigger the action Logic State logic input devices only For actions on logic input devices IEDT9032LVIO IEDT9O40NLR 1200LIR this corresponds to the logic state on logic input that will trigger the action When set to ON the action will trigger when the logic input is activated When set to OFF it will trigger when the input is deactivated Select OK to store the changes and clo
64. is numbered sequentially based on the start zone entered in the Start Zone field Each zone can be used to trigger one action on a single 8000 system Actions The 8000 will send a message to the vACS controller that contains a Node ID number and an Entry Code number You must first define an action in the 8000 configuration that includes the zone defined for this controller There is a Miscellaneous Parameter field in the 8000 Action definition The number you enter there is the same number that will be passed to the vACS and used as the Entry Code to launch an action You define an action here just as you would for any other device type Refer to theAction Types section for instructions on defining individual actions For most announcements that originate trom an 8000 you will use the LiveFromAlternateSource action type 6l Ww TED Chapter 6 Devices GLOBALCOM Fire Station 8000 Actions gt 3 Entry Code Extra Info LiveFromAlternateSource Fire Station 8000 Unused 12 Logic State On AC Medium Priority Pri 6 ZoneGroup Count 1 AV Audio Figure 6 18 External 8000 Device Actions MS528 Graphical Paging Station Ticketing Counter MS528 Graphical Paging Station F Description i Ticketing Counter Show Base Fields Location i Ticketing Counter Station IP Address 10 2 128 164 userovi reo I Security 102 Ticketing EC 32756 ZG 6 Security EC 32757 ZG 6 Unused E
65. is using a Device Specific action and there is a Default action defined then you will see both listed as shown for the PTT button in Figure 6 23 An icon is also displayed indicating that a Device Specific action is overriding the Default action Since both are displayed it will show you what the button will do if you choose to delete the Device Specitic action or it you need to edit the Default action Some abbreviations used in the Extra Info column are listed below e AC Annnouncement Class e ZG Zone Group e AV This will say Audio Visual or Both to indicate the presence of audio and or video takes e EC Entry Code You can edit a button by selecting single click it in the list and then clicking one of the appropriate icons located at the top of the window You can also double click on the button in the list to edit it 67 ill TED Chapter 6 Devices GLOBALCOM Note Any time you attempt to add edit or delete a button action you will be prompted to select either the Device Specitic or Default action with a dialog box similar to the one shown in Figure 6 24 Figure 6 24 shows the prompt that will appear it you selected to Add or Edit a button that does not have either a Device Specific or Default action assigned Note that you can select to Add either type of action to the button by clicking on the appropriate button This will take you to the standard action definition window Reter to the Action Types se
66. level will increase by an amount proportional to the detected level as determined by the Scaling Constant The maximum level increase is determined by the Limit slider e Slave This mode will cause the selected channel to follow the ambient noise compensation settings of another channel Using this setting allows multiple outputs on the same 19116 frame to be adjusted by a single sensor or a gang of sensors This setting is useful in very large spaces where multiple amplifier channels are required due to the power load requirements of the loudspeaker lines Select the channel that this channel will be slaved to trom the drop down list Note A channel can only be slaved to a channel that is located in the same T9116 maintrame Program This level meter displays the real time audio signal level at the input of the Ambient Analysis object This signal is post EQ and post delay but does not have the test signal Sensors Level This level meter displays the real time sound pressure level SPL trom the ambient noise sensor Note This level is the sum of both the ambient noise in the space and the program audio trom the system The Ambient Analysis algorithm tilters out the audio system s contribution to the overall level and provides a real value of ambient noise level to the system for processing Sensors Threshold The threshold determines the level at which the ambient noise compensation is suspended because the
67. must detine an action to start the announcement and then a separate action to stop it using the other logic state 85 ill TED Chapter 6 Devices GLOBALCOM The number in the Entry Code field corresponds to the physical input on the device To edit an action select the action and then click the edit icon located at the top of the window It is the small round gear shaped icon You can also double click on a row in the Type column to open the editor Refer to the Action Types section for information on configuring actions 1200LIR Actions Fe Type Description Entry Code Extra Info Logic Input 1 OFF 1 Logic ID 1 Logic State Off Stop Action Logic Input 1 ON Logic 1 On ZG 101 Stop Mic 1200LIR N Logic ID 1 Logic State On AC Low Priority Pri 8 Play Count 0 Repeat Interval 10 Takes 49152 9006 E sal eee ZoneGroup Count 1 AV Both FaultClear Logic Input 2 OFF Logic ID 2 Logic State Off FaultType 1 FaultNum 1 FaultSet Logic Input 2 ON Logic ID 2 Logic State On FaultType 1 FaultNum 1 Unused Logic Input 3 ON Logic ID 3 Logic State On Unused Logic Input 3 OFF Logic ID 3 Logic State Off Unused Logic Input 4 ON Logic ID 4 Logic State On Figure 6 42 1200LIR Actions T9O40NLR Noise Logic amp Relay Device The TOO4ONLR is a device that combines ambient noise sensor inputs logic inputs and relay outputs into a single device It has the tollowing capacities e 16ambient noise senso
68. network or vLAN as all of the primary controllers that it will monitor 2 Add the Liteline controller to each monitored primary announcement controller in each respective Remote Controllers detinition section 3 Add each monitored primary announcement controller to the Lifeline controller s mon itoring list as shown in Figure 22 1 Lifeline Control x Number IP CobraNet Audio Device IP Monitor Alive Taken Over 2 10 11 99 210 11 993 0 11 99 3 z True False Force mem Save Lifeline Figure 22 1 Lifeline Monitoring List Click this icon to add a new system to the monitoring list Click this icon to delete the currently selected system from the monitoring list Number This is the system number for the monitored controller IP Enter the IP address for the monitored controller This will be the IP address of the network card in the controller 269 ill TED Chapter 22 Lifeline Control GLOBALCOM CobraNet Audio Device IP Enter the IP address for the CobraNet interface card in the monitored controller This address will typically be one number higher than the IP address of the device Monitor When checked the Lifeline system will monitor the primary announcement controller and take over if it fails When not checked it will no longer monitor the primary controller tor failures This allows you to temporarily exclude a controller trom automatic backup while you are working on that system Ali
69. other announcement controllers within a multi controller system You make announcements or launch messages to zones that are owned by other controllers by including them in the Remote ZoneGroups field of a local zone group When an action includes a zone group with a remote zone group detined it will send an announcement request to the other systems using the same priority as the one specitied in the action definition in the source controller The behavior of the action is controlled by the source controller and the zones in the remote controllers are treated as live zones off of the source controller Thus when a delayed message is recorded on System A it will open a live path to the zones included on System B when it plays back Prerecorded messages are also played on the source controller while routed live to the remote controller s zones that are available The source controller will check zone availability on any remote controllers and respond with a BUSY response if the announcement cannot play in any of the remote controllers If partial activation is allowed the announcement will proceed with those zones that are available To add a new remote zone group double click in the Remote ZoneGroups field of the zone group that you wish to edit This changes the field to display a button as shown in Figure 9 3 Once it is visible click the button to open the editor as shown in Figure 9 4 ID Description Zone Count Remote ZoneGroups 101
70. other controller RTP Transmitters Click the icon to add a new transmitter to the list Click the X icon to delete the currently selected item from the list 46 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 5 My System ID Each transmitter will be assigned its own unique ID number This is a system assigned number and cannot be edited Audio Port This is the RTP port number that will be used along with the multicast group IP address to uniquely identity the audio channel This number is automatically calculated by the system but can be changed to meet the installation network requirements The detault port number is calculated using the following tormula 4000 1000 x system number ID For example transmitters 1 and 2 on system 1 would use ports 5001 and 5002 Transmitters 1 and 2 on system 2 would use ports 6001 and 60072 Audio IP This is the multicast group IP address used by this controller The detault address is 239 192 0 x where x corresponds to the system number When combined with the port number this provides a unique transmitter address The address and or port contiguration can be changed to meet the installation network requirements as needed 47 ill TED GLOBALCOM This page has been intentionally left blank 48 Devices Devices are the individual hardware components used in the system Each must first be defined in the Devices section of the software in order to be used Once defined devices ca
71. resources have been secured and the announcement is ready to play This is immediately followed by a change to Active status Type This field displays the type of the announcement in the list 12 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 2 Overview Tab e Prerecorded This type of announcement indicates a playback of digitally recorded audio trom the internal sound card When a Delayed message is playing back it becomes a Prerecorded type e Delayed This type indicates that an announcement is in the process of being recorded for future playback When it plays back it becomes a Prerecorded announcement type e Live This indicates that a live audio route is present between an input source and one or more output zones Zones This is a list of zones that are included in the announcement Source This number corresponds to the Mic Number of the device that started the announcement Clear Announcements Click this button to clear the announcement activity list This only clears the list and will not impact any announcements that are still active Mic amp Zone Status This tab provides a real time graphical representation of announcement activity on the local announcement controller Inout sources are shown on the lett with a number that corresponds to the Mic Number in the device setup Each output zone is shown on the right with a number corresponding to the zone number Mic amp Zone Status System 1 LIR Titan 1
72. should not be changed unless it is required tor a custom installation Remote TX This number represents the ID number of the CobraNet bundle that the remote controller will use to send announcements to other controllers This is used by the local controller along with the System Number to calculate the actual bundle number to receive audio signals trom the remote controller For most systems this number will be 1 and can be found in the Internal CobraNet Audio Device setup on the remote system as shown in Figure 5 8 Solem 1 Sound Card 7 Den Puree doris Taure Depia T A Pa EST E T Lair pi Tracuratiers Figure 5 8 Internal CobraNet Audio Device Transmitter Channels 45 ill TED Chapter 5 My System GLOBALCOM Lifeline System Select the Liteline ACS it used that will be used to back up this controller trom the drop down list Since one Liteline ACS may backup multiple controllers it is important for the local controller to know which Liteline ACS will backup each controller to prevent any contlicts Click the X icon to the right of the drop down list to remove the selection In order for a system to appear in this list you must have a system defined as a vACS Lifeline type in the Remote Controllers list Push Takes It this box is checked the local controller will transfer new audio and visual takes to the remote controller as they are added to the local controller When used appropriately this will
73. the appropriate input source that will be routed as a result of this action 170 TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 7 Action Types Copy Action Action specific to device Administrator Rack LIR Overrides default action Logic Input amp ON Logic 8 On i DelayedFromAlternat Show All Fields Description All Call Recorded Administrator Rack Telephone Interface Administrator Rack LIR 150241 1 Mic 201 1502AI 1 Mic 202 150241 2 Mic 203 1502AI 2 Mic 204 1502AI 3 Mic 205 1502AI 3 Mic 206 1502AI 4 Mic 207 1502AI 4 Mic 208 528 Mic Station Number 3 Group 1 Figure 7 11 Alternate Source Selection The destination for the announcement is determined by the Zone ID or Zone Group fields These parameters are mutually exclusive thus only one zone destination method may be used Zone Group A zone group is assigned to the action by selecting one of the previously detined zone groups trom the drop down list Multiple zone groups can be assigned to an action by clicking the icon to add more fields each with its own drop down selection list Click the X icon to remove a zone group tield Once detined the announcement will play cumulatively to all zones included in the selected zone groups 17 Ww TED Chapter 7 Action Types GLOBALCOM Co py Action Action specific to device Administrator Rack LIR Overrides default action Logic Input 8 ON Logic 8 On Type i DelayedFrom
74. the message or announcement being made Leave this field blank if you do not want to play a pre announce tone Visual Take List This section is used to select a visual take to display on any visual displays included in the assigned zone group This allows a visual take from the take library to be displayed while a live announcement is in progress Refer to the Take Browser section for instructions on using the Take Browser to add takes to the list ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 7 Action Types Match to Audible Takes This button has no function for this action type as there are no audible takes for a live announcement Visual Alert Select one of the pre defined visual alerts to display on any visual displays included in the assigned zone group Visual alerts are displayed atter the completion of the visual message it detined and remain on the displays until cleared Visual alerts can also be used without any visual takes or sign text Use the Clear Alert item if this action is used to end the alert Sign Text Type in the text to be shown on any visual displays included in the assigned zone group Sign text can be used as an alternative to visual takes to define a visual message to accompany a live message CombinedPrerecorded This action type is only available tor the MS520 type of microphone station and is identical to the Prerecorded action type except that the destination is determined at the time of launch based on
75. the appropriate collector device trom the Noise Sensor Device drop down list Then select up to tour 4 sensors to use for the channel Note Sensor inputs on collector units are sub divided into groups of eight 8 All sensors for a single channel must reside on the same collector unit group If a sensor is currently selected tor a channel then all other groups will be grayed out and not available for selection To change to a sensor that is not located in the currently selected group tirst un check all sensor assignments then any sensor group will be available tor selection Calibration Take Enter the take number that you wish to play during the calibration if you wish to use something other than the detault of 7770 Calibrate Press this button to start the calibration process A calibration message will be played to the channel output Caution Theambient noise level in the area being calibrated needs to be at least 15dB below the sensor threshold level setting during calibration in order to yield a valid calibration 138 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 6 Devices Test The Test button will play the calibration take to the selected channel This is used atter the calibration process is complete to see if the system correctly differentiates between program and ambient noise When the test take is playing and the calibration has been successtul the level should not change It the system turns up or down during the tes
76. the button will result in opening the scroll box You then simply scroll up and down on the microphone station to select the item you wish to use Mic Templates ID Description Button Width Lock Timeout Default Text Color Default Button Color Text Table 1 Default Template 96 900 ED ED 2 Security 110 D i b Buttons for template Security 3 Action EC Preview Text Color Button Color Caption Line 1 Caption Line 2 Scrollbox Is Logout W Emergency All Call EC 911 ZG 101 Ed aly cco o Aly cs Aly cot CB Emergency All Call Mute Fire Evac Emergency Messages Tornado Intruder lear Mute lear Fire Evac Clear Messages lear Tornado lear Intruder Logout SU UE Figure 11 9 Buttons with Scroll Boxes Figure 11 9 shows a template that has two buttons with scroll boxes You can see a list of the items in the Scrollbox column To create a scroll box tor a button or edit an existing one simply double click on the field to gain access to the Open Editor button as shown in Figure 1 1 10 Preview Text Color Button Color Caption Line 1 Caption Line 2 Scrollbox Is Logout ee LE GE m aa ad aJ E D Emergency Messages Editor Figure 11 10 Scroll Box Editor Button 226 miw TED Chapter 1 1 Mic Templates GLOBALCOM Figure 11 11 shows the scroll box editor From here you can edit the appearance of the scroll box and add or remove items trom the list You will see a preview of the
77. the color that you want to use The color picker window provides a row of the most recently used colors along the bottom of the window This allows you to pick consistent colors when designing templates Recently used colors Ny K Figure 11 4 Button Color Selection Text Table This table contains the text for the prompts that are used by the microphone station You can edit the text in the Text column for each prompt if needed 223 Ww ED Chapter 11 Mic Templates GLOBALCOM 224 Text Entries Default Template ID Default Text Text feo 528 Mic Station IED 528 Mic Station Cancel Cancel Up Up Down Down Select Select Previous Previous More More 2190 2190 2192 2192 O Bae SN Boe un EEG u pm Back Sp Back Sp Mic Number Not Assigned Mic Number Not Assigned Waiting For Host Waiting For Host Press Mic Switch Press Mic Switch Press Announce 0 Button Press Announce 0 Button Release Mic Switch Release Mic Switch Release Announce 0 Button Release Announce 0 Button Entry Code Entry Code Error Invalid Code Error Invalid Code Enter Zone Code Enter Zone Code Error Invalid Zone Code Error Invalid Zone Code Enter Numeric Selection 3 Enter Numeric Selection 3 Error Invalid Entry Error Invalid Entry Enter Arrival Flight Number Enter Arrival Flight Number Error Invalid Flight Number Error Invalid Flight Number w Figure 11 5 Text Table Mic Template Button
78. the three levels Overall Emg and BGM and the BGM Channel selection and copy them to the remaining zones in the device EQ Click this button to open the EQ editor tor the output channel 1502 Audio Inbox Device The 1502 provides two balanced analog inputs that can be used as either announcement source inputs or BGM inputs When used as an announcement source you create actions using the LiveFromAlternateSource action type to route the input to a zone group Using logic inputs to trigger actions you can route a signal trom an external system such as a fire alarm Note You cannot use the input channels of the 1502AIO as different input source types Both inputs are either used as BGM sources or microphone sources You cannot use one input as a BGM input and the other as a microphone source BGM Input Device 1502 Audio Inbox Device _ lw Apply Configuration Now Description i BGM Input Device show Base Fields Location i Main Equipment Room tas co me umer Type Number of Channels LocalOnly 2 tocaioniy o Figure 6 51 1502 Audio Inbox Device Setup Description Enter text here to give the device a descriptive name Location Enter text here to describe the physical location of the device 79 Mjw TED Chapter 6 Devices GLOBALCOM IP Address Enter the IP address for the device here Mic Number Each input on the device must have its own unique mic number This is the number used
79. then the text trom the Name tield will appear at the top of the station display Figure 10 2 shows the setup screen tor a 528 Graphical Paging Station type device The drop down list for the Company field is populated trom the User Groups list In this example IED will appear at the top of the microphone station display 217 miw TED Chapter 10 User Groups GLOBALCOM Ticketing Counter p MS528 Graphical Paging Station Description 4 Ticketing Counter Show Base Fields Location 4 Ticketing Counter Station IP Address i 10 2 128 164 Mic Model ki z Company HM IED Z x Mic Template Default Template X x Mic Local 1 4 Ticketing 102 X Mic Local 2 Security 103 X Mic Local 3 y Mic Local 4 X s rae as ee ONICO MEG i z z o o J Sidekick C E FME Figure 10 2 MS528 Graphical Paging Station Setup If a station is locked and requires user logins then a user group can be associated with the user from the Company field in the Mic Passwords tab as shown in Figure 10 3 In this case the user name as entered in the Name field will display at the top of the graphical display indicating who is currently logged into the station ID Name Company Template Phone Numbers Accept Phone Login Password Test HM IED Default di bei 1234 OxX 9111 2 Fire Department FD Fire Dept Security Figure 10 3 Mic Passwords User Groups bec
80. to Channel 2B Calibration Take Enter the take number that you wish to play during the calibration if you wish to use something other than the detault of 7055 Calibrate Press this button to start the calibration process A calibration message will be played to the channel output Caution The ambient noise level in the area being calibrated needs to be at least 15dB below the sensor threshold level setting during calibration in order to yield a valid calibration Test The Test button will play the calibration take to the selected channel This is used atter the calibration process is complete to see if the system correctly differentiates between program and ambient noise When the test take is playing and the calibration has been successtul the level should not change It the system turns up or down during the test playback then either the either the calibration constant should be adjusted or a re calibration should be attempted Monitor Test Click this button to open the automated test window for the DNA amplifier as shown in the following image From here you can view test results initiate a test calibrate the test points and configure the automated testing functions 148 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 6 Devices Inaudible set Test Audible Set Test Iv Show 20000 He Fa Show 220 Hz 10 ds 20 gp Frequency SpeakerCurrent E Set Test Var lw Audible 3 561 3 584 0 023 Zone 27
81. unit compares the test values measured with the values stored when a system set was pertormed Any variances in the level are displayed in the Var column of the table Variances that are outside of the acceptable tolerance are shown in red Items in red will generate a tault report that is sent to the system supervisor sottware Set Click this button to execute a test for the selected trequency but store the measured values as a baseline comparison for a system test of the same frequency You should run a system set when you know the system is operating correctly The unit will then use 114 GLOBALCOM lit TED Chapter 6 Devices these values to determine if there is a fault Schedule Each frequency can be configured to run on a schedule Scroll to the bottom of the results table to tind the schedule contiguration options as shown in Figure 6 67 For simplicity only one schedule is shown as enabled The start stop times day of week and interval options for the other frequencies will appear if their boxes are checked 400Hz Set Test 1kHz Set Test 20kHz Set Test V Show V Show V Show 0 256 68 469 MEMES 256 28 133 ME i 256 62 672 EEEE 256 22 375 B 0 256 57 672 EEEE 256 22 539 B 00 01 00 Click a checkbox to enable ordisable the schedueled test for each day of the week Click a checkbox to enable or disable the schedule for each frequency an Figure 6 67 Test Schedules St
82. used within a range trom 6dB of attenuation to 6dB of gain Set Flat This button resets all filters to a gain setting of OdB flat response and disables all bands except for band 1 Show Phase When checked the phase response through the EQ will be shown as a red curve on the graph 119 ill TED Chapter 6 Devices GLOBALCOM Save Local Copy Click this button to save the EQ curve as an XML file This allows you to archive the file as well as save it as a preset and load it into other channels Load From File Click this button to open a standard Windows tile dialog window From here you can locate an XML tile that has been stored with an EQ curve and load it into the frame Get From Frame Click this button to torce the window to reload the current EQ settings trom the trame Copy Click this button to copy all of the current EQ settings to the clipboard You can then move to another channel and use the Paste button to copy settings between channels Paste Click this button to paste the EQ settings stored on the clipboard to the current channel This button will be dimmed if there are no available EQ settings to paste from the clipboard Ambient Titan series amplifier frames are equipped with ambient noise compensation Ambient Analysis capabilities when paired with a noise sensor collector such as a T9032NS Ambient Analysis adjusts the output attenuation of a channel in response to ambient noise level measure
83. when an announcement is made to the zone A value of 10 will reduce the BGM level by 10dB when an announcement is made A value of 60 will effectively mute the BGM level when an announcement is made Delay Each output on the T9116 has signal delay that can be used for loudspeaker alignment Enter a numerical value to represent the number of milliseconds ms to use for the delay BGM Channel This drop down list allows you to select an individual channel to use as the zone BGM The channels available are for the device selected in the BGM Device field Match to First Click this button to take the three levels Overall Emg BGM and Duck Delay and the BGM Channel selection of the first zone and copy them to the remaining zones in the device EQ Each channel has a nine band parametric EQ available to adjust the signal as necessary to meet the needs of the loudspeakers and allow the system to be adjusted to maximize intelligibility in the acoustic space Press the EQ button tor a channel to open the EQ 131 ill TED Chapter 6 Devices GLOBALCOM window as shown in Figure 6 76 EQ for Titan 1 Zone 1 k Overall Gain 0 Set Flat Save Local Copy Copy Load From File Paste Get From Frame mle _ Show Phase Bypass EQ _ Hi Pass v LoPass v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v 880 643 47 765 10312 377 6 150 0 273 Linkwitz Besse
84. you insert it into the system You will need a T6002 card for the T9160 which provides two line outputs instead of the usual power amplifier card The card is not necessary when using a 19116 because it is already line level only The signal tlow is shown in the tigure below T9160 Direct In 4A Out A Direct In 4B p a BGM Source To Audio Network Figure D 1 BGM Wiring for Scheduled Level Control By doing this you are running the BGM source through the Titan frame and using two zone outputs that will function as inputs to the 1502Al Audio Input module The 1502Al will digitize the BGM signal and distribute it on the audio network to be used by any of the output devices that are present on the same network The system considers these two outputs as Zones which allows you to control them using the Day Night Schedule Caution DO NOT use these zones in a zone group oras a destination for an action Also DO NOT select a BGM channel to either of these two zones as doing so runs the risk of creating a feedback loop 303 Wl TED Chapter D Scheduled BGM Level Change GLOBALCOM Step 1 Configure Zones 304 In this example we are going to use two zones in a 19160 frame using a T6002L card loaded in slot 4 of the maintrame We have created two zones labeled BGM Controlled and BGM Uncontrolled Both are receiving the same mono BGM signal as shown in the previous diagram The intent here is to provide two
85. 0 5 0 10 148 10 164 0 016 44 422 44 422 g 20 602 20 602 0 7 93 56 43 BBR 45 351 22 E 20 438 20 OOF 10 516 10 516 0 49 445 49 445 0 Figure 6 74 Test Results Table The actual measured values at each point are displayed in the Test column for each test point The unit compares the test values measured with the values stored when a system set was pertormed Any variances in the level are displayed in the Var column of the table Variances that are outside of the acceptable tolerance are shown in red Items in red will generate a tault report that is sent to the system supervisor sottware Set Click this button to execute a test for the selected trequency but store the measured values as a baseline comparison for a system test of the same frequency You should run a system set when you know the system is operating correctly The unit will then use these values to determine if there is a fault Schedule Each frequency can be configured to run on a schedule Scroll to the bottom of the results table to tind the schedule contiguration options as shown in Figure 6 75 For simplicity only one schedule is shown as enabled The start stop times day of week and interval options for the other frequencies will appear it their boxes are checked 129 TED Chapter 6 Devices GLOBALCOM 400Hz Set Test 1kHz Set Test 20kHz Set Test V Show V Show V Show 20 586 20 586 0 256 68 469 REEE 256 23 195 D 20 5
86. 00 er i dt Device Type Specific Fault Decriptions Description Fault Type Figure 18 2 System Supervision Fault Number Device Type 251 ill TED Chapter 18 System Supervision GLOBALCOM As you can see trom Figure 18 2 there are several individual lists in the System Supervision section With the exception of the SNMP Endpoints list they are used to associate a textual description to a fault message reported from a device The three lists Generic Fault Descriptions Specific Fault Descriptionsand Device Type Specific Fault Descriptions are configured with the necessary information for nearly all applications However you do have the ability to edit the descriptions if the installation requires it The last list Device Specific Fault Descriptions will give you a method to define your own faults based on the usage of specific devices installed in your system SNMP Endpoints 252 The system will send out SNMP messages when faults are detected and when they clear This allows you to use a third party SNMP monitoring application to monitor the audio system along with other network devices within the facility This also allows a system composed of multiple vACS units to be monitored using a centralized software monitoring application often referred to as an SNMP Trap SNMP Endpoints IP Pot Community public 10 2 128 161 163 IED Figure 18 3 SNMP Endpoints Click this icon to add a ne
87. 16471 16411 or T6441 This type will disable the zone for the second channel that is available in the slot thus removing it from the total zone count Dual Channel Select this type if the slot contains a dual channel amplifier card such as the 16482 16472 16412 or T6002 Backup Enabled Check this box to enable the backup amplifier card switching tor the channel If the card fails it will automatically switch to the backup amplifier card located in slot 9 of the unit Match to First Click this button to take the current settings for slot 1 and apply them to slots 2 through 8 Zones This list allows you to contigure each output zone in the device Zone Number This is the number that will be used to identity this output zone in the system This number is calculated based on the values in the Start Zone and Total Zones fields Each output channel in a T9160 is an individual zone Description Double click on this tield to edit a text descriptor tor the zone Levels e Overall This is the master output level control tor the zone Adjusting this level will change the levels of both announcements and BGM This number represents the amount of attenuation relative to OdBFS So a value of 30 will attenuate the level by 30dB To reduce the level by an additional 10dB you would enter a value of 40 116 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 6 Devices e Emg This field defines an offset to the Overall level to use when an annou
88. 18 12 This will be followed by a prompt that allows you to save the log prior to clearing it You can also save the log by selecting the Save All Events As item from the menu p File Action View Help fa E Open Saved Log Create Custom Vieww Import Custom Wiews rae a E Filter Current Log Properties Find Save All Events As Attach a Task To this Log E a A Refresh Help A Subscriptions General Details Figure 18 12 Clear Log IED Fault Log Number of events 0 Date and Time 257 ill TED GLOBALCOM This page has been intentionally left blank Print Configuration The system will generate a report that contains a list of all system settings necessary to document a configuration You can use this report to store a paper copy for system documentation or as a backup should you ever need to re build the system trom scratch The report is generated as a HTML tile that can be printed or saved as a tile The print icon appears at the top of the System Management Center window as shown in Figure 19 1 2 IP Address 10 2 178 161 Netmask 255 0 0 0 MAC Address E069954F7693 Overview Configuration Admin System Version 1 0 4489 27419 Welcome Admin User logout Figure 19 1 Print Configuration Icon Figure 19 2 shows an example of the first part of the generated configuration report
89. 2 could be used for all immediately adjacent zones Mic Local 3 could apply to all zones within the local building Using this feature allows you to create actions that function relative to the location of the microphone station that is used to launch the action You can clear the selection in this field by clicking on the X icon to the right of the field Monitor Enabled Check this box when using a microphone station with an attached monitor speaker such as the IEDA528SRM 63 ill TED Chapter 6 Devices GLOBALCOM Test Mic Capsule Check this box if the microphone station uses the 510HH handheld microphone This optional model of microphone has a built in oscillator used to test the function of the microphone element Do not check this box it the microphone station has the standard 501HH handheld microphone Language Select the default language for the microphone station trom the drop down list This selects the language used to display the various built in prompts Click the X icon to the right of the field to clear the entry Lock Enabled When checked users are required to login using a password that has been contigured in the Mic Passwords tab When enabled the graphical template specitied in the Mic Template field is ignored and the template is determined by the user password Login Timeout When microphone stations require user login it will also automatically logout after the interval specified in this field
90. 2011 2 01 PM Shortcut C Libraries Eula txt Ls 7 28 2006 9 32 AM Text Document 7 KB Documents fai IED1200LIR Test Application 6 21 2011 3 29PM ClickOnce Applica 1KB a Music fai Notepad 10 19 2011 5 28 AM Shortcut 2KB ies Pictures P procexp chm 3 24 2010 11 09 AM Compiled HTML 71KB EE Videos OY procexp exe 9 19 2011 10 36AM Application 4 733 KB HR Trap Receiver GUI 10 19 2011 5 29 AM Shortcut 3 KB JE Computer fy SYSTEM C E ASIControl Date modified 5 2 2011 2 01 PM Shortcut Size 1 05 KB Date created 4 12 2011 12 48 PM Figure 6 8 Tools Folder If you do not have the Tools shortcut on the desktop you can launch the AS Control utility by going to the Windows Start menu as shown in Figure 6 9 9 Ww TED Chapter 6 Devices GLOBALCOM GlobalCom Management Console Cy services gt Notepad Computer SA Control Panel Command Prompt Run il Windows System Log LD CobraNet Discovery Disk Cleanup 2 Trap Receiver GUI Coal ANTS Memory Profiler 7 gt All Programs ley Start Figure 6 9 ASIControl in Start Menu Changing the ASI Card IP Address Once the AS Contro utility has started you should see the device listed in the top part of the window as shown in Figure 6 10 This list will display all CobraNet devices that are on your network but you will see the card listed with AS15408 in the Name field FA Asicontral File Adapter Options Help Type Index Name
91. 2_5_3 11_46_26 vok Delete Restore View Figure 21 1 Backup Restore Backup Config Click this button to create a new backup configuration file A local backup will automatically be saved and a new browser window will appear with the contents of the backup configuration file as shown in Figure 21 2 265 Ww TED Chapter 21 Backup Restore GLOBALCOM 266 E http localhost bak 2012_5_3 13_45_41 vbk Windows Internet Explorer 2 x http localhost bak 2012_5_3 13_45_41 vbk File Edit View Favorites Tools w Favorites E http localhost bak 2012_5_3 13_45_41 vbk lt configDocs systemType sm VACS gt lt document path c ied services vacs vacs xml gt lt IEDVACSConfig gt lt systems gt lt system id 1 gt lt Desc yvalue IED GLOBALCOM System gt lt Type value vACS gt lt Group value 0 gt lt SystemNumber value 1 gt lt IsMe value True gt lt EmergencyBundle value 4 gt lt IP instance 1 value 10 2 128 161 gt lt IP instance 2 yvalue 0 0 0 0 gt lt Netmask value 255 0 0 0 gt lt SoundCardIP value 0 0 0 0 gt lt Broadcast value 10 255 255 255 gt lt IsBGMSource value False gt lt kKillLifeline value False gt lt UseMultiSOOR value False gt lt BootMode value Normal gt lt MaxRTPConnections value 2 gt lt WCFPort value 80 gt lt system gt lt systems gt lt annou
92. 31 26 PM 3 29 2012 43126 PM TED Systern Supervision TED Systern Supervision IED System Supervision Event 2 IED System Supervision General Details Mew Fault Description Ticketing Counter Mic Station Control Line Failure Technical Detail Fault Type 2 Fault Wurmberd Device ID 0 Figure 18 10 IED Fault Log New Fault When a fault is cleared it will appear in the list as Information Figure 18 11 shows an example of an entry tor a fault that has cleared 256 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 18 System Supervision IED Fault Log Murnber of events 14 0 New events available D Infarmation 3 29 2012 4 31 46 PM TED Systern Supervision Information Info rmation GInfo ration DInfo ration W Error 4 P Error 3 29 2012 431 46 PM af29 2012 431 46 PM 3 29 2012 431 46 PM 3 29 2012 431 46 PM 3 29 2012 4 31 29 PM 3 29 2012 4 31 26 PM Event 1 IED Systern Supervision General Details Fault Cleared Description Ticketing Counter Mic station Control Line Failure Technical Detail Fault Type 2 Fault Nurmbers Device ID 0 IED System Supervision IED System Supervision IED System Supervision IED System Supervision IED System Supervision IED System Supervision Figure 18 11 IED Fault Log Cleared Fault The log will continue to accrue entries over time so you may wish to clear the log at some point To do this select Clear Log from the Action menu as shown in Figure
93. 5072 40020 tf 5073 40022 i 5074 40024 tf 5084 40044 5077 40030 Fe 5078 40032 Description Location OK o cana _ Mg Figure 6 86 SIP Telephone Interface Configuration Description Enter text here to give the device a descriptive name Location Enter text here to describe the physical location of the device IP Address Enter the IP address for the device here SIP Server IP This is the IP address or host name of the PBX that will host this VoIP line 153 ill TED Chapter 6 Devices GLOBALCOM SIP Server Port This is the primary SIP port used for the VoIP service This is automatically set and should not be edited unless required by the PBX vendor DTMF Payload Number This determines the DTMF payload number used for the VoIP service This is automatically set and should not be edited unless required by the PBX vendor DTMF Type This drop down list selects the DTMF type used for the VoIP service This is automatically set and should not be edited unless required by the PBX vendor Prompting Extensions A prompting extension will answer the line and prompt the user to select what action they wish to pertorm The prompts will play back and tell the user what button to press for an action or to move to another menu tree level The prompt tree is implement by creating a telephone template and then applying that template to the extension Ext This is the extension number that this line will us
94. 6 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 6 Devices 1100DAB Digital Audio Bridge 1100 Digital Audio Bridge Apply Configuration Now Description Location d Local CobraNet IP Global CobraNet IP Backup Local CobraNet IP Backup Global CobraNet IP Transmitters y wW wv wW W ID Bundle Number 1985 oon Don Wn F amp F W N R b oa O fee O SI O Bes O TEI oO Bundle 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Type A i 1100DAB Digital Audio Bridge show Base Fields J Main Equipment Room i 10 2 150 103 192 168 2 100 i 10 2 150 104 i 192 168 2 101 Type Number of Channels LocalOnly 8 3 Unused 0 Unused 0 Unused 0 Unused 0 Unused 0 Unused 0 Unused 0 Unused 0 Unused 0 Unused 0 Number of Channels LocalOnly 1 LocalOnly 1 LocalOnly 1 LocalOnly 1 LocalOnly 1 LocalOnly 1 LocalOnly 1 LocalOnly 1 Figure 6 59 1 1OODAB Digital Audio Bridge Configuration Description Enter text here to give the device a descriptive name Location Enter text here to describe the physical location of the device Local CobraNet IP Address Enter the IP address here that will be used to identity the device on the backup local GLOBALCOM network Global CobraNet IP Address Enter the IP here that will be used to identity the device to the second audio network Backup Local CobraNet IP Address This is a backup port that can be used when redundant networks are in place Do not conn
95. 94 20 594 0 20 727 20 727 0 Click a checkbox to enable ordisable the schedueled test for each day of the week Click a checkbox to enable or disable the schedule for each frequency Figure 6 75 Test Schedules Start Stop Times You can restrict the times that a test will run based on the times entered in these two fields To run continuously enter 12 00 AM as the start time and 11 59 PM as the stop time Interval Enter the time in minutes between each test Note If you only want the test to play once per day you must enter an interval greater than the difference between the start and stop times For example you only want the 4Q0Hz test to play at 3 00 AM when the building is empty You could enter a start time of 3 00 AM a stop time of 3 05 AM with an interval of 15 minutes This would cause the test to only run once at 3 00 AM Zones This list allows you to contigure each output zone in the device Zone Number This is the number that will be used to identity this output zone in the system This number is calculated based on the values in the Start Zone and Total Zones tields Each output channel in a T9116 is an individual zone Description Double click on this tield to edit a text descriptor tor the zone 130 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 6 Devices Levels e Overall This is the master output level control tor the zone Adjusting this level will change the levels of both annou
96. Alternat Show All Fields Description All Call Recorded Logic ID i 3 Logic State Announcement Class Figure 7 12 DelayedFromAlternateSource Zone Group Selection Zone ID The Zone ID field specifies one 1 or more system zones as the destination for the announcement Zones are entered either by directly typing them into the entry box i e 1 2 3 7 18 or by opening the Zone Selector by clicking the button immediately to the right of the entry box Click on an individual zone to add or remove it trom the action To add a range of zones in the same device select the first zone and then the last zone in the range while holding down the SHIFT key Administrator Rack LIR T9160 1 T9160 2 T9160 3 T9160 4 EES EIA E T9160 5 1502A0 1 T9032DSP PGM BGM Router OK Cancel Figure 7 13 DelayedFromAlternateSource Zone Selection Use Prompt This feature requires a graphical paging station such as the IEDA528 series microphone station When checked this action will prompt the station user for either the zone code or 172 i TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 7 Action Types zone group code for the action This gives the operator flexibility to choose the announcement or message destination at the time of launch This requires the microphone station operator to know a valid Zone ID or Zone Group that is available for use Play Count A delayed message can be played multiple times Ente
97. ButterWc wv ButterWc v Figure 6 81 EQ Settings Window Bands are selected by clicking on one of the nine band names immediately below the frequency response curve graph A specific band can be selected and then adjusted using the edit boxes below the names It is also possible to select a filter and edit its frequency gain and bandwidth directly in the Frequency Response display window using the mouse to drag the filter position cut boost or bandwidth Type Select a filter type in the drop down list The available options for filters 1 through 7 are e Peaking Atypical bandpass type filter Disabled Turn this filter off The available options tor the Hi Pass and Lo Pass filters are 142 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 6 Devices e Hi Pass Filter for rolling off frequencies lower than the cutoff frequency e Lo Pass Filter for rolling off frequencies higher than the cutoff frequency e Disabled Turn this filter off Note The options for the filter parameters will change slightly depending on the filter type selected Center Frequency Hz The center frequency or cutoff frequency of the filter is set by entering a numeric value in the edit box The frequency parameter can also be changed by dragging the diamond icon in the graph laterally lett or right Gain dB This is only available tor Peaking filter type The filter gain is set by entering a numeric value using or values for relative dB
98. C 32758 Unused EC 32759 Figure 6 19 MS528 Graphical Paging Station Properties Description Enter text here to give the station a descriptive name Location Enter text here to describe the physical location of the microphone station IP Address Enter the IP address tor the microphone station here You can find the IP address of the station by pressing the 4 and 6 buttons simultaneously This will bring up the information window on the station display You can then use the ENTER button to cycle through the information and find the IP address 62 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 6 Devices Mic Model Select the appropriate version of the 528 used Available selections are horizontal vertical or horizontal with a gooseneck microphone User Group Select the user groupassociated with the microphone station trom the drop down list The list of available groups is defined in the User Groups tab of the software The name will be displayed across the top of the microphone station display when the Lock Enabled box is not checked When checked the name on the display is determined by the user as detined in theMic Passwords tab This field is optional unless you are using the microphone station in a system with the Flight Announcement System FAS sottware option You can clear the selection in this field by clicking on the X icon to the right of the field Mic Template Select the graphical button template to use for the micr
99. COM This page has been intentionally left blank Debug Utilities There are several other options available on the Admin tab that are tools used tor debugging system issues They are all lumped together here because there is not much detail to cover and they will be infrequently used System Management Center Mn GLOBAL IED GLOBALCOM Systerweniew configuration MMMM lt i vera og ayneeen Welcome Admin User logout Backup Restore Software Update Reboot File Management Take Management Command Shell Users Error Counters Netmon Debug Messages Current Zones 16 Current Frames 1 SMS False VOIP False Licensed 32 Licensed Unlimited Figure 26 1 Admin Tab Reboot This tab provides you with two restart options for the controller Using this may not be necessary it you are running the System Management Center SMC on the local controller It you are working with your monitor and keyboard connected directly to the controller you may choose to use the Windows restart command through the START menu However this gives you the ability to restart the controller while connected to the SMC through the web page trom another computer This button will reboot the vACS Device This will bring all Reboot controller functions down This button will restart all relevant services Controller functions Restart Services will come down but only momentarily Figure 26 2 Reboot LI ill TED Chapter 26 Debug U
100. Descriptions section of the System Supervision contiguration Fault Number Enter the fault number that matches the fault to be set Fault Type Enter the tault type that matches the tault to be set 175 Wl TED Chapter 7 Action Types GLOBALCOM FaultClear This action type is used to clear a fault that was triggered by using the FaultSet action Type i FaultClear Show All Fields Description UPS Fault Clear Figure 7 17 FaultClear Event Fault Number Enter the fault number that matches the fault to be cleared Fault Type Enter the fault type that matches the fault to be cleared Live A live message is one that is immediately routed from the microphone station to the zones included in the programmed zone map If the announcement cannot be made due to zone availability then the microphone station will indicate BUSY The microphone station will indicate READY when the zones are available Copy Action i High Priority Pris4 gt __ M al Figure 7 18 Live Action Type 176 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 7 Action Types Announcement Class Select the appropriate announcement class for the action The announcement class determines the announcement priority relative to other announcements as well as various other behaviors as detined tor each announcement class The destination for the announcement is determined by the Zone ID or Zone Group fields These parameters are mutually e
101. Display Description i show All Fields Screens gt Sign Zone Display Messages Visual Alerts Fire evac graphic Intruder graphic ee Tornado graphic Fire Evacuation l i 12 Security Intruder Tornado Figure 15 4 Visual Display Configuration 245 ill TED GLOBALCOM This page has been intentionally left blank Day Night Schedule This teature allows you to change the output levels of the system by a pre detined amount based on the time of day tor each day of the week You have a Day level and a Night level The Day level is the Overall level that you have set for each output of the device You can then define the Night level by entering an offset amount in the Night column as shown in Figure 16 2 The value in the Night column will be subtracted from the Overall level to turn the system down during the Night schedule Day Night Schedule Match All To Sunday Day Enabled Day Start Wight Start Sunday 08 00 00 19 00 00 Monday 08 00 00 19 00 00 Tuesday 08 00 00 19 00 00 Wednesday 08 00 00 19 00 00 Thursday 08 00 00 19 00 00 Friday 08 00 00 21 00 00 Saturday 08 00 00 21 00 00 Figure 16 1 Day Night Schedule Match All To Sunday Click this button to take the schedule settings for Sunday and copy them to Monday through Saturday Day This read only field indicates the day of the week for each schedule Enabled Click this
102. Editor When you select a template trom the list it will open a sub list of the buttons contained within that template Figure 11 6 shows a simple template with three buttons You use the and X icons shown in the figure to add and delete buttons The up down arrows located on the lett side of each row are used to change the position of the button in the list The order in the list is the order in which they will appear down the right side of the microphone station display Mic Templates TA D Dempioi Bubon Width Lock Tenut OCefault Text Cotor Default Button Color Text Table Add Delete Default Template 96 et B utton Icons E TEY 90 mah Buttons for template Default Template qF Se AZT ori Fo Pik Text Cae Burton gaer Captian linei Capbentiea Serole B Legeut A W A cai Li RE id Pas Last Paes da WW Al Call Rescercied EC 11 20 101 oa ALY GB Figure 11 6 Mic Template Buttons Action Buttons are used to trigger actions that have already been detined tor the MS528 type microphone stations When you double click on the Actions field for a button a drop down list appears as shown in Figure 11 7 Select the action that this button will launch You can click on the small round shaped like a gear icon immediately to the right of the list to open the editor window for the selected action You can delete the action assignment from the button by clicking the X icon ill TED GLOBALCOM All Call
103. GLOBALCOM SYSTEM MANAGEMENT CENTER USER MANUAL VERSION 1 07 Copyright 2013 Innovative Electronic Designs LLC All Rights Reserved Ifthis document is distributed with software that includes an end user agreement this document as well as the software described in it is fur nished under license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of such license Except as permitted by any such license no part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including pho tocopying recording storage in an information retrieval system or otherwise without the prior written permission of Innovative Electronic Designs LLC Please note that the content in this guide is protected under copyright law even if it is not distributed with software that includes an end user license agreement The content of this document is furnished for informational use only and is subject to change without notice It should not be construed as a commitment by Innovative Electronic Designs LLC Innovative Electronic Designs LLC assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in the informational content contained in this document Any reference to company names in examples are for demonstration purposes only and are not intended to refer to any actual organization oran endorsement of any kind Innovative Electronic Designs IED GLOBALCOM vACS 500ACS
104. Group J SMS Text Figure 7 42 Prerecorded Action Type Show All Fields Blanking Zone Group Select the zone group to use as a blanking zone group trom the drop down list box The zone group selected will effectively be muted when this action is executed Blanking zone groups are typically used to mute areas that are adjacent to where the announcement will be made to prevent other announcements messages or background music trom intertering with the delivery of an announcement Click the X icon to clear the selection trom the list SMS Text Enter the text that will be sent as the message body of the text message This field is limited to a maximum of 160 characters SMS List Select an SMS List trom the drop down selection list to receive the message Multiple SMS Lists can be added by clicking the button to add more fields each with its own drop down selection list Click the X icon to remove an SMS List from the action Once defined the message will be sent to all device numbers in the selected SMS Lists 200 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 7 Action Types Note SMS Messaging requires an Internet connection This is a feature that must be purchased as an option as part of the sottware license Pre Announce Tone Enter the take number to be played at the start of the action to alert individuals to the message or announcement being made Leave this field blank if you do not want to play a pre announce
105. IS Manager Figure 18 8 Administrative Tools Double click on the Event Viewer icon and the Event Viewer will appear as shown in Figure 18 9 Locate the IED Fault Log as shown by either of the arrows in the figure and double click to open the log 255 ill TED Chapter 18 System Supervision GLOBALCOM Aa Event Viewer x File Action View Help e m FH Event Viewer Local E Custom Wiews DE Windows Logs a A Applications and Services Logs Hardware Events IED IED Fault Log J Internet Explorer E Key Management Service Windows PowerShell Event Viewer Local Overview and Summary Last refreshed 3 29 2012 4 24 08 PM To view events that have occurred on your computer select the appropriate source log or custom view node in the console tree The Administrative Events custom view contains all the administrative events regardless of source An aggregate view of all the logs is shown below Summary of Administrative Events r m Microsoft Pmi miskad Recently Viewed Nodes Name Description Modified Created Event Type EventID Source Last hour 24 hours BR Saved Logs Critical 0 0 0 3 Subscriptions Error 176 1 163 1 268 Warning 0 0 1 Information 183 1 199 1 541 Audit Success 0 6 41 Windows Logs Security Log Summary Log Name Application Hardware Events IED IED Fault Log 4 Applications and Service Applications and
106. Inaudible 2 285 2 12 0 165 j Fa Mj m m T cc Figure 6 83 DNA Monitor Test Window Show The two checkboxes across the top of the window allow you to decide if you want to show or not show either the inaudible or audible test information for each channel When the box is checked the test will be visible for each channel When it is not checked the test will be hidden for each channel This is useful if you are not using one of the available tests You can suppress displaying information for a test that is not in Use Set Test Buttons Caution There are two sets of Test Set buttons at the top of the window One set is for the inaudible test and the other for the audible test Set is used to record the baseline values for each channel You must perform a set once you have the system operational and all loudspeakers attached The amplifier will store these channel values and compare them with the results obtained when performing a test When test values do not match the set values then a channel will be faulted Clicking on the Test or Set buttons for the audible fest will result in tones played to all outputs of the amplifier 149 Ww TED Chapter 6 Devices GLOBALCOM Inaudible and Audible Test Frequency and Level Inaudible Set Test Audible Set Test x Show 20000 Hz x Show 400 Hz 20 iB 20 id B Figure 6 84 Test Frequency and Level You can specify the frequency to be
107. LCOM Chapter 7 Action Types Pre Announce Tone Enter the take number to be played at the start of the action to alert individuals to the message or announcement being made Leave this field blank if you do not want to play a pre announce tone Sign Text Type in the text to be shown on any visual displays included in the assigned zone group For most TTS uses the sign text will be identical to the TTS text Two fields are provided for cases where special phonetic spellings are necessary to get the TTS engine to correctly pronounce a word VisualAlert This action type is used tor cases where you want to start or stop a visual alert when not including it with any other type of action A common use is to start a visual alert at the end of a prerecorded message and then clear it when you play a different prerecorded message This action type is provided for situations where you want the visual alert to operate independently of any other actions Copy Action Type i visualAlert X Show Base Fields Description Security Alert Entry Code range i Zone ID i E Use Prompt up i All Call System wide A 45 Use Figure 7 49 VisualAlert Action Type The destination for the action is determined by the Zone ID or Zone Group tields These parameters are mutually exclusive thus only one zone destination method may be used Zone ID The Zone ID field specifies one 1 or more system zones as the destination for the
108. Non IED DDC _ ZONES Match To First Description Sign Zone 29 30 Sign Zone 30 31 Sign Zone 31 Sign Zone 32 Type Description Location Actions Extra Info Display Lobby Lobby ZoneIDs 1 DisplayIDs 1 D Display Waiting Waiting ZoneIDs 1 DisplayIDs 1 Fok E Figure 6 27 Display Zone Controller Setup Description Enter text here to give the device a descriptive name Location Enter text here to describe the physical location of the device s IP Address Enter an appropriate broadcast IP address that will include all the displays For example an address of 10 2 128 255 will includes all displays with an IP address in the range trom 10 2 128 1 through 10 2 128 253 Start Sign This is the sign number that represents the first sign in the group The sign number is treated like the zone number for audio zones and included in the same list The system will automatically use the next available zone number as the starting zone number when you add a new device It can be edited here it needed For example you have a system that already has 32 zones When you add a new Display Zone Controller the starting zone will be 33 Total Signs This number represents the total number of signs that will be present in this group Sign zones do not count towards the total number of zones allowed by the software license 70 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 6 Devices Note The system allows you t
109. OM Chapter 7 Action Types Zone ID The Zone ID field specifies one 1 or more system zones as the destination for the announcement Zones are entered either by directly typing them into the entry box i e 1 2 3 7 18 or by opening the Zone Selector by clicking the button immediately to the right of the entry box Click on an individual zone to add or remove it trom the action To add a range of zones in the same device select the first zone and then the last zone in the range while holding down the SHIFT key Zone Group A zone group is assigned to the action by selecting one of the previously detined zone groups trom the drop down list Multiple zone groups can be assigned to an action by clicking the icon to add more fields each with its own drop down selection list Click the X icon to remove a zone group tield Once detined the announcement will play cumulatively to all zones included in the selected zone groups Use Prompt This feature requires a graphical paging station such as the IEDA528 series microphone station When checked this action will prompt the station user for either the zone code or zone group code for the action This gives the operator flexibility to choose the announcement or message destination at the time of launch This requires the microphone station operator to know a valid Zone ID or Zone Group that is available for use LiveOrDelayed Advanced Properties The tollowing properties will only be visible at
110. Prtp Nocshosmp MewPinthtm Windowsntemettrplony 51x EA CR KA GA http localhost dmp viewPrint htrnal 4 X e7 p F File Edit View Favorites Tools vy Favorites E http localhost dmp ViewPrint html Local System KOKOK KOKOK K KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KK KK KKK KKK KKK OK OOK KKK KKK KKK KOK OK OK KOK OK 1 System 1 OOOK OK OKOK OK K OK KE KE K K K KE K KE KE K K K K OK K OK OK OK OKOK OK OK OK OK OK OK OKOK OKOK OK OKOK K OK OK KOK OK OK KOK OK OK K Group Namberfo E o OOo mjo O ejoo Netmask 255 0 0 0 Bam channels Boot mode normal Broadcast 1P 10 255 255 255 ie Template emergency Bundija fis BGM Source Tiue kmufetine Fais uteline 10 4 max RTP Connectons 2 O rypefvacs vse mutusoor Faie E 1D Description Language Gender Rate Vollume a enatish Female o fso External Systems KOKK KKK KK KKK KKK K KK K KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK K KK K KK K KKK KK K 3 System 3 KOK KOK K KOK K KOKOK KKK K KOK K KKK KKK KKK OK KK KKK K KKK KKK KKK K KKK KKK KKK KKK croup Number gt J mp C mhona ejoo Boot Mode ormal Broadcast 1P 255 255 255 253 Ts Bem Source False Killlifeline False Lifeline ID 4 Push Confial False Figure 19 2 Contiguration Output File 297 ill TED Chapter 19 Print Configuration GLOBALCOM 260 To print the report choose the Print option trom the File menu of the browser If you wish to save the tile choose the Save As option Saving this tile o
111. R is a zone Visual displays are also treated as an output zone Zone groups are collections of individual zones that share a common purpose or logical area Individual zones can be included in multiple zone groups as needed Most systems will include an All Call zone group that is made up of all output zones in the system You can program individual zone groups in a way that best suits your tacility For example all zones in a building could be a zone group for building wide pages Zones for each floor of a building could be grouped together to allow quick access to one or more floors of a building This tlexibility makes programming actions much easier as you only need to specity one or more zone groups in an action and you will get all of the system output zones that are associated with that area providing that the zone groups have been configured correctly x ID Description Zone Count Remote ZoneGroups All Call Frame 1 24 0 Ticketing 0 103 Security 0 104 Building 12 All Call Building 12 101 Mm MM MM M 105 Building 11 All Call 0 Figure 9 1 Zone Groups Figure 9 1 shows a very simple system with only tive 5 zone groups Zone groups are added to the list by using the icon Once a new one has been added you must configure an ID description and select the zones to be included in the group Optionally you can contigure zone groups in other announcement controllers when part of a multi controller system When a zo
112. SIeIISIEIeIEE Ele EAEE AeA eee zeo es fese 20 257 Figure 2 4 Mic amp Zone Status Active announcements are easily identified using colors Output zones that are in use will appear in a color that matches that of the originating input Inputs that have communication faults will be highlighted in red as can be seen in Figure 2 4 for mic number 9 Zone Monitor Click on any audio zone output to bring up the Zone Monitor window as shown in Figure 2 5 Any adjustments made from this window will be immediately sent to the device Ww TED Chapter 2 Overview Tab GLOBALCOM Select Monitor Point e Amp In l C Amp Out Monitor Mic _ Speaker Current Rack Station v BGM Duck Overall Channel 1 zZ E Figure 2 5 Zone Monitor Output Level This meter indicates the signal level at the currently selected point A more precise numerical indication of the level is located immediately below the meter Select Monitor Point You must select one of the three available monitor points for each output channel The level meter will indicate the level of the signal at the point selected This will also change the point monitored audibly through a local monitor speaker if one is configured Monitor Mic Some microphone station types have a built in monitor loudspeaker If you have one installed in your system then you can select it from this drop down list and it will monitor the selected point You must have the Monitor Ena
113. Sent message type this is the destination address tor the message This could also be a broadcast IP address tor certain messages For a Received message type this is the address of the device that originated the message Object ID This field displays the object ID contained within the network message Message ID This field displays the message ID contained within the network message Message Number This tield displays the message number contained within the network message Data This is the raw message data in hex format that is contained in the message Message Details You can view more detailed intormation for an individual message by double clicking on it in the Message Window This will open another window with additional intormation as shown in Figure 26 13 If the message uses the IED24 message protocol and the Interpret checkbox is checked this display will decode the raw hex data and display the IED24 message data values If it cannot be interpreted as an IED24 message then only the raw hex data will be displayed Message Number 3068 IP Address Object ID FF 00 Time Occurred 7 16 2012 2 08 24 PM Message ID 0C 67 10 255 255 255 Data x Reply Type Never Ack 7 _ Destination Address 0 65535 0 Reply Address 0 8703 0 Transport Status IED24 Status Method ID 3m103 Parameters 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 OA OB OC OD OE OF 01 05 00 00 00 FF 21 00 10 0A 02 80 A1 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
114. Service Windows Logs 4pplicati Applications and Service N A N A N A N A N A Size Curr 20 00 MBS 68 KB 20 1 00 MB 1 1 00 MB 1 3 27 2012 11 01 44 AM 3 27 2012 10 59 19 AM 3 27 2012 10 58 32 AM 3 27 2012 10 58 32 AM 11 15 2010 6 16 14 PM Modified 3 27 2012 10 58 32 AM 11 15 2010 6 16 14 PM 3 27 2012 10 59 19 AM 3 27 2012 11 01 44 AM Figure 18 9 Event Viewer 2 17 2012 10 17 03 AM 12 7 2010 12 38 57 PM 11 15 2010 9 04 22 PM 11 15 2010 9 04 22 PM 11 15 2010 9 04 22 PM Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Retention Policy go Overwrite events as nec Ovenwrite events as nec Overwrite events as nec Overwrite events as nec w gt The log will appear in the right portion of the window as shown in Figure 18 10 The top section of the pane is the list of faults along with a date and time stamp as to when the event was logged When you click on an item the details will be shown in the lower section of the pane as shown in the figure New faults will appear as an Error as shown in the figure ED Fault Log Nurmber of events 14 0 New events available Date and Time IED System Supervision D Informatian Information D Error M Error 3 29 2012 4 31 46 PM 3 29 2012 4 31 46 PM 3292012 4 31 29 PM 3 29 2012 43126 PM 3 29 2012 43126 PM TED Systern Supervision TED Systern Supervision IED System Supervision W Error WD Error 4 3 29 2012 4
115. T i IP Address 10 2 128 161 Netmask 255 0 0 0 MAC Address E069954F7693 System Version 1 0 4570 19814 System address and version information GLOBAL Syste m ii Overview Configuration Admin Configuration Options Tabs Figure 1 2 SMC Header Welcome Admin User logout Login Logout button System Name and TEEF Displays the user thatis currently loggedin Fault Icon This icon will only appear when a tault has been detected by the System Supervision sub system Click on it and you will be taken to the Current Faults section located on the Overview Tab to view the current faults Save Icon This icon will only appear when changes have been made to the configuration and have not yet been saved Click the icon to save the changes and send any new settings to devices Help Icon Click on this icon to open up the help system in a new browser window System Address and Version Information This part of the header displays the current Ethernet address settings of the system The IP Address and Netmask settings reflect the address settings detected by the operating system The MAC Address is based on the Ethernet interface hardware and cannot be changed The System Version field displays the version of the SMC that is currently installed on your system Note If the first three fields are ever just blank check your network connection If the system is booted without network connectivity the
116. TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 5 My System When not checked you must go to the System Management Center page on the Liteline controller and manually relinquish control You may also send a reset command using the Send Reset Command button it you select the Lifeline controller in the Remote Controllers list Use Multi 500R Protocol Check this box if you are installing this controller in a system that has a 510 520ACS that uses two IEDASOOR cards tor a 16 bus system instead of the standard 8 bus system Max RTP Connections This property sets the maximum number of simultaneous incoming and outgoing RTP audio streams that will be allowed by the controller The maximum number that a single controller is allowed to support is 8 Managing RTP connections utilizes a large amount of processor resources so a lower limit may be required on controllers that are also managing VoIP telephone lines text to speech and multiple CobraNet channels tor messaging Note that this limit only applies to announcements made to and trom other controllers using the routable RTP protocol It does not impact announcements made using the CobraNet protocol A maximum limit of 2 is acceptable in most applications Voices This section contigures the Text to Speech voices that will be available tor selection when detining a TTS action type This list is automatically populated with the languages that are installed on your system Note TTS engines must be purchased
117. Text tield to synchronize the visual take playback with the audible take 283 Ww TED Chapter 26 Debug Utilities GLOBALCOM Visual Text Enter the visual text tor each language in this field OK Atter you have made changes click this button to save them Cancel This button will appear atter you have made changes to the take Click it to discard the changes Command Shell This tab provides you with direct access to the command line shell of the operating system You will not need this if you are accessing the controller from a monitor and keyboard connected directly to the controller If you are accessing the System Management Center web page trom another computer then this will give you access to key in direct commands it needed To utilize this feature you first type in or use the past command the appropriate command in the top window Then you must click the appropriate button to send the command in the correct format Command Shell The Command Shell utility will execute any command input in the text box on the shell of the vACS device Any output will be displayed a Use Shell Execution _ Send Command E Send XML 07 13 2009 16 896 svcext dll J 07 13 2009 140 800 uihelper dll 07 13 2009 24 576 urlauthz dll 07 13 2009 18 944 validcfg dll 11 15 2010 134 400 w3core mof 07 13 2009 9 216 w3ctrips dlil 07 13 2009 30 208 w3ctrs dll 07 13 2009 24 064 w3dt dl1l 11 15 2010 2
118. The ambient noise compensation will be continually adjusted within this range as long as the noise level remains above the threshold but below the amount required to drive the system to maximum level Note The Ambient Analysis algorithm differentiates between program audio and ambient noise level detected by the ambient noise sensor It is possible for the sensor level to be above the threshold with no ambient noise compensation applied when the level detected is program audio trom the system The limit is set by adjusting the slider with the mouse or by manually typing a value in the edit box below the slider using a positive numerical value Overall Level This slider controls the main output attenuator for paging BGM and program signals The meter indicates the current signal level that is teeding the analog input of the power amplitier 147 ill TED Chapter 6 Devices GLOBALCOM Sensor Assignments Sensor assignments in the DNA amplitier are tixed as listed below One or two sensors can be connected and will be averaged to control a channel The amplifier will automatically configure itself to use two sensors if a second sensor is attached so there is no need to enable or disable a sensor Sensor inputs are assigned as follows e Sensor Inputs 1 and 2 are assigned to Channel 1A e Sensor Inputs 3 and 4 are assigned to Channel 1B e Sensor Inputs 5 and 6 are assigned to Channel 2A e Sensor Inputs 7 and 8 are assigned
119. This value is in seconds and defaults to 15 minutes 900 seconds if lett blank The maximum value is 4200 seconds 70 minutes Mic Number This is the number used to identity the microphone station within the announcement controller It must be a unique number within the local announcement controller Sidekick Up to three 3 expansion stations can be used with a 528 microphone station when equipped with an IEDA528E expansion board Select the type of expansion station connected to each port using the appropriate drop down list Available selections are as follows e None Expansion port is not used e FME An IEDA520FME expansion station with PTT is used e Sidekick An IEDA528SK Sidekick expansion station with 4 buttons and PTT is used The PTT on the expansion station will always launch the same action that is assigned to the PTT of the parent station Sidekick Button Configuration When you contigure one of the types to Sidekick you are presented with a new list like the one shown in Figure 6 20 This allows you to detine actions tor each of the 4 buttons available on the IEDA528SK expansion station Select a button in the list and then click 64 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 6 Devices on the icon referenced in the figure This will open the Action Definition window for the highlighted button From here you define an action as described in the Action Types section of the documentation Actions Click this icon
120. User x Click this icon to delete the user that is currently highlighted in the list User Configuration When you select a user in the list the configuration options for that user become available for editing X tmpusr First Name Jorn admin Last Name Doe sid installer User Name user Jdoe W Change Password New Password essee Confirm Password eese _ Advanced Roles _ Installer W User Password OK Cancel Figure 23 3 User Contiguration First Name Enter the first name of the user that is associated with this username This name will appear at the top of the screen when the user is logged in Last Name Enter the last name of the user that is associated with this username This name will appear at the top of the screen when the user is logged in 2 2 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 23 Users User Name This is the name that you entered when creating the user This field cannot be edited You must delete the user and add a new one in order to change the username Password When you check the Change Password box the New Password and Confirm Password fields become active to allow you to change this user s password Enter the new password in the two fields and then new password will take effect when you click the OK button Roles Select the role that best suits this user Permissions are assigned cumulatively so you must check all three boxes to give a user full access to the
121. X You must obtain this information trom the PBX provider SIP Port This determines the SIP port used by this line tor the VoIP service This is automatically set and should not be edited unless required by the PBX vendor RTP Port This determines the RTP port used by this line tor the VoIP service This is automatically set and should not be edited unless required by the PBX vendor Template Templates are used to define a series of voice prompts that the user will hear when the line is answered Each item in the list is associated with an entry code in the template detinition Select the template to use for this line trom the drop down list Locked When checked security is enabled Access is restricted based on the data entered in Mic Passwords Caller ID can be used to automatically login a user calling from a particular extension If this is not defined then the user will be prompted to enter their 4 104 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 6 Devices digit password to gain access It this box is not checked there will be no security protection Refer to the Mic Passwords section of the documentation for more information Direct Action Extensions When defined each line will immediately execute the defined action when the line is answered Ext This is the extension number that this line will use to connect to the PBX You must obtain this information from the PBX provider SIP User This is the user ID that this line
122. You may be wondering why the term Relays is used here when we are talking about logic outputs The system treats relays and logic outputs in the same manner The difference is in the physical hardware and the software really does not care about the physical hardware interface For programming simplicity the term has been re used Zones Match To First This button has no function for this device Zone Number This is the zone number that will be associated with this logic output This is calculated based on the values entered in the Start Relay Zone and Total Relays tields 76 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 6 Devices Description This is a text tield used to describe the output function or connection To edit double click on the field Triggers It a logic output zone is used as part of a zone map in an announcement then the output will energize for the duration of the announcement It will function this way as long as no triggers are detined for the output The Trigger tield is used to associate the output with faults that are reported as part of the System Supervision module Click the Edit button to assign a trigger to the output This will open the assignment window as shown in Figure 6 32 From here select a specific fault trom the drop down list and click the icon This will add the selected fault to the list To remove a fault select the fault with the mouse and then click the X icon You can stack multiple fa
123. a particular extension If this is not defined then the user will be prompted to enter their 4 155 ill TED Chapter 6 Devices GLOBALCOM digit password to gain access It this box is not checked there will be no security protection Refer to the Mic Passwords section of the documentation tor more information Devices The SIP Telephone Interface is not capable of owning any devices so this list will always remain empty 156 Action Types An action is a system response that is pertormed as a result of a stimulus The response of the action is determined by the action type Examples of actions are live pages pre recorded messages SMS notifications text to speech messages etc The system supports a wide variety of stimuli capable of triggering actions The most common stimulus is a button or entry code trom a microphone station Contact closures time ot day and network messages trom other systems are all examples of stimuli available to trigger actions Each action requires different parameters to be defined before the action can be used These parameters differ for each action type but there are some common items related to the Action Definition window as defined below Type This drop down list contains all of the available action types available tor use Select the desired action type and the remaining fields on the form will change appropriately Copy Action This button is used to copy all parameters for the
124. a vACS Lifeline controller to relinquish its control after a controller has been restored when the Kill Lifeline checkbox is not checked Bridge Device Select the device that will be used as the network bridge device to access the remote system Typically this will be the 1 1 OODAB assigned to the local controller System Number This is an ID number used by each announcement controller in the system Each system must have a unique system number The system number is also used as the Group Number for microphone station setup The system number for a remote controller must match the system number defined in the remote controller s My Controller definition ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 5 My System Group Offset This setting alters the method used tor CobraNet bundle calculations Leave this at the default of O unless directed to do otherwise by factory support personnel IP Address This is the IP address of the remote system IP Address 2 This is used to identity the IP address of a second CPU when interfacing with a legacy ACS that has redundant processors It the remote controller is a vACS Lifeline type then you must enter the IP address of the CobraNet sound card it installed in the Liteline controller Typically this address is 1 number higher than the IP address of the controller WCF Port This sets the port that the application uses to communicate with other applications and services The default is 80 and it
125. age body ot the text message This field is limited to a maximum of 160 characters SMS List Select an SMS List trom the drop down selection list to receive the message Multiple SMS Lists can be added by clicking the button to add more fields each with its own drop down selection list Click the X icon to remove an SMS List trom the action Once defined the message will be sent to all device numbers in the selected SMS Lists Note SMS Messaging requires an Internet connection This is a feature that must be purchased as an option as part of the software license StopAnnc The StopAnnc action type is used to stop active announcements or messages trom any turther activity For example a message is created with the Indefinite checkbox checked so the message will play continuously at the detined Play Interval A separate action is then created to stop that specitic message A stop announcement action is detined as shown in Figure 7 45 Copy Action Type i Stopannc v Show All Fields Semel Entry Code range i ae Logic ID i a Logic State i Of 7 Mic J System 1 LIR 9K 4 Logic Input 1 ON Lor o cancel Figure 7 45 StopAnnc Action Type Stop Mic This drop down list box lists all available microphone stations currently programmed in the system Selecting a station trom this list will allow the action to stop any and all active announcements that were initiated trom that station Click the X icon to
126. ailable You will find that most of the items on the Overview tab provide very little information as the Lifeline doesn t actually own any devices The Admin tab is the only tab of use for this mode and has an additional Lifeline Control contiguration You will need to log in with an account with admin privileges to access that tab See Lifeline Control on page 269 tor details on configuring systems that are monitored by the Liteline PEF IED System Management Center acadan oee GLOBAL Overview Admin System Version 1 0 4577 25890 Welcome Admin User logout Software Update Lifeline Control x Number IP CobraNet Audio Device IP Monitor Alive Taken Over 2 10 11 99 210 11 99 3 J True False Force Lifeline Save Lifeline PDRP Languages Reboot File Management Command Shell Users Error Counters Netmon Debug Messages User Log urrent Zones 0 Current Frames 0 SMS False Licensed 0 Licensed 0 System Mode Lifeline Monitoring Figure 1 6 Lifeline Options ill TED Chapter 1 Introduction GLOBALCOM 1100TEL This mode is used for the VoIP telephone interface device In this case the device will be owned by an Announcement Controller and the parent device will manage the contiguration of the device Since the parent device will do the contiguration the options available on a device operating in this mode are very limited The Configuration tab is not available and you will tind that most of th
127. and installed separately and are not included with the base system sottware Description This is a read only description of the installed voice Language Select the language for the voice Only one voice can be detined for each language Thus you cannot have multiple voices for the same language Gender Select either a male tor female voice trom the drop down list Speed This value is used to adjust the speed at which the voice plays A valid range is trom 10 very slow to 10 very fast The default value is O and you can adjust it to meet your needs It is recommended that you adjust in increments of 1 until you are satisfied with the results 4 ill TED Chapter 5 My System GLOBALCOM 42 Volume Select a numerical percentage 0 100 to set the volume of the voice The system will have default values that are unique to each voice It the voice defaults to a value of O then you must adjust it yourself A value between 80 and 90 is a good starting point This field can be adjusted for each voice to evenly balance the installed voices with live and prerecorded announcements Bitrate This tield allows you to select between bit rates of 16 or 8 16 is recommended as it will provide a higher quality speech rendering Using a rate of 8 will result in smaller tile sizes and slightly taster rendering times but at reduced quality Sample Rate This field allows you to select between sample rates of 22000Hz an
128. anguage W Socket v Announce Manager Live Message v Soundcard W Audio Channel lv LVIO Wv Titan Manager Debug message type V Barionet V Mic Manager W Update Manager filterselection V ClassGroup Manager Output Manager W Voice W FAS WV Record Manager SubControl Fault Manager WV Remote Manager LIR W IEDNet Manager lV Report Manager 530 Mic Station W Initialize WV Schedule W 530 Hardware 7 16 2012 2 06 36 PM Announce Manager AnnouncementManager RecoverZones Trying e to recover zones 7 16 2012 2 06 36 PM Live Message LiveMessage ReportAnnouncement AnncID 2 Status m Debug message 7 16 2012 2 06 36 PM LIR LIR Set Relay Sent To 10 2 128 161 window Relays 12345678 State a 7 16 2012 2 06 35 PM Mic Manager Dispatch received for annc ID 2 Mic 4 Annc Source 4 7 16 2012 2 06 35 PM Announce Manager FindCurrAnnc wMicID 4 Annc Source 4 Annc ID 2 7 16 2012 2 06 35 PM Live Message LiveMessage ReportAnnouncement AnncID 2 Status a 7 16 2012 2 06 35 PM LIR LIR Set Relay Sent To 10 2 128 161 Relays 12345678 State b Figure 26 14 Debug Messages Select All Click this button to check all message type boxes Clear All Click this button to uncheck all message type boxes Clear Click this button to clear the contents of the debug message window Section 4 Appendices FAS EY COGS S iei TEES A EA 291 Basic Troubleshooting Guid
129. are on the hour or half hour Interval mins The interval determines how often the action will play during the specitied time window A positive whole number will set the playback interval in minutes while negative numbers indicate an interval in seconds For example an entry of 5 would create an interval of five 5 minutes An entry of 30 would create an interval of 30 seconds Intervals are start to start times Therefore if you entered a playback interval of 30 seconds and the message was 10 seconds long there would be 20 seconds between the end of the message and the beginning of the next cycle 237 ill TED GLOBALCOM This page has been intentionally left blank Events Events allow you to trigger multiple actions trom a common stimulus Each event is made up of multiple actions that are defined specifically tor each event In addition to the basic action definition properties each action within the event has an additional property that allows the action to be launched at a predefined time interval after the initial launch of the action Events are launched by programming actions tor microphone stations logic inputs or other external devices Events are ideal tor handling complex emergency situations where you need to deliver different instructions to different areas of the facility or even different buildings An event allows you to play an evacuation message to one area while issuing a warning message to the rest of the
130. art Stop Times You can restrict the times that a test will run based on the times entered in these two fields To run continuously enter 12 00 AM as the start time and 11 59 PM as the stop time Interval Enter the time in minutes between each test Note Ifyou only want the test to play once per day you must enter an interval greater than the difference between the start and stop times For example you only want the 400H7z test to play at 3 00 AM when the building is empty You could enter a start time of 3 00 AM a stop time of 3 05 AM with an interval of 15 minutes This would cause the test to only run once at 3 00 AM 115 ill TED Chapter 6 Devices GLOBALCOM Amplifier Card Slots Each T9160 mainframe has 9 slots tor amplifier cards Slots 1 through 8 contain the primary amplitier cards while slot 9 holds an optional backup amplitier card that will automatically take over tor a tailed card when contigured to operate as such Each slot has two output channels thus consumes two zones that count towards the total number of zones in the sottware license unless you disable them by choosing the correct amplitier card type Amplifier Card Type None Select this type if the slot does not contain an amplifier card This will disable both zones for that slot thus removing them trom the total zone count Single Channel Select this type if the slot contains a single channel amplitier card such as the 16481
131. as no function for this device Zone Number This is the zone number that will be associated with this relay output This is calculated based on the values entered in the Start Relay Zone and Total Relays tields Description This is a text field used to describe the output function or connection To edit double click on the tield Triggers It a relay zone is used as part of a zone map in an announcement then the relay will energize tor the duration of the announcement It will function this way as long as no triggers are detined for the relay The Trigger tield is used to associate the relay with faults that are reported as part of the System Supervision module Click the Edit button to assign a trigger to the relay This will open the assignment window as shown in From here select a specitic tault trom the drop down list and click the icon This will add the selected fault to the list To remove a fault select the fault with the mouse and then click the X icon You can stack multiple faults on a single relay The relay will activate as determined by the setting in the Activation Type field when any of the assigned faults are reported 109 Ww TED Chapter 6 Devices GLOBALCOM 3 Amplifier Problem r 1 Test Point Pass Fail Audible Test 1 1 UPS Failure 9 10 Communication Channel Network _ E rl E P Figure 6 61 1522LR Triggers Activation Type The Activation Type applies only to outputs that funct
132. at represents the first zone in the device The system will automatically use the next available zone number as the starting zone number when you add a new device It can be edited here it needed For example you have a system that already has 32 zones When you add a new DNA7800 the starting zone will be 33 Total Zones This number represents the total number of zones that will be present on this device A DNA7800 supports a total of 4 zones but you may want to set this to a lower number if you are not using all outputs This will prevent the unused output trom contributing to the total number of zones allowed with your software license 140 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 6 Devices BGM Device Once you have detined one or more devices in the system as a BGM source it is then available as an item in this drop down list You select the device trom this list that will be used as the source device tor the BGM You can then select individual channels to be used for each zone output You can click the X icon to the right of the drop down list to clear the selection Zones This list allows you to contigure each output zone in the device Zone Number This is the number that will be used to identity this output zone in the system This number is calculated based on the values in the Start Zone and Total Zones tields Each output channel is an individual zone Description Double click on this tield to edit a text descriptor tor the
133. at the input of the Ambient Analysis object This signal is post EQ and post delay but does not have the test signal Sensors Level This level meter displays the real time sound pressure level SPL trom the ambient noise sensor 145 ill TED Chapter 6 Devices GLOBALCOM 146 Note This level is the sum of both the ambient noise in the space and the program audio trom the system The Ambient Analysis algorithm tilters out the audio system s contribution to the overall level and provides a real value of ambient noise level to the system for processing Sensors Threshold The threshold determines the level at which the ambient noise compensation is suspended because the level at the sensor is too low When the detected level from the ambient noise sensor rises above the threshold setting then the system will actively operate It will filter the system program audio component trom the detected level to accurately adjust the output attenuation based on the calculated noise level When the level is below the threshold the system will stop actively adjusting the output attenuation and return to the maximum attenuation setting which is the base level setting as detined by the Overall attenuation control The threshold is set by adjusting the slider with the mouse or by manually typing a value in the edit box below the slider using a positive numerical value Gain Calc Scaling Constant The Scaling Constant deter
134. ate Clicking the X icon will delete the currently selected template ID This is a unique number used to identify the template It is system assigned and cannot be edited by the user Description This is a text field used to name and describe the template You can edit it by double clicking on the field and then typing in a new description The template named Default Template is automatically included in a new system For simple systems you can simply modify this template if all microphone stations will have the same template Use a description that will allow you to easily identify the template such as Security Fire Department Information Gate Agent etc ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 1 1 Mic Templates Button Width You can adjust the width of all buttons in the template by adjusting this number The default button width is 96 pixels You can increase the width of the buttons if your button labels do not tit using the detault setting The maximum width is 255 pixels Lock Timeout The value in this field is ignored by the system Default Text Color Default Button Color When you add new buttons to the template they are created using these detault colors You can always edit the individual button colors atterwards but this soeeds up the process and allows you to detine your color scheme before creating the buttons When you click on the color button the color selection window appears as shown in Figure 1 1 4 Simply click on
135. ate range during which the action will play These dates are month and day relative to the current year thus no year should be included when manually typing in a date For example to play a message for the entire month of May you would enter 5 1 for a start date and 5 31 for the stop date The action will then play at the programmed interval during the programmed time window When you click on the date entry field a calendar picker window will open as shown in Figure 13 10 You can either manually type in the date or click on a day in the calendar picker to set the date Use the lett and right arrows at the top of the calendar to navigate to different months Only the start date will be available when the mode is set to Yearly January 2012 Mo Tu We Th Fr 27 28 29 30 3 4 3 6 10 ii iZ 13 17 18 15 20 25 26 27 Figure 13 10 Date Picker Window Start Time Stop Time The start and stop times are used to define a time window in which the action will play during the date range as determined by the start and stop dates Click on the time field to edit the time You can manually type in the time or use the up down arrows to increase or decrease the value at the current cursor position ill IED GLOBALCOM Chapter 13 Scheduled Actions 12 01 AMIK Figure 13 11 Time Picker Window Click the small clock icon to the right of the time field to open a time picker drop down list This list allows you to easily select times that
136. ated Backups on vACS i pak2012 5_3 11_45 53 vbk View Delete Restore At k i pak201 5_3 11_46 26 vbk view Delete Restore Figure 21 7 Backup Restore View Click this button to display the contents of the backup Tile in your browser This will appear as shown in Figure 21 2 Delete Click this button to delete the backup file from the controller This will not impact the current operation of the controller The number of backups that can be kept is only limited by the amount of available drive space on the controller It is a good idea to remove older backups to keep the list manageable Restore Click this button to restore the backup configuration to the system You will be warned and prompted to continue since this will delete the current system configuration and stop the controller trom operating tor a briet period of time 268 Lifeline Control This section is only available on the Admin tab for systems that have been licensed as a Lifeline system This feature allows an announcement controller to monitor other announcement controllers in the system for failures It the Lifeline system detects a failure in one of the announcement controllers that it has been assigned to monitor it will take over tor the tailed controller There are three critical steps that must be performed to ensure that the Lifeline feature will work correctly 1 Ensure that the Lifeline controller is on the same
137. ation user for either the zone code or zone group code for the action This gives the operator flexibility to choose the mute destination at the time of launch This requires the microphone station operator to know a valid Zone ID or Zone Group that is available tor use TTS Text Type in the text that will be used to generate the message Voice Selection Select the appropriate voice from this drop down list box that will be used to generate the message The names and number of voices available on the system will vary based on the options that are installed Copy Action Type i Ts Show All Fields Description Super Bowl welcome message Entry Code range i j1s gt Announcement Class i Medium Priority Pris Zone ID ij ane Use Prompt Zone Group i All Call Frame 1 101 F _ Use Prompt i The City of Indianapolis would like to welcome me mE Figure 7 47 TTS Text to Speech Voice Selection Play Count A message can be played multiple times Enter the total number of times to play the message once it has been recorded All messages must play at least once thus requiring at least a 1 to be in this field 205 ill TED Chapter 7 Action Types GLOBALCOM Indefinite When checked the Play Count edit box disappears This will allow the message to play continuously at the specified Repeat Interval until it is stopped using a StopAnnc action type programmed to stop this
138. ays to determine the above observations for the different types of equipment encountered Other actions to further diagnose or remedy the problem are also presented The starting point tor a problem investigation could either be a report trom a user e g microphone station doesn t work or audio not heard in an area or a fault reported by the system supervision portion of the paging system In the information below the text of fault reports that might be observed and the internal tyoe numbers are noted Note All of these investigations assume the equipment had been working and then went to a non working or problem state It instead somebody recently reconfigured a device then the root cause of the problem could be due to a contiguration error such as a bad IP address or subnet mask or the wrong microphone ID or group ID in a microphone station Investigating contiguration errors are not covered in this document 273 ill TED Chapter B Basic Troubleshooting Guidelines GLOBALCOM Mic Station Control Line Failure fault type 2 This is an indication trom the Announcement Control System ACS that it cannot communicate with the indicated microphone station The checks that can be done and possible remedial actions to further diagnose this condition are listed in Table B 1 below Table B 1 Mic Station Communication Checks Actions Check Check Procedure Remedy Actions IED528 Display is lit Press any key to If PoE powe
139. be present on this device A 1502A0 supports a total of 2 zones but you may want to set this to 1 if you are only using one output This will prevent the unused output trom contributing to the total number of zones allowed with your sottware license 93 ill TED Chapter 6 Devices GLOBALCOM BGM Device Once you have detined one or more devices in the system as a BGM source it is then available as an item in this drop down list You select the device trom this list that will be used as the source device tor the BGM You can then select individual channels to be used for each zone output You can click the X icon to the right of the drop down list to clear the selection Zones This list allows you to contigure each output zone in the device Zone Number This is the number that will be used to identity this output zone in the system This number is calculated based on the values in the Start Zone and Total Zones tields Each output channel is an individual zone Description Double click on this tield to edit a text descriptor tor the zone Levels e Overall This is the master output level control tor the zone Adjusting this level will change the levels of both announcements and BGM This number represents the amount of attenuation relative to OdBFS So a value of 30 will attenuate the level by 30dB To reduce the level by an additional 10dB you would enter a value ot 40 e Emg This field defines an offset to t
140. bled checkbox checked in the microphone station setup to get a microphone station to appear in the drop down list Levels Use these sliders to adjust the three available level parameters for each channel BGM This adjusts the level of the background music channel for the output This level is also dependant on the current setting of the Overall level Duck This level sets the amount that the BGM channel will be lowered when an announcement is made A level of 60 effectively will mute the BGM when an announcement is made Overall This adjusts the master level of the output This will affect both BGM and announcements and should be used to set the main level of the output BGM Channel Select a BGM channel to use for this output from the drop down list Input devices that are contigured as a BGM source will be available in this list 14 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 2 Overview Tab Mute Click this checkbox to mute the output of the channel This will mute all announcements and BGM regardless of priority OK Click this button to close the window Current Faults This list displays any current faults in the system For information on historical logging of faults reter to the Windows System Log section of the documentation Current Faults ID Device Description Fault Type Fault Number Optional First Last 14955 System 1 System 1 Mic Station Control Line Failure 2 2 4 10 2012 10 37 42 AM 4 10 2012
141. button to indicate you are finished If you entered an invalid number then you will hear the prompt Invalid entry and will need to attempt to enter the correct one again Ifthe code is accepted you will hear Event Initiated goodbye and the event will start If there is an error and the event cannot start you will hear Error Occurred goodbye and the line will disconnect There is a chance that the system may hang up on you in the middle of a call or announcement This will only occur if all VolP channels are in use and another call is received that will trigger a higher priority announcement than you are currently making Scheduled BGM Level Change GLOBALCOM provides you with a method of changing the output level of the system at a scheduled time through the use of the Day Night ScheduleDevices that utilize this teature have a Night gain offset in the zone configuration This offset is applied to the output when the Night schedule is active Thus you can turn the system down at times when the facility does not require full output This setting attects the entire output level of the zone Theretore the background music BGM program PGM and paging signals will all be turned down when the night schedule is active What it you have a situation where you only want the BGM level to turn down while leaving the paging and PGM levels unaffected You accomplish this by processing the BGM signal through a T9160 or T9116 BEFORE
142. cally use the next available zone number as the starting zone number when you add a new device It can be edited here it needed For example you have a system that already has 32 zones When you add a new T9116 the starting zone will be 33 Total Zones This number represents the total number of zones that will be present on this device A T9116 supports a total of 16 zones but you may want to reduce the number if all 16 are not needed You will want to manage this because the software license has a total number of audio zones allowed For example it you have a system with a 32 zone license and you have three 3 T9116 frames you will exceed the maximum of 32 zones allowed by your license If you are only using eight 8 zones in each trame then you can reduce the number of zones in each trame still have zones available for future expansion Is BGM Source When checked the system will treat the device as a BGM source for the system When contigured as a BGM source the device will appear as an available BGM source for output devices The inputs defined using the First BGM Input and of Channels fields will be routed over the audio network of Channels This is the total number of channels that will be used as BGM inputs on the device The input channels must be consecutive so if you specify input 1 in the First BGM Input field and set a total number of channels at 4 then you will use inputs through 4 as the BGM inputs First BGM
143. cation i Equipment Closed E104 IP Address iJ 10 2 128 193 Command Port 12301 Report Port 12302 Start Relay Zone 125 Total Relays i 4 Zones Match To First Description Triggers Activation Type Reverse Polarity E Relay Zone 125 Edit None Solid v 126 Relay Zone 126 Edit None Solid Y 127 Relay Zone 127 Edit None Solid X 128 Relay Zone 128 Edit None Solid v Figure 6 35 Barionet50 Remote Logic Relay I O Setup Description Enter text here to give the device a descriptive name Location Enter text here to describe the physical location of the device IP Address Enter the IP address for the device Command Port This is the port that the vACS will use to communicate with the Barionet 50 It must match the UDP Command Port number in the Barionet 50 setup 79 ill TED Chapter 6 Devices GLOBALCOM Report Port This is the port that the Barionet 50 will use to send logic input state change messages to the vACS It must match the UDP Destination Port in the Barionet 50 setup You must also put the IP address of the vACS in the UDP Send Info Address tield in the Barionet 50 setup Start Relay Zone This is the zone number that represents the first output relay on the device The system will automatically use the next available zone number as the starting zone number when you add a new device It can be edited here it needed Total Relays This number represent
144. cement class determines the mute priority relative to other announcement as well as various other behaviors as defined for each announcement class The outputs that are muted are determined by the Zone ID or Zone Group fields These parameters are mutually exclusive thus only one zone destination method may be used Zone ID The Zone ID field specifies one 1 or more system zones to mute Zones are entered either by directly typing them into the entry box i e 1 2 3 7 18 or by opening the Zone Selector by clicking the button immediately to the right of the entry box Click on an individual zone to add or remove it from the action To add a range of zones in the same device select the first zone and then the last zone in the range while holding down the SHIFT key 189 Ww TED Chapter 7 Action Types GLOBALCOM LIR 257 Titan 1 OK Cancel Figure 7 34 Mute Zone Selection Zone Group A zone group is assigned to the action by selecting one of the previously defined zone groups trom the drop down list Multiple zone groups can be assigned to an action by clicking the icon to add more fields each with its own drop down selection list Click the X icon to remove a zone group field Once defined the mute will be cumulative for all zones included in the selected zone groups Use Prompt This feature requires a graphical paging station such as the IEDA528 series microphone station When checked this action w
145. ck the X icon to the right of the drop down list to clear the selection Channel Descriptions This description is used to give a name to each BGM channel that will be sourced trom this device This name will appear in selection lists tor devices when you are configuring outputs to receive BGM Monitor Test Note This button is not available when the External Titan Monitor Test Configuration checkbox is checked in the My Controller section Click this button to open the Monitor Test window for the T9160 as shown in Figure 6 65 From here you can configure the supervision parameters of the device view the latest test results or manually execute a test or set The T9160 generates a test tone that is routed to each channel and then the level is measured at three places on each channel The unit tests the analog output of the DSP before it enters the amplifier the voltage level at the amplifier output and the current drawn as a result of the loudspeaker load Three ditterent test signals are provided e 400Hz Ideal tor full range cone type loudspeakers e kHz Ideal for horn type loudspeakers e 20kHz Ideal for periodic supervision since this frequency will be inaudible in most systems Note Clicking the OK button on this window will immediately send and save any changes to the device The window contains checkboxes that allow you to enable or disable the test trequencies either globally or on a per channel bas
146. clear the selection Stop Action This drop down list box lists all available actions currently programmed in the system Selecting an action trom this list will allow the action to stop the selected action regardless of the source that triggered the announcement 203 ill TED Chapter 7 Action Types GLOBALCOM Click the X icon to clear the selection Note Specify either a Stop Mic or a Stop Action for most applications Selecting both a Stop Mic and Stop Action will limit the action where it will only stop an action that was started trom a specitic microphone station Specitying both is typically used to stop actions that were started trom logic input devices TTS Text to Speech Text to speech TTS messages allow the user to type in the text of the desired message and the optional TTS engine will generate the human like speech tor the message The system supports multiple voices and multiple languages but only one 1 voice per language can be used Copy Action Type i Ts Show All Fields Description Super Bowl welcome message Entry Code range i a5 gt Announcement Class i Medium Priority Pri fone ID ij 2 Use Prompt Zone Group i All Call Frame 1 101 _ Use Prompt TTS Text il The City of Indianapolis would like to welcome kate Figure 7 46 TTS Text to Speech Action Type Announcement Class Select the appropriate announcement class for the a
147. conds and the release time is 10 seconds 136 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 6 Devices Limit Note The limit sets the maximum amount of gain that can be applied through the ambient analysis compensation process The amount of gain available is determined by the attenuator setting of the Overall attenuation slider For example if the channel out slider is set to 20dB as shown in Ambient Analysis then the maximum available setting for the Limit slider will be 20dB Setting the Limit to 12dB will cause the output level to be increased by a maximum of 12dB above the setting of the Overall attenuation slider Thus with very loud ambient noise levels the output level will be effectively set to 8dB and reduced to 20dB when the ambient noise level is very low or has dropped below the threshold The ambient noise compensation will be continually adjusted within this range as long as the noise level remains above the threshold but below the amount required to drive the system to maximum level The Ambient Analysis algorithm differentiates between program audio and ambient noise level detected by the ambient noise sensor It is possible for the sensor level to be above the threshold with no ambient noise compensation applied when the level detected is program audio trom the system The limit is set by adjusting the slider with the mouse or by manually typing a value in the edit box below the slider using a positive numerical value O
148. crophone station the audio input source for the announcement is the microphone station The DelayedFromAlternateSource action type is used to activate an announcement using an audio source different from the activating device For example you may have a paging output on a telephone system that provides a line level output and contact closure When the system senses the closure it will record the audio until the 169 Ww TED Chapter 7 Action Types GLOBALCOM closure is released Atter which it is played back once the zones are available Closures are detected using devices that are not directly associated with an audio input theretore they must be defined using a DelayedFromAlternateSource action type if they are to route any audio signals In such cases the source will be the logic device and the Alternate Source will be the audio input Copy Action Action specific to device Administrator Rack LIR Overrides default action Logic Input 8 ON Logic 8 On i DelayedFromAlternati Show All Fields Description All Call Recorded Figure 7 10 DelayedFromAlternateSource Action Type Announcement Class Select the appropriate announcement class for the action The announcement class determines the announcement priority relative to other announcements as well as various other behaviors as detined tor each announcement class Alternate Source This drop down list box displays all the available sources in the system Select
149. ction The announcement class determines the announcement priority relative to other announcements as well as various other behaviors as detined tor each announcement class The destination for the announcement is determined by the Zone ID or Zone Group fields These parameters are mutually exclusive thus only one zone destination method may be used Zone ID The Zone ID field specifies one 1 or more system zones as the destination for the announcement Zones are entered either by directly typing them into the entry box i e 1 2 3 7 18 or by opening the Zone Selector by clicking the button immediately to the right of the entry box Click on an individual zone to add or remove it trom the action To add a range of zones in the same device select the first zone and then the last zone in the range while holding down the SHIFT key 204 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 7 Action Types Zone Group A zone group is assigned to the action by selecting one of the previously detined zone groups trom the drop down list Multiple zone groups can be assigned to an action by clicking the icon to add more fields each with its own drop down selection list Click the X icon to remove a zone group field Once defined the message will play cumulatively for all zones included in the selected zone groups Use Prompt This feature requires a graphical paging station such as the IEDA528 series microphone station When checked this action will prompt the st
150. ction is used to end the alert Sign Text Type in the text to be shown on any visual displays included in the assigned zone group Sign text can be used as an alternative to visual takes to define a visual message to accompany a live message Event Events are used when multiple actions must be performed at the same time as a result of a common stimulus See the Events section to learn more about creating events Once an event has been created it is launched by programming it as an action 174 TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 7 Action Types Copy Action Li Evac Building 12 Figure 7 15 Event Action Type Event Select the event to be triggered by this action from the drop down list Selecting the X icon will clear the selected event from the field FaultSet This action type will activate the specitied system fault Once activated the fault can be viewed in the status viewer This action type is typically used with system logic inputs to monitor external events such as UPS failures rack door switches environmental system failures etc FaultSet events are reported and logged with all other system faults or events and stored in the Windows System Log Refer to the System Supervision section for more information on fault reporting and logging Copy Action Type 4i Faultset Show All Fields Figure 7 16 FaultSet Event Note In order to use this feature a fault must first be defined in the Device Specific Fault
151. ction of the documentation for information on defining individual actions Click the Cancel button to close the prompt without making any changes Action specific to Information None Action for all 524 4 Button Paging Stations Cancel Figure 6 24 Add New Action Note If you add edit or delete a Default action on any 524 microphone station then those changes will apply to all 524 microphone stations Figure 6 25 shows the prompt that will appear it you selected to Add or Edit a button that already has a Default action detined but does not have a Device Specific action detined Notice that since a Default action is already detined you now have an Edit button that will allow you to edit the Default Action Since a Device Specific action has not been defined for this button the prompt gives you the option to add one using the Add button If you had selected a button that has both defined then you would be presented with an Edit button for each type of action Action specific to Information None Action for all 524 4 Button Paging Stations Cancel Edit Figure 6 25 Add Specific or Edit Default Action 68 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 6 Devices Figure 6 26 shows the prompt that will appear if you first select a button and then click the Delete icon You will be prompted to delete either the Device Specific action for the button or the Default action If only one type is defined then the Dele
152. ction on that specitic microphone station 66 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 6 Devices Delete Information Actions 5 3 Type Description Entry Code Extra Info ac Medium Priority Pri 6 ZoneGroups 101 AV Audio Live Live Local PTT Live Push To Talk EC 0 7G 65535 AC Medium Priority Pri 6 ZoneGroups 65535 AV Audio Brereconed Welcome PORP A AC Medium Priority Pr 6 Play Count 1 Takes 49152 609 ZoneGroups 100 AV Both live Security Live B AC Medium Priority Pri 6 ZoneGroups 102 AV Audio Unused Button C fe D Unused Button D Figure 6 23 MS524 Actions Figure 6 23 shows the action definition window for a 524 microphone station The top of the window will display the name of the station which in this case is Information to indicate that the station is located at the information desk This window allows you to assign an action to each of the available buttons on the 524 or edit Default Actions that apply to all 524 microphone stations in the controller The Extra Info column on the right will tell you if several things e fneither a Default or Device Specific action have been defined this field will be blank e Ifthe button is using a Default action it will appear in italics as shown for button A in Figure 6 23 e fthe button is using a Device Specific action and there is no Default action defined then it will appear in regular text as shown for button B in Figure 6 23 e tthe button
153. ctivated Repeat Last Departure This will immediately replay the most recently played departure message Pause Arrival Automation If any timers are used in the sequence to automatically play the sequence of arrival messages this will pause the playback of the sequence It is resumed when the Next Arrival entry code is activated Repeat Last Arrival This will immediately replay the most recently played arrival message 160 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 7 Action Types Skip Next Arrival This will immediately skip over the next arrival message in the sequence and play the subsequent message Skip Next Departure This will immediately skip over the next departure message in the sequence and play the subsequent message Delete Sequence This will remove the active sequence trom the queue and it will no longer be available at the microphone station CombinedLive This action type is only available tor the MS520 type of microphone station The action destination is determined at the time of launch based on the condition of certain buttons on the station When you configure the station you have the option of designating buttons as combine buttons A zone group is assigned to each button and then the action destination will be an accumulation of all selected zone groups Copy Action Type i CombinedLive Show All Fields Description Combined Action Entry Code range 0 0100 Vi Medium Priority Pris
154. currently selected action to the clipboard It is used to quickly contigure new actions based on one that has already been detined Paste Action This button only appears when there is information stored on the clipboard by using the Copy Action button Pressing this button will take the action parameters trom the clipboard and apply them to the currently open action overwriting any previous settings Once pasted the action can be modified to be different than the original source action Description This is a tree text tield used to give a logical description to the action Show All fields When an action is selected only the most commonly used data fields relevant to that action type are displayed Press this button to display all available parameters tor the selected action type This provides access to the other fields for more advanced configuration situations and will not be needed tor most applications 157 ill TED Chapter 7 Action Types GLOBALCOM 158 Show Base Fields The Show All Fields button changes to the Show Base Fields button once it has been selected to reveal all parameter fields Press the Show Base Fields button to hide the parameters that are not required tor most applications Entry Code The number entered in this box will correspond to the entry code used at the microphone station or input number of a logic input device For logic input devices it corresponds to the input on the device The entry code
155. d Auto test Enabled for Inaudible When this box is checked the inaudible test will execute automatically at the interval specified in the Interval edit box This allows for periodic testing of channels without any disruption in functionality Interval This entry box only appears when the Auto test Enabled for Inaudible box is checked Enter the time in minutes for the interval between periodic inaudible tests Refresh Click this button to reload the Test Set values from the amplifier 150 i TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 6 Devices Apply Click this button to send the current settings to the amplifier frame without closing the window OK Click this button to send the current settings to the amplifier frame and close the window Generic CobraNet Device This device type is used to configure the system to accept a non lIED CobraNet device as a BGM SOUrCe Note The 1522LR is not automatically discovered by the system You must manually create it by adding it as a new device in the Devices section The physical device must be manually configured with the appropriate settings using other utilities such as CobraNet Discovery CobraNet Device Generic CobraNet Audio Source Apply Configuration Now Description i corent evee O OOOO e waoni o pensere OOOO OO Is BGM Source i v ojojo 9 9 ti on on po ID Bundle Number a isos Type Number of Channels BGM 8 Figure 6 85 Generic CobraNet De
156. d 16000Hz 22000Hz is recommended as it will produce a higher quality soeech rendering Using a sample rate of 1 6000Hz will result in smaller tile sizes and slightly faster rendering times but at reduced quality RTP Transmitters RTP is used as the audio transport between vACS controllers that reside on different VLANs Each controller can support up to eight 8 simultaneous RTP connections An RTP Transmitter must be defined tor each outgoing channel and have a unique multicast IP address and port combination When you contigure this controller as a remote controller on another vACS you must use the RTP Transmitter information from here to tell the other controller that this controller uses these RTP Transmitters Click the icon to add a new transmitter to the list Click the X icon to delete the currently selected item trom the list ID Each transmitter will be assigned its own unique ID number This is a system assigned number and cannot be edited Audio Port This is the RTP port number that will be used along with the multicast group IP address to uniquely identity the audio channel This number is automatically calculated by the system but can be changed to meet the installation network requirements The detault port number is calculated using the following tormula 4000 1000 x system number ID For example transmitters 1 and 2 on system 1 would use ports 5001 and 50072 Transmitters 1 and 2 on system 2 would use por
157. d Insert Take buttons ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 7 Action Types Available Takes PDRP Text Filters German Spanish French English 606 Welcome to Will Welcome to Louisville Internationa Airport 607 Welcome to Buff 608 Welcome to Pied Current Takes 609 Welcome to Loui Append Take 609 Welcome to Loui Delete Take 610 Welcome to Va i Insert Take 611 Welcome to New 612 Welcome to Calg 613 Welcome to Edmo 614 Welcome to Las 615 Welcome to Spok 616 Welcome to Lehi 617 Welcome to Alba 618 Welcome to Lamb 619 Welcome to Chic 620 Welcome to Mont 621 Welcome to Sava 622 Welcome to Toro 623 Welcome to Gera 624 Welcome to Minn emme sa I 7 OK Cancel _ OK Cancel Figure 7 39 Take Browser Append Take This button will add the highlighted take in the Available Takes list to the end of the Current Takes list Insert Take This button will add the highlighted take in the Available Takes list to the Current Takes list It is added above the currently highlighted item in the Current Takes list Delete Take This button will remove the highlighted item from the Current Takes list Up Down Use the Up and Down buttons to move the highlighted item to a different location in the Current Takes list The order in the list is the order in which the takes will be played PDRP Text This field will display the text of all takes included in the Current Ta
158. d Music im fire_1366x768 jpg 1 31 2012 1 05 PM JPEG imag E Pictures E intruder_1366x768 jpg 1 31 2012 1 05PM JPEG imag H Videos me tornado_1366x768 jpg 1 31 2012 1 05PM JPEG imag J Computer fly SYSTEM C coq LIBRARY D a Removable Disk Es tu Network A gt File name Image Files onea Figure 15 2 Load Image File Description Use this field to enter a text description of the image Double click the field to enter edit the text 244 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 15 Visual Alerts and Wayfinding Visual Alert Usage Figure 15 3 shows the Visual Alert field as it appears when defining an action You can see that the three visual alert scenarios that have been detined in the example in Visual Alerts and Wayfinding are available for selection An additional item Clear Alert is used for an action that will clear an active alert Refer to the Action Types section tor more details on configuring system actions Match to Audible Takes Fire Evacuation Security Intruder Tornado Figure 15 3 Visual Alert Usage Figure 15 4 shows the configuration screen for a display device Here you see that there is a drop down selection list for each alert scenario that is defined in the Visual Alerts and Wayfinding list Refer to the Devices section for more information on configuring displays in the system From this list you select which image this display will use when each alert is activated Display 11
159. d in the area served by the channel Anywhere from one 1 to four 4 ambient noise sensors can be assigned to each channel Channels can also be slaved to other channels Click the Ambient button for the channel you wish to configure to open a window such as that shown in Figure 6 69 Program Sensors Gain Calc Filter Limit Ambient Out Overall Ambient for Zone 30 Fast Medium Slow AL Attack Las oR Figure 6 69 Ambient Analysis 120 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 6 Devices Attenuation Mode Each channel can be set to one of three different possible attenuation modes as described below e Fixed This mode deactivates the ambient noise compensation for this channel The channel output level will remain at the level set by the Overall attenuator e Automatic This mode will allow the level of the channel to automatically adjust based on the ambient noise level as detected by the ambient sensor input The level will increase above the Overall attenuator setting as higher ambient noise levels are detected by the ambient noise sensor The level will increase by an amount proportional to the detected level as determined by the Scaling Constant The maximum level increase is determined by the Limit slider e Slave This mode will cause the selected channel to follow the ambient noise compensation settings of another channel Using this setting allows multiple outputs on the same 19160 frame to be adjust
160. d item will move as you scroll through the list Title ltem Fire Evac Selected ltem Figure 11 12 Scroll Box ltem Colors 22 ill TED Chapter 11 Mic Templates GLOBALCOM X These icons are used to add or delete items in the list Click the icon to add a new item Clicking the X icon will delete the currently selected item Text This is the text that will appear in the scroll box item list Double click this field and type in a name for the item Action To assign an action to a scroll box item click in the Action column to open a drop down list of available actions Select the appropriate action from the list as shown in Figure 11 13 D No Scroll Box Define Scroll Box Title Emergency Messages Width 320 Background Colors Title Item Selected Item Text Colors Title Item Selected Item EG Text Action Mute Mute EC 10 2101 All Call Live EC 10 ZG 101 All Call Recorded EC 11 ZG 101 Fire Evac EC 1701 ZG 101 Tornado EC 1702 ZG 101 Security Intruder EC 1703 ZG 101 Fire Evac Clear Fire Evac EC 1801 Emergency All Call EC 911 ZG 101 Clear Tornado EC 1802 Clear Security Intruder EC 1803 Clear MuteAll EC 103 MuteAll EC 102 Mute EC 104 ZG 101 Clear Mute EC 105 X New Action EC 1700 ZG 102 New Action EC 1000 ZG 102 Figure 11 13 Scroll Box Item Action Selection EC Entry Code You can direct
161. diately to the right of the 18 Ww TED Chapter 7 Action Types GLOBALCOM entry box Click on an individual zone to add or remove it trom the action To add a range of zones in the same device select the first zone and then the last zone in the range while holding down the SHIFT key LIR 257 Titan 1 OK Cancel 4 Figure 7 26 LiveFromAlternateSource Zone Selection Use Prompt This feature requires a graphical paging station such as the IEDA528 series microphone station When checked this action will prompt the station user for either the zone code or zone group code for the action This gives the operator flexibility to choose the announcement or message destination at the time of launch This requires the microphone station operator to know a valid Zone ID or Zone Group that is available tor use LiveFromAlternateSource Advanced Properties The following properties will only be visible atter selecting the Show All Fields button 182 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 7 Action Types Copy Action Type J LiveFromAlternate5ot Y Show Base Fields Description AII Call Live 000 O Entry Code range Announcement Class Medium Priority Pri v Alternate Source Li Zone ID j _ Use Prompt Zone Group i Al Call Frame 1 301 v J9 amp _ Use Prom Blanking Zonecroup J jj tt CC ee 5 S CC A Eng Figure 7 27 LiveFromAlterna
162. e EQ provides a small range of gain adjustment in order to compensate for the overall ettect of the EQ curve and allow signal to noise ratio and dynamic range to be maximized This gain is set by entering a value in or relative dB in the edit box It should only be used within a range trom 6dB of attenuation to 6dB of gain Set Flat This button resets all filters to a gain setting of OdB flat response and disables all bands except tor band 1 Show Phase When checked the phase response through the EQ will be shown as a red curve on the graph 133 ill TED Chapter 6 Devices GLOBALCOM Save Local Copy Click this button to save the EQ curve as an XML file This allows you to archive the file as well as save it as a preset and load it into other channels Load From File Click this button to open a standard Windows tile dialog window From here you can locate an XML tile that has been stored with an EQ curve and load it into the frame Get From Frame Click this button to torce the window to reload the current EQ settings trom the trame Copy Click this button to copy all of the current EQ settings to the clipboard You can then move to another channel and use the Paste button to copy settings between channels Paste Click this button to paste the EQ settings stored on the clipboard to the current channel This button will be dimmed if there are no available EQ settings to paste from the clipboard Ambient Titan s
163. e action and then click the edit icon located at the top of the window It is the small round gear shaped icon You can also double click on a row in the Type column to open the editor Refer to the Action Types section for information on contiguring actions Logic Interface Actions _ Type Description Entry Code Extra Info Logic Input 9 ON 9 Logic ID 9 Logic State On Unused Logic Input 9 OFF 9 Logic ID 9 Logic State Off Unused Logic Input 10 ON 10 Logic ID 10 Logic State On Unused Logic Input 10 OFF 10 Logic ID 10 Logic State Off Unused Logic Input 11 ON 11 Logic ID 11 Logic State On Unused LogicInput11 OFF 11 Logic ID 11 Logic State Off Unused Logic Input 12 ON 12 Logic ID 12 Logic State On a Figure 6 34 9O32LVIO Actions 78 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 6 Devices Barionet50 Remote Logic Relay I O The Barionet 50 is a hardware device manutactured by Barix AG and is natively supported by the vACS as a remote logic O device The device is has tour 4 logic inputs and tour 4 relay outputs The Barionet 50 must be contigured using its own built in web server contiguration pages Consult the Barionet Family Product Manual available tor download at www barix com Note The RS 485 and RS 232 features of the Barionet 50 are not supported Remote Logic Device 2 Barionet50 Remote Logic Relay 1 0 pa Apply Configuration Now Description Remote Logic Device Show Base Fields Lo
164. e administrative access to the system A user with this permission level will have access to all system configuration options on the Admin tab Installer A user with this permission level will have edit access to everything on the Overview and Configuration tabs Some features on the Admin tab will not be available to this category of user User A user with this permission level will have edit access to items on the Overview tab that are needed for basic system operation All functions on the Configuration and Admin tabs are blocked for this category of user X tmpusr admin installer user Figure 23 1 Users tmpuser This is a special user that exists in all systems Should you forget the password to gain access to the system then you can utilize the tmpuser account to log into the system The password for this account is a special date sensitive password that you must obtain by contacting IED support personnel They will give you the Password of the Day for your system to use with the tmpuser account 2 1 ill TED Chapter 23 Users GLOBALCOM Click this icon to add a new user You will be prompted to enter a new user as shown in Figure 23 2 Type in a new username and click the OK button to add the new user Selecting the CANCEL button will close the window without adding the new user Note Usernames cannot contain any spaces Please provide a username sseramesod Figure 23 2 Add New
165. e an SNMP Endpoint to receive fault messages trom all controllers Current Faults ID Device Description Fault Type 54 Titan 1 20kHz Test Zone 9 Amp Output Titan 1 Channel 1A 128 7 55 Titan 1 20kHz Test Zone 9 Speaker Circuit Titan 1 Channel 1A 128 8 56 Titan 1 20kHz Test Zone 10 Amp Output Titan 1 Channel 1B 128 17 57 Titan 1 20kHz Test Zone 10 Speaker Circuit Titan 1 Channel 1B 128 18 Figure 18 1 Current Faults Fault Number Optional First Last 3 29 2012 4 46 02 PM 3 29 2012 4 46 02 PM 3 29 2012 4 46 03 PM 3 29 2012 4 46 03 PM 3 29 2012 4 46 04 PM 3 29 2012 4 46 04 PM 3 29 2012 4 46 05 PM 3 29 2012 4 46 05 PM System Supervision SNMP Endpoints f IP Port 127 0 0 1 162 10 2 128 161 163 IED Community public Generic Fault Descriptions Description Fault Type Test Point Pass Fail Audible Test b 1 Mic Station Control Line Failure Amplifier Problem Subsystem Card Component Failure Subsystem Environmental Visual Display Failure Visual Display Degraded Subsystem Failure Specific Fault Descriptions Description Communication Channel Network P DRP Channel 1 Down P DRP Channel 2 Down Backup CPU Failure Hard Disk Drive 0 primary Down Hard Disk Drive 1 Down Relay Device Down Device Off line 2 Fault Type 9 9 ooo O O O 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 Fault Number b 10 11 12 14 20 21 48 1
166. e features on the Admin tab will not be available to this category of user Users A user with this permission level will have edit access to items on the Overview tab that are needed for basic system operation All functions on the Configuration and Admin tabs are blocked for this category of user 30 lilt TED Chapter 4 First Run Setup Wizard GLOBALCOM 1O x zi 4 x amp Wiza ows Inte Ge y E http localhost FirstRun Wizard2 File Edit View Favorites Tools T Favorites Wizard Page IP Address 10 2 128 161 IED System Management Center netmasic ea GL O BA 7 MAC Address E069954F7693 System Version 1 0 4498 19996 VACS First Run Setup Wizard Please define the three levels of users present in the system Each class of user has different permissions with Admin being the highest level then Installers then Users Detailed system definition follows SMS False VOIP False Figure 4 5 Contigure Users Save Users amp Configure Devices Click this button to save the user configuration and move to the Device Discovery page of the wizard Device Discovery When the wizard takes you to this page it will attempt to tind the devices that you previously told the wizard you will have in your system For some device types it will automatically configure the device IP address as well It it finds devices that match the type of devices you have in the configuration bu
167. e items on the Overview tab provide very little intormation as they are managed on the vACS device The Admin tab is the only tab of use for this mode but typically reserved tor debugging only You will need to log in with an account with admin privileges to access that tab system Definition Roadmap Detining a system is an iterative process that you can pertorm as required based on the needs of a particular installation The exact order and steps are really up to you but there are certain dependencies that must be taken into consideration For example you need to have Announcement Classes defined before you start defining Actions as you must pick an Announcement Class for many of the available action types You can always go back and add them as needed but it helps to plan ahead to minimize the time you must spend switching between screens This roadmap is here to give you a general starting point to guide you through configuring a new system while describing the various dependencies involved 1 Define Users You need to have at least three 3 users defined for your system with the different levels of available access Systems typically ship with three user accounts user installer and admin You may use these three user accounts it desired or you can change them You can always add more later as needed 2 Configure Local System You need to configure the My Controller tab to define essential configuration options for the local con
168. e level by an additional 10dB you would enter a value of AO Duck This field controls how much the level of BGM will be reduced when an announcement is made to the zone A value of 10 will reduce the BGM level by 10dB when an announcement is made A value of 60 will effectively mute the BGM level when an announcement is made 14 ill TED Chapter 6 Devices GLOBALCOM Delay Each channel can be delayed by the amount entered in this tield The value is in milliseconds with a valid range of Oms to 25ms in whole millisecond intervals Setting this value to O removes any signal delay BGM Channel This drop down list allows you to select an individual channel to use as the zone BGM The channels available are for the device selected in the BGM Device field Match to First Click this button to take the three levels Overall Emg Night and BGM and the BGM Channel selection and copy them to the remaining zones in the device EQ Each channel has a EQ module available to adjust the signal as necessary to meet the needs of the loudspeakers and allow the system to be adjusted to maximize intelligibility in the acoustic space Press the EQ button for a channel to open the EQ window as shown in Figure 6 81 EOSO SetFlat Copy Peaking v Peaking v Peaking v Peaking v Peaking v Peaking v Peaking v HiPass v LoPass X 0 332362282 1 41634277 0 223384567 0 03780430 0 50563088S 1
169. e or load a completed configuration file which has been previously constructed If a default file is chosen more detailed system descriptions will follow If a completed configuration file is chosen this wizard will complete Load Default Configuration Load Configuration From File Load Configuration From File SMS False VOIP False Figure 4 2 Load Configuration From File Click the Load Configuration From File button to open a Windows file dialog as shown in Figure 4 3 From here you simply navigate to the location of the appropriate tile and click the OPEN button to load the configuration Backup files use a VBK file extension open x gO m v inetpub wwwroot bak Search bak Organize New folder EE A Favorites Name Date modified Type 2012_2_20 14_2_19 vbk 2 20 2012 2 02 PMM VBK File ad Libraries 2012_2_20 14_5_2 vbk 2 20 2012 2 05PM WBK File Documents We 2012_4 11 10_54 10 vbk 4 11 2012 10 54 4M VBK File ad Music Pictures E videos jE Computer Rly SYSTEM C c LIBRARY D a Removable Disk E ui Network EE gt File name 2012_4 11 10 54 10 vbk vacs Backup Files vbk emee Figure 4 3 Open Configuration File 28 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 4 First Run Setup Wizard Configure Devices On this page you must enter some basic intormation about the system that you are building Figure 4 4 shows the device configuration page of the wizard s i
170. e root cause investigate first If Ground Fault also occurring for this channel The speaker line current Speaker Circuit then that may be the root cause ground faults can draw is out of tolerance l Pere cause higher current draws investigate first Speaker line detached trom Titan frame or a break in the line Some speakers on the line tailed see below It initial investigation determines that the problem may be in a speaker line driven trom the Titan frame or in the speakers attached to that line one can investigate turther using the Circuit Test feature in the Enterprise software With this feature one can turn on a test tone for a selected amplitier channel and then go out into the zone space and walk the speaker line listening tor tone coming out of each speaker Note This test tone feature has an automatic time out of a few minutes so it doesn t get lett on accidentally forever One may need an assistant at the computer console to re start the test tone periodically 298 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter B Basic Troubleshooting Guidelines From the evidence gathered one may be able to inter whether there are individual speaker problems or there is a break in the speaker line somewhere It it is not desirable to put a tone out to the space due to the presence of the public in the area at that time then a substitute may be to assign background music to that zone and possibly remove the music tr
171. e to connect to the PBX You must obtain this intormation trom the PBX provider SIP User This is the user ID that this line will use to connect to the PBX You must obtain this information trom the PBX provider SIP Password This is the password associated with the SIP User that this line will use to connect to the PBX You must obtain this information trom the PBX provider SIP Port This determines the SIP port used by this line tor the VoIP service This is automatically set and should not be edited unless required by the PBX vendor RTP Port This determines the RTP port used by this line tor the VoIP service This is automatically set and should not be edited unless required by the PBX vendor Template Templates are used to define a series of voice prompts that the user will hear when the line is answered Each item in the list is associated with an entry code in the template detinition Select the template to use for this line trom the drop down list 154 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 6 Devices Locked When checked security is enabled Access is restricted based on the data entered in Mic Passwords Caller ID can be used to automatically login a user calling trom a particular extension If this is not defined then the user will be prompted to enter their 4 digit password to gain access It this box is not checked there will be no security protection Refer to the Mic Passwords section of the documentation for more
172. e to visual takes to define a visual message while a mute is in progress 193 ill TED Chapter 7 Action Types GLOBALCOM 194 Prerecorded Prerecorded messages offer a wide range of possibilities in providing automated message playback in a facility Prerecorded messages are sometimes referred to as assembled messages because they are created by cascading a series ot message segments known as takes together to create the final message A single take can be the full message or only a part of a message For example the message text below is an example of a situation where a single take would encompass the entire message Passengers are reminded that they may carry on two pieces of luggage If you have more than two pieces of luggage which are oversized the agent will be happy to check your luggage for n you The system stores this take as a single file and it is indexed with a unique take number In this example the take number is 8210 and it can be played completely using only that take The next example uses multiple takes to form a complete message Welcome to Abilene Municipal Airport For the health and comfort of the traveling public all terminals are smoke free Smoking is permitted at designated curbside areas only Thank you This example consists of three individual takes that have been assembled together in the Take Browser to play as a single message Here are the individual takes Welcome to Abilene M
173. ecommended that you simply choose the Open option which will open the zip tile and display the contents which is the tile you want to save as shown in Figure 26 5 From here simply use the standard Windows commands to copy the tile to the desired location on the local machine Windows Internet Explorer x What do you want to do with temp zip Size 5 35 KB From 10 19 99 2 Open The file won t be saved automatically Figure 26 4 Temp zip El temp e s E Temporary Internet Files Content IE5 V2WL7PDS temp Fie Edit View Tools Help Organize y Views v Extract all files Name vj T si Passw v x el ne DKB LNO areen 2 KB ApplicationHistory ogMeIn Microsoft Credentials Feeds Internet Explorer Windows J 1033 Ji Burn Explorer J GameExplorer m Temporary Internet Files Content IE5 J v2wL7PDS Figure 26 5 Contents of Temp zip File Upload to vACS This command will allow you transfer a tile trom your local computer to the vACS You must first enter the path on the remote vACS where the file is to be placed You must type this path directly into the Path Entry Box shown in Figure 26 3 For example it you want to place the file in the root directory of the C drive then you would type C in the Path Entry Box 281 Chapter 26 Debug Utilities 282 ill TED GLOBALCOM You then click the Upload to vACS button and you will be prompt
174. ect this port to a switch on the same network as the primary port Enter the IP address here that will be used to identity the device on the backup local GLOBALCOM network 107 GLOBALCOM li TED Chapter 6 Devices Backup Global CobraNet IP Address This is a backup port that can be used when redundant networks are in place Do not connect this port to a switch on the same network as the primary port Enter the IP here that will be used to identity the device to the backup secondary audio network CobraNet Transmitters and Receivers The CobraNet transmitters and receivers are automatically set by the system and the defaults are sufficient tor most applications The ability to override the defaults is provided here if it is required 1522LR Logic Relay Module This device has two 2 logic inputs capable of sensing contact closures or logic voltages It also has two 2 form C relay outputs tor interfacing with external devices You can assign actions to each of the logic inputs The relay outputs can either be used as output zones that close while announcements are in progress or they may be tied to the System Supervision module to indicate faults 1522LR Device 1 1522LR Logic Relay Module Hi Apply Configuration Now Description i 1522LR Device 1 show Base Fields Location i Equipment Room 1438 IP Address 10 2 150 87 Start Relay Zone i Total Relays i 2 Description
175. ed and remain on the displays until cleared Visual alerts can also be used without any visual takes or sign text Use the Clear Alert item if this action is used to end the alert Sign Text Type in the text to be shown on any visual displays included in the assigned zone group Sign text can be used as an alternative to visual takes to define a visual message to accompany a live message LiveOrDelayed This type of action will initiate a live announcement if the defined zones are available tor the announcement It they are not available then a delayed announcement will be used The available setup parameters for this action type are identical to those of a Live action type Copy Action Type i LiveOrDelayed Show All Fields Description New Action Entry Code range ij 13 gt Medium Priority Pris Announcement Class i Use Prompt Gy All Call Frame 1 101 ee Figure 7 28 LiveOrDelayed Action Type Announcement Class Select the appropriate announcement class for the action The announcement class determines the announcement priority relative to other announcement as well as various other behaviors as detined tor each announcement class The destination for the announcement is determined by the Zone ID or Zone Group fields These parameters are mutually exclusive thus only one zone destination method may be used 184 ill TED GLOBALC
176. ed by a single sensor or a gang of sensors This setting is useful in very large spaces where multiple amplifier channels are required due to the power load requirements of the loudspeaker lines Select the channel that this channel will be slaved to trom the drop down list Note A channel can only be slaved to a channel that is located in the same T9160 maintrame Program This level meter displays the real time audio signal level at the input of the Ambient Analysis object This signal is post EQ and post delay but does not have the test signal Sensors Level This level meter displays the real time sound pressure level SPL trom the ambient noise sensor Note This level is the sum of both the ambient noise in the space and the program audio trom the system The Ambient Analysis algorithm tilters out the audio system s contribution to the overall level and provides a real value of ambient noise level to the system for processing Sensors Threshold The threshold determines the level at which the ambient noise compensation is suspended because the level at the sensor is too low When the detected level from the ambient noise sensor rises above the threshold setting then the system will actively operate It will filter the system program audio component trom the detected level to accurately adjust the output attenuation based on the calculated noise level When the level is below the threshold the system will st
177. ed with a windows Open dialog as shown in Figure 26 6 From here navigate to the tile that you wish to transter and click the Open button to begin the transfer Organize 2 Views _ New Folder Favorite Links Name _ v Date modified T v Size GSMC 9 9 2011 12 09 AM_ File Folder HME Desktop pRoboScreenCapture 4 28 2010 10 13 File Folder pl Computer J SMC GUI Proposal H 7 6 2012 12 30PM File Folder IE Documents d VACS Make License 3 15 2012 2 23PM File Folder E Pictures fire_1366x768 1 31 2012 1 05PM JPEG Image 190 KB ee FixMediaSense 5 4 2012 5 33PM Windows Batch File 1KB B Music EJintruder_1366x768 1 31 2012 1 05PM JPEG Image 184KB 8 Recently Changed g msahci_enabled 5 15 2012 2 15PM Registration Entr 1KB P Searches fai Shortcut to RoboScr 7 16 20123 31PM_ Shortcut 1KB J Public temp 7 16 2012 3 45PM Compressed zip 6KB tornado_ 1366x768 1 31 2012 1 05PM JPEG Image 97 KI vacs 6 18 2012 3 15PM XML Document 33 KB 3 w MAPDRIVES 2 17 2011 2 40 PM Windows Batch File 1KB Jw MAPDRIVES 10 9 19 2011 2 05PM Windows Batch File 1KB S W REMOVEDRIVES 9 14 20019 29AM_ Windows Batch File 1KB Folders im gt File name Jtomado_1366x768 x am Figure 26 6 Windows Open Dialog Once the file is complete you will receive a pop up window like the one shown in Figure 26 7 This will tell if the transfer was successful or unsuccessful 1 files saved succ
178. el from the drop down list for this input This corresponds to the physical input connector on the Titan frame where this input is connected 101 ill TED Chapter 6 Devices GLOBALCOM Audio Network Bus This tield sets the internal audio bus number that allows this input to be available tor use as an audio source within the Titan trame This number corresponds to the internal Tie Line number of which there are eight 8 available in each frame If you are using more than one 1 External Titan Source input on a frame each should have its own unique bus assignment 1 8 Master Device Select the Titan trame trom the drop down list that contains this audio input Input Transmitter This tield sets the CobraNet transmitter that will be used for this input in order to route its audio to other devices over the network Leave this field at the default value of O if the input will only be used locally within the frame Setting it to 1 or 2 will place this input in one of the two available output transmitters 1100TEL Telephone Interface This device is an additional piece ot hardware used to provide additional VoIP telephone intertace lines It is capable of providing up to eight 8 lines that will prompt the user to select the actions that they wish to perform by using pre defined action templates It can also support up to 32 direct action extensions that will immediately execute the pre detined action when the line answers 102
179. elay is in its de energized state until it is triggered When this box is checked it will normally energize and will de energize when triggered This is most usetul when a relay is used to indicate a fault to an external system or indicator panel That way a fault condition will be triggered if the unit loses power 92 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 6 Devices 1502 Audio Outbox Device 1502A0 Line Level Outputs 1502 Audio Outbox Device Mw Apply Configuration Now Description 1502A0 Line Level Outputs show Base Fields Location i Equipment Room 124 IP Address i 10 2 128 179 Satan wales MDevice aJ Ttani X Match To First Description Overall Emg Night BGM BGM Channel 65 Zone65 20 le lo 20 66 Zone 66 20 6 0 20 None Figure 6 50 1502 Audio Outbox Device Setup Description Enter text here to give the device a descriptive name Location Enter text here to describe the physical location of the device IP Address Enter the IP address for the device here Start Zone This is the zone number that represents the first zone in the device The system will automatically use the next available zone number as the starting zone number when you add a new device It can be edited here if needed For example you have a system that already has 32 zones When you add a new 1502A0O the starting zone will be 33 Total Zones This number represents the total number of zones that will
180. elected This section consists of a series of accordion panels that will open or close when you click on the header bar ill TED Chapter 1 Introduction GLOBALCOM Clicking on this bar will open the EAT Announcement Activity Activity panel Mic amp Zone Status s IED GLOBALCOM System LIR Titan 1 DNA7800 Amplifier Frame 1 vrwiicosete CARRE EERE CCCA SEES Status panel FIP Sign Zones TOO4ONLR EEE SEE Current Faults My Devices Available Devices Figure 1 3 Contiguration Options Panels Status Bar The bottom portion of the SMC screen contains a status bar that displays the current license status and the current system operating mode See Licensing on page 23 tor more information regarding the details of the items shown on the status bar qe Zones 20 Current Frames 1 SMS True Licensed 32 O Licensed Unlimited System Mode vacsi Current License Information Current System Mode Figure 1 4 Status Bar system Modes The available contiguration options available within the SMC will vary based on the hardware that it is controlling and or the way the system has been licensed The four general categories of different operational modes are outlined below Announcement Controller In this mode the vACS service is functioning as an announcement controller It has the ability to own system devices thus you have access to adding deleting and contiguring devices trom the SMC when opera
181. elines 2 20 200 20cc0cceceeeccecceeceeceee 293 VOIP SCR IIS OCC cnc cams utters EEEE E EEE 301 Scheduled BGM Level Change 2 2 22ccecceccecceceecceceeceeceeeeesees 303 289 ill TED GLOBALCOM Appendices This page has been intentionally left blank 290 FAS Entry Codes For systems that utilize the optional Flight Announcement System FAS you must define certain reserved entry codes using the graphical microphone templates These entry codes are specific to the FAS and you do not need to define any actions for these announcements The first table below gives you the buttons and entry codes to detine for most FAS applications They are presented in an order that is most logical for FAS usage The template can be moditied to best meet the needs of the facility Table A 1 FAS Microphone Station Buttons Entry Code 4 paea O 5 Pause Sequence T 6 RepesttosiDeporue E 8 Add FaStonguoge a 9 Change Sequence I The tollowing tour 4 tables detine the individual scroll boxes tor buttons 10 11 13 and 14 Table A 2 Scroll Box 1 Title Select Delay Message Entry Code Departure Delay with Time 1137 Departure Delay Unknown Time 114 Arrival Delay with Time 1137 Arrival Delay Unknown Time 1142 29 Ww TED Chapter A FAS Entry Codes GLOBALCOM Table A 3 Scroll Box 2 Title Select Cancel Message Entry Code Arrival Canceled 1078 Departure Canceled 1190 Table A 4 Sc
182. ensure that all controllers will have the same take files You must have this option checked when the remote controller is a Lifeline ACS Note When multiple playback devices are used it may take up to one 1 minute for recorded takes to be transterred to all other playback devices in the system Push All Takes Click this button to immediately copy all audio and visual takes on the local controller to the remote controller Caution This option requires the system fo transter very large amounts of data over the network and will probably load the controller and network to a point where it may no longer be able to process announcements Only use this option in a controlled situation where the system can be taken oftline while the copy is in progress Push Config When checked the configuration file of the local controller will be copied to the remote controller each time the contiguration is saved When contiguring a remote controller as a Lifeline you must check this box to ensure that the Lifeline controller will always have current contiguration data RTP Transmitter This determines the method that the local controller will use to transmit and receive audio to and from the remote controller You must select either RTP or CobraNet trom the drop down list When selecting RTP as the transport method you must contigure the RTP Transmitters here to match the RTP Transmitter settings in the My Controller definition of the
183. eries T9116 trames are equipped with ambient noise compensation Ambient Analysis capabilities when paired with a noise sensor collector such as a T9032NS Ambient Analysis adjusts the output attenuation of a channel in response to ambient noise level measured in the area served by the channel Anywhere from one 1 to four 4 ambient noise sensors can be assigned to each channel Channels can also be slaved to other channels Click the Ambient button for the channel you wish to configure to open a window such as that shown in Figure 6 77 Ambient Controls Titan 1 Ticketing 1A Assign Sensors Program Sensors Gain Calc Filter Limit Overall Threshold Scaling Gain Range Constant Fast 1 4 Medium 90 Calibration Slow 16 Test Calibrate OK Cancel Figure 6 77 Ambient Analysis 134 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 6 Devices Attenuation Mode Each channel can be set to one of three different possible attenuation modes as described below e Fixed This mode deactivates the ambient noise compensation for this channel The channel output level will remain at the level set by the Overall attenuator e Automatic This mode will allow the level of the channel to automatically adjust based on the ambient noise level as detected by the ambient sensor input The level will increase above the Overall attenuator setting as higher ambient noise levels are detected by the ambient noise sensor The
184. ermines the rate at which the output level will increase when an increase in the ambient sensor level has been received The value is in the number of seconds and can be directly entered in the box using the keyboard Filter Release This value determines the rate at which the output level will decrease when a decrease in the ambient sensor level has been received The value is in the number of seconds and can be directly entered in the box using the keyboard Filter Presets e Fast Preset where the attack time is 1 second and the release time is 2 seconds e Medium Preset where the attack time is 3 seconds and the release time is 4 seconds e Slow Preset where the attack time is 7 seconds and the release time is 10 seconds Limit The limit sets the maximum amount of gain that can be applied through the ambient analysis compensation process The amount of gain available is determined by the attenuator setting of the Overall attenuation slider For example if the channel out slider is set to 20dB as shown in Figure 6 82 then the maximum available setting for the Limit slider will be 20dB Setting the Limit to 12dB will cause the output level to be increased by a maximum of 12dB above the setting of the Overall attenuation slider Thus with very loud ambient noise levels the output level will be effectively set to 8dB and reduced to 20dB when the ambient noise level is very low or has dropped below the threshold
185. es The 1 1OOTEL has an internal device used to bridge the VolP telephone audio to the CobraNet audio network This internal card also has an IP address that must be set to one number higher than the base network IP address of the device You can configure this device by either double clicking on it in the list or highlight it and select the yellow gear shaped icon to open the properties window Refer to the Internal CobraNet Audio Device documentation for information on how to configure this device 5074 40024 Unused EC 10 F 3 5075 40026 Unused EC 11 Fe 3 Description Location Actions Extra Info Internal Cobra Telephonelnterface 8 Sound C Figure 6 58 1 1OOTEL Devices List 1100 Digital Audio Bridge This device is an additional piece ot hardware used to span a GLOBALCOM system across different Local Area Networks LAN for larger systems CobraNet is used to transmit and receive digital audio in a GLOBALCOM system and operates on Layer 2 of the OSI model Therefore the digital audio signal cannot be passed through a router and can only transmit and receive to other devices located on the same LAN In order to send and receive digital audio to GLOBALCOM or 510 520ACS systems located on other networks you must use one or more 1100 Digital Audio Bridge devices to span the networks In large systems you may have an 1 1OODAB unit for each announcement controller to bridge each controller to a separate inter system audio network 10
186. es such as announcement reports External Titan Monitor Test Configuration This box should be checked when you are using enhanced Titan T9160 testing functionality that requires the use of a separate contiguration application This is required when the End ot Branch EOB testing devices are used in conjunction with at T9160 mainframe When enabled the test configuration features are disabled in the T9160 device setup screens of the SMC System Number Each controller must have a unique system number Enter the appropriate number here When you define this controller in another controllers Remote Controllers list you will need to properly reterence this system number This is also the Group Number used to configure 39 ill TED Chapter 5 My System GLOBALCOM microphone stations to communicate with their parent controller Group Offset This setting alters the method used tor CobraNet bundle calculations Leave this at the default of O unless directed to do otherwise by factory support personnel System IP Address By default this field is populated with the current IP address obtained trom the operating system It you change the address here it will change the IP address of the controller Caution Changing the address here will require a system reboot it it is ditterent from the current settings System Netmask This setting also defaults to the subnet mask setting obtained from the operating system It you c
187. escriptive name how Base Fields tox s ill TED Chapter 6 Devices GLOBALCOM 60 Mic Number Each input on the device must have its own unique mic number This is the number used to identity the input as a usable source within the announcement controller When you add the device each number is automatically defined It can be changed if needed Once it has been defined here it will appear as an available source when defining actions My Node ID This is the number that is used to identity this controller to one or more 8000 systems It must be defined in the 8000 configuration in the channel field of the zone setup as shown in Figure 6 17 In the example below the Node ID is 4 and the Zone Type must be set to EXTERNAL This is a screenshot of the IED Navigator software used to configure 8000 systems Table 6 Zones The audio outputs from the frame and their parameters a peoien aare Tro pate Cua ere yet Cac ero Cear em Seenen car Signal Frame 4 External Figure 6 17 8000 Configuration CoController IP Addresses Each 8000 system that will be interacting with this controller must have their IP address entered in this list Click this icon to add another controller IP address to the list 4 Click this icon to modify the currently selected IP address A Click this icon to delete the currently selected IP address trom the list Zones This list is used to detine one or more zones
188. ess that was discovered or you can choose to change the device address to match the one stored in the contiguration file Use Discovered IP 10 2 128 173 Use Configured IP 10 2 128 181 peice eee Figure 4 7 IP Address Resolution 32 Section 2 Configuration MYS TO a E E E E 35 DOV OES eee ee OE ene ae ae eee re ee emer 49 Achion TYPES ae eee ene et eee ee ee ee 157 Announcement Classes 2 22020c00ececeeeeceeeeeeee 209 Zone GrOU DS aes nieee i eine aa tau eats aes 213 User 010 0 S Rv ee et E ee E ee eee 217 Mic Templates 2 22 22 20 2ccccccecceccecceceeceeeeeeees 221 Mic Passwords 2 2 202000c0cececececec ences ecececeeeeees 229 Scheduled Actions 2 2 20 2020c20ecc eee ec eee ee eee ee ees 231 RAE D EEE E AE R AA A AAE A eee 239 Visual Alerts and Wayfinding 00000000000000000000000000000 243 Day Night Schedule 2 0 ccccccccecceecceceeeeee 247 IMS ee ee ee ee ere 249 System Supervision 22 200 220ce cece cece cece eeeeeeee 251 Print Configuration 2 2 2 22 220220cc0cceeceeceeeeeeceeeeees 259 39 ill TED GLOBALCOM This page has been intentionally left blank Configuration 34 My System This section is where you define certain parameters of the controller as well as define all other controllers in the system In order for this controller to communicate with another controller i
189. essfully Figure 26 7 Transfer Confirmation Take Management Prerecorded action types use a pre loaded take library to create professional quality messages Typically the take library will be loaded and configured properly based on the languages that you ordered with your system This editor is used to edit some of the information associated with each take if needed You cannot edit the audio take file here You are only able to edit the visual text that corresponds with the audio take file a few pieces of timing information and the category for the take to make it easier to find in the Take Library ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 26 Debug Utilities Take Management Save Take Info None 1339 Numbers 284 Airlines 597 Cities 1299 Letters 29 Time 73 Take ID 609 Short Description Welcome to Loui Welcome Messages Category a ER Takes listed by category American English v Length 185 Visual Text Welcome to Louisville International Airport General Messages 1544 Bienvenue a roport international de Colors 15 a Louisville French v Length 245 Visual Text Languages Delay Reasons 29 Bienvenidos al aeropuerto internacional de Spanish v Length 255 Visual Text Louisville 4 Welcome Messages 63 601 Welcome to Nati 602 Welcome to Kans 603 Welco
190. facility instructing occupants to stay in place until the situation has been resolved This can be combined with visual alerts to direct occupants to the nearest exit X Evac Building 12 Evac Building 11 Figure 14 1 Events Programmed events will appear in the events list as shown in Figure 14 1 When an event is highlighted by selecting it with the mouse the view is expanded to show the details of the event as shown in Figure 14 2 This expanded view shows the individual actions assigned to the event and a play schedule that shows when each action will be triggered within the event X Description Evac Building 11 Evac Building 11 Actions ox Evac Building 12 ID Type Description Announcement Class Start Delay Play Count Play Interval Extra Info AC Emergency Pri 2 Play Count 10 Repeat Interval 15 Takes 62 Prerecorded Fire Evac Building 11 Emergency Pri 2 0 10 15 49152 7084 ZoneGroup Count 1 AV Both AC Emergency Pri 2 Play Count 5 63 Prerecorded In Place Alarm Building 12 Emergency Pri 2 60 5 1 Repeat Interval 1 Takes 49152 7046 ZoneGroup Count 1 AV Both Event Schedule 00 00 00 Fire Evac 00 00 15 Fire Evac 00 00 30 Fire Evac 00 00 45 Fire Evac 00 01 00 Fire Evac 00 01 00 In Place 00 01 15 Fire Evac ilding 11 ZG 105 ilding 11 ZG 105 ilding 11 ZG 105 ilding 11 ZG 105 ilding 11 ZG 105 arm Building 12 ZG 104 ilding 11 ZG 105
191. ftware license has a total number of audio zones allowed For example it you have a system with a 32 zone license and you have three 3 T9160 frames you will exceed the maximum of 32 zones allowed by your license If you are only using eight 8 zones in each trame then you can reduce the number of zones in each trame still have zones available tor future expansion Is BGM Source When checked the system will treat the device as a BGM source for the system When contigured as a BGM source the device will appear as an available BGM source for output devices The inputs defined using the First BGM Input and of Channels fields will be routed over the audio network of Channels This is the total number of channels that will be used as BGM inputs on the device The input channels must be consecutive so if you specify input 1 in the First BGM Input field and set a total number of channels at 4 then you will use inputs through 4 as the BGM inputs 112 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 6 Devices First BGM Input This drop down list allows you to select the first input channel on the device that will be used as a BGM input BGM Device Once you have detined one or more devices in the system as a BGM source it is then available as an item in this drop down list You select the device trom this list that will be used as the source device tor the BGM You can then select individual channels to be used for each zone output You can cli
192. ge ID here to filter the message list and display messages that only contain that message ID IP Filter You can enter a specific IP address in this field to view only message associated with a specific device at a known address Figure 26 12 illustrates this where an address of 10 2 128 171 has been entered as a filter address Only messages to or from this IP address will be displayed in the Message Window Double click entries to view details Object Filter 0 Clear List Message ID Filter o IP Filter 10 2 l 128 171 Incoming Time Occurred IP Address Object ID Message ID Message Number Data 7 Received 5 18 2012 4 02 29 PM 10 2 128 171 FF 00 08 0A 51998 00 00 00 00 FF FF 00 00 00 00 00 40 E2 FF 0 Sent 5 18 2012 4 02 31 PM 10 2 128 171 30 00 00 02 1291 Received 5 18 2012 4 02 31 PM 10 2 128 171 30 00 80 02 1291 00 00 00 Figure 26 12 NetMon IP Filter Clear List Click this button to clear the contents of the message window Message Window This list displays the message data in a tabular format 286 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 26 Debug Utilities Incoming This tield indicates it the message was sent by the host device or if it was received by the host trom another device Sent indicates that the message was transmitted by the host while Received indicates it was received by another device Time Occurred This is the system date and time when the message was sent or received IP Address For a
193. ge to people arriving to the city for the event The message can be programmed on a schedule that only plays it on the days where they anticipate many arriving passengers that will be attending the event They can even change the message on departure day to play a different message thanking them for their patronage ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 7 Action Types Access to certain messages trom a microphone station is restricted based on a user s level of access when logins are enabled on the mic station Theretore emergency messages can be blocked tor general system users but made available only to security personnel Using additional interface hardware messages can be played trom external control devices such as a tire alarm or security panel Copy Action Entry Code range i Announcement Class i Zone ID i Oe Prompt Zone Group i All Call Frame 1 101 _ Use Prompt Figure 7 38 Prerecorded Action Type Announcement Class Select the appropriate announcement class for the action The announcement class determines the announcement priority relative to other announcements as well as various other behaviors as detined tor each announcement class The destination for the announcement is determined by the Zone ID or Zone Group fields These parameters are mutually exclusive thus only one zone destination method may be used Zone ID The Zone ID field specifies one 1 or more system zones as the destinatio
194. hange the address here it will change the subnet mask of the controller Note The Internal CobraNet Audio Device has its own network port that must be contigured separately The System Management Center cannot directly set this address Refer to the Internal CobraNet Audio Device documentation for instructions on setting this address WCF Port This sets the port that the application uses to communicate with other applications and services The default is 80 and it should not be changed unless it is required tor a custom installation AAS Manager Address AAS stands tor Automated Announcement System If you have an installation that utilizes an external announcement manager such as the Flight Announcement System FAS then you must enter the IP address of that server here This allows the local controller to receive announcement commands trom that device Lifeline System Select the Lifeline ACS it used that will be used to back up this controller trom the drop down list Click the X icon to the right of the drop down list to remove the selection In order for a system to appear in this list you must have a system defined as a VACS Lifeline type in the Remote Controllers list Kill Lifeline This checkbox only applies when a VACS Lifeline is used to backup the local system When checked the local controller will instruct the Liteline controller to reset and relinquish its control back to the local controller AQ ill
195. he Day of the Month field The action will play on the specified day of the month within the programmed date range It will play at the programmed interval during that day in the programmed time window 234 i TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 13 Scheduled Actions 4 Entry Foyer Welcome Message M Monthy T ioan gt Ea I 1 59 om J Figure 13 7 Monthly Schedule Mode Relative This mode allows you to play the action on a schedule that is relative to the first day of the month This allows for scheduled actions such as the first Tuesday of every month You enter the relative week number in the Week of the Month field and then check the box for each day within that week that the action is to play 4 Entry Foyer Welcome Message F D Relative v i 1 3 12 00am gt Ea 1 59 9m 33 J Figure 13 8 Relative Schedule Mode As with the previous modes the action must have a date window and a time window configured as well Yearly With this mode the action will only play on the date entered in the Start Date field It can play once at the specitied start time or it can play at the programmed repeat interval within the programmed time window 235 Ww TED Chapter 13 Scheduled Actions GLOBALCOM 236 bi i Entry Foyer Welcome Message Fj er 1 3 L 12 00 am Figure 13 9 Yearly Schedule Mode Start Date Stop Date These two fields specify the d
196. he Overall level to use when an announcement is made with an announce class that has the Emergency tlag set This allows you to increase the level of the output for emergency announcements The default value is 6dB If you use this setting with an Overall setting of 20dB then an emergency announcement will be played using an output level that is 6dB louder than normal announcements Night This field defines an offset to the Overall level to use when the night schedule is invoked as programmed in the Day Night Schedule section of the Configuration tab This allows you to decrease the level of the output based on the time of day tor each day of the week The default value is OdB and is set by entering a value to turn the output down For example if you enter a value of 6 then the channel level will be turned down by 6dB when the Night schedule is placed in effect e BGM This field sets the BGM level for the zone This number represents the amount of attenuation relative to OdBFS So a value of 30 will attenuate the level by 30dB To reduce the level by an additional 10dB you would enter a value of 40 Mute When checked the output of the device will be muted 94 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 6 Devices BGM Channel This drop down list allows you to select an individual channel to use as the zone BGM The channels available are for the device selected in the BGM Device tield Match to First Click this button to take
197. he backup amp trom slot 9 to the now empty slot Titan Amp Frame Internal Card Fault fault type 4 This condition appears with tault descriptions such as e Communication Fault AIO Unit 1 or 2 Titan IPAU e Communication Fault MTC Unit 1 or 2 Titan IPAU e Communication Fault LVIO Unit 1 or 2 Titan IPAU This indicates that one of the several circuit boards in the top portion of a Titan amplifier frame T9160 is not communicating properly with the main circuit board in the frame AIO MTC and LVIO are the card types There are two of each type card in a T9160 frame indicated by unit 1 or unit 2 in the tault description There is little that can be diagnosed externally about this condition One can try clearing the fault condition by powering down the Titan amplifier frame waiting at least 10 seconds and then re powering the frame If the condition continues or re appears often then the manufacturer should be contacted for further investigation or repair of the frame The urgency or criticality of getting a Titan trame with this fault repaired or replaced may depend on which card is faulted and the tolerance the facility has for partial loss of functionality For example if the error indicates loss of functionality on the upper 8 channels 5A through 8B and there are no amps installed in those slots then perhaps the tault doesn t hurt anything in the system and getting it resolved quickly is not a priority Below in Table B 2 is a
198. he currently selected display Refer to the Display section for more intormation on how to contigure an individual display x Click this icon to delete the currently selected display i TED Chapter 6 Devices GLOBALCOM Display This device type is used to contigure individual displays From here you can contigure the content that will be shown when the display is idle and you can specify which image to show for a visual alert or waytinding event a Display 1 a Display Description i Display 1 show All Fields Location i Entry Corridor IP Address i 10 2 128 101 Messages Visual Alerts http 10 2 128 1 prizm 5_3_1 Fire x Weather Weather Alet Alet Security Security Alert z Figure 6 28 Display Setup Description Enter text here to give the display a descriptive name Location Enter text here to describe the physical location of the display IP Address Enter the IP address for the display Screens X Click the icon to add a new screen to the list Click the X icon to delete the currently highlighted screen from the list Sign This ID number is used to identify the control processor internal or external that is driving the sign Some signs have built in processors This ID is used to identify the sign to the system server for content display 72 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 6 Devices Zone This number corresponds to the actual zone number that will
199. he device Click the OK button to update the settings in the device and or contiguration Use New IP Address 10 2 128 164 Use Discovered IP 10 2 128 172 Use Calculated IP Address 10 2 128 163 aa Lise Configured IP 10 2 128 173 D oon Figure 2 14 Resolve IP Address Unknown Device Type If the Discovery Service detects the device but is unable to determine the type of device then you will see a window like that in Figure 2 15 If this occurs you must manually set the device by selecting the appropriate type trom the Type drop down list as shown in Figure 2 16 TED GLOBALCOM Add as New Device Replace Existing Device a Unknown Device 12 D Unknown w C 4 Figure 2 15 Device Configuration Add as New Device Replace Existing Device a Unknown Device 12 D Unknown M5530 M5528 ms520 G LvVIO Barionet50 LIR SignGroup ClassGroup T9160IPAU T9116ZOP T9160Transit PEI_1 USB_1 MSG MS524 T9040NLR T9016RY T9032RY T9032NS AQ1502 AI1502 Annuncicom100 Figure 2 16 Unknown Device Type Selection Chapter 2 Overview Tab 2 ill TED GLOBALCOM This page has been intentionally left blank 22 Licensing The vACS has many different features that are enabled based on the license purchased Below are the various features that must be enabled through the license
200. he drop down list as shown in Figure 2 12 C3 Add as New Device Replace Existing Device o Figure 2 12 Select Existing Device Resolve This button may appear in either the My Devices or Other Devices tabs when the discovered IP address is either not configured or does not match the IP address in the device contiguration Ww TED Chapter 2 Overview Tab GLOBALCOM 20 IP Description Location Extra Info Wrox 10 2 128 161 System 1 VoIP Interface 1 Mic 259 SIP Server 1601 SIP Extension 1601 fray 10 2 128 161 System 1 VoIP Interface 2 Mic 258 SIP Server 1602 SIP Extension 1602 T feats pes Terai oeut Temose D 10 2 128 161 System 1 LIR Mic 257 10 2 128 171 Titan 1 Main Equipment Room Rack 2 Frame 1 16384 16 Zones Start Zone 9 BG b 10 2 128 162 System 1 Sound Card IP MAC Description Location Extra Info Figure 2 13 Other Devices When you click the Resolve button you will see a window that matches one of the windows shown in Figure 2 14 The window on the lett will appear if the device has not been set with an IP address You can either enter one in the top box or select the bottom button to use the system assigned IP address It the device has an IP address but it does not match the contiguration you will see the window on the right You can choose to set the IP address of the device to match that in the configuration or choose to change the configuration to match the IP address of t
201. hen a separate action to stop it using the other logic state 110 wil TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 6 Devices To edit an action select the action and then click the edit icon located at the top of the window It is the small round gear shaped icon You can also double click on a row in the Type column to open the editor Refer to the Action Types section for information on configuring actions 1522LR Device 1 Actions is x Description Entry Code Extra Info Prerecorded Pn 6 Logic ID 1 Logic State On AC Medium Priority Pri 6 Play Count 1 Takes 49152 201 ZoneGroups 100 AV Audio StopAnnc Logic ID 1 Logic State OF Stop Action Logic Input 1 ON Logic 1 On 7G 100 Stop Mic 1523LR Device 1 LiveFromAltemateSource Pri 2 Logic ID 2 Logic State On AC Emergency Pn 2 ZoneGroups 100 AV Audio StopAnnc Logic ID 2 Logic State Off Stop Action Logic Input 2 ON Logic 2 On 7G 100 Stop Mic 1522LR Device 1 Logic Input 1 ON 1 Logic Input 1 OFF 1 LiveFromAlternateSource Logic Input 2 ON 2 StopAnnec Logic Input 2 OFF 2 Figure 6 63 1522LR Actions T9160 Digital Amplifier Frame Titan 1 T9160 Digital Amplifier Frame tm Apply Configuration Now Dev Handle 16384 Frame Number i sotzmes 9 Is BGM Source v fofchmnes 2 pvice i Titan 1 x Monitor Test Dual Channel Match To First Dual Channel Dual Channel Dual Channel Dual Channel Dual Channe
202. hen the calibration constant is too high It should be reduced in small increments until the system remains stable while an announcement is active e Ifthe system gets louder as while an announcement is active then the calibration constant is too low It should be increased in small increments until the system remains stable while an announcement is active Filter Attack This value determines the rate at which the output level will increase when an increase in the ambient sensor level has been received The value is in the number of seconds and can be directly entered in the box using the keyboard Filter Release This value determines the rate at which the output level will decrease when a decrease in the ambient sensor level has been received The value is in the number of seconds and can be directly entered in the box using the keyboard Filter Presets e Fast Preset where the attack time is second and the release time is 2 seconds e Medium Preset where the attack time is 3 seconds and the release time is 4 seconds e Slow Preset where the attack time is 7 seconds and the release time is 10 seconds 122 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 6 Devices Limit Note The limit sets the maximum amount of gain that can be applied through the ambient analysis compensation process The amount of gain available is determined by the attenuator setting of the Overall attenuation slider For example if the channel out
203. her computer you may want to store the backup tile on your local machine or save it to an external storage device If you choose not to do this the backup file will still be stored on the local controller ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 21 Backup Restore x ernssmeo A Organize v New folder y v ER Favorites Name Date modified Type E SWINDOWS BT 2 17 2011 6 38 PM File folde El eg Libraries E WINDOWS LS 2 17 2011 7 23PM File folde Documents d Cirrus Logic 2 10 20119 21AM_ File folde Music J IED 5 2 2012 11 22 AM File folde t Pictures J inetpub 3 5 2012 10 444M File folde E Videos IP Intel 11 16 2010 10 23 File folde messages 6 21 2011 3 24PM File folde BRP Computer JD Perflogs 11 15 2010 8 49 PM File folde fae SYSTEM C3 d Program Files 3 29 2012 3 01PM File folde Ea LIBRARY D3 ProgramData 11 14 2011 12 48 File folde E a Removable Disk L Temp 3 30 2012 11 17 AM File folde Se ES gt File name 2012_5_3 13_45_41 vbk Save as type fan Files amp Hide Folders Cancel Figure 21 4 Internet Explorer Save As Window Backup Takes Click this button to create a backup of all the audio takes on the controller The individual take tiles are stored in a compressed archive tile and can be restored it needed Caution This operation may result in degraded system performance while in progress due to the large amount of information being processed Restore Config
204. how All Fields Description Monitor Room C47 Entry Code range i 34 gt Announcement Class i Medium Priority Pri zone ID li Figure 7 30 Monitor Action Type Announcement Class Select the appropriate announcement class for the action The announcement class determines the announcement priority relative to other announcements as well as various other behaviors as defined for each announcement class 187 i TED Chapter 7 Action Types GLOBALCOM Zone ID The Zone ID field specifies the system zone to be monitored Only one 1 zone can be selected at a time and is entered either by directly typing it into the entry box or by opening the Zone Selector by clicking the button immediately to the right of the entry box Click on a zone to add or remove it from the action Use Prompt This teature requires a graphical paging station such as the IEDA528 series microphone station When checked this action will prompt the station user tor the zone to be monitored This gives the operator flexibility to choose the monitor source at the time of launch This requires the microphone station operator to know a valid Zone ID tor the room Copy Action Description Monitor Room C47 entry code rarae 34 gt i Medium Priority Pri a Li 9076 i 9073 Figure 7 31 Monitor Action Type Monitor Advanced Properties The following properties will only be visible atter selecting the S
205. how All Fields button Copy Action Description Monitor Room C47 Entry Code range i Wi Medium Priority Pri o S076 DE 9073 Figure 7 32 Monitor Action Type Show All Fields Pre Announce Tone Enter the take number to be played at the start of the action to alert individuals that the system has begun monitoring the room Leave this field blank if you do not want to play a pre announce tone 188 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 7 Action Types Monitoring Tone Enter the take number to be played approximately every 30 seconds to alert occupants that the room is being monitored Leave this field blank if you do not want to play a periodic monitoring tone Mute The mute action type is used to mute selected zone groups or individual zones It does this by activating an announcement that does not have an input source thus effectively blanking out other announcements in the specitied areas Because the system treats a mute as an announcement it is also assigned a priority This allows a mute action to be overridden by higher priority announcements if needed Copy Action Type i Mute z Show All Fields Description Mute Zone Group Entry Code range i 102 gt Announcement Class i Medium Priority Pri one ID i Use Prompt O Ticketing 102 DESS Figure 7 33 Mute Zone Groups Announcement Class Select the appropriate announcement class for the action The announ
206. ient sensors are directly assigned to control the currently selected channel Each channel can have one 1 to tour 4 ambient noise sensors assigned When multiple sensors are use the system averages the signal levels trom all assigned sensors to obtain an ambient noise level reading There are three very critical rules related to using multiple ambient noise sensors in a single zone that are described below Rules for using multiple sensors for a single zone e All sensors must be connected to the same sensor collection unit e All sensors must be connected to the same input group on the collection unit e All sensors must be located in the same loudspeaker zone 123 Chapter 6 Devices 124 Ww TED GLOBALCOM O X Noise Sensor Device T9032NS 3 v Noise Sensor Group 1 Noise Sensor Group 3 Ticketing A1 v Sensor 2 _ Sensor 3 _ Sensor 4 _ Sensor 5 _ Sensor 6 _ Sensor 7 _ Sensor 8 Noise Sensor 1 Noise Sensor 2 Noise Sensor 3 Noise Sensor 4 Noise Sensor 5 Noise Sensor 6 Noise Sensor 7 Noise Sensor 8 Noise Sensor Group 2 Noise Sensor Group 4 Sensor 9 Sensor 10 Sensor 11 Sensor 12 Sensor 13 __ Noise Sensor 5 Noise Sensor 1 Noise Sensor 2 Noise Sensor 3 Noise Sensor 4 Figure 6 70 Ambient Sensor Assignment To assign sensors tirst select the appropriate collector device trom the Noise Sensor Device drop down list Then select up to tour 4 sensors to use for the cha
207. ill allow the message to play continuously at the specified Repeat Interval until it is stopped using a StopAnnc action type programmed to stop this announcement Repeat Interval This is the time between successive message playbacks Positive numbers are used to designate an interval in minutes while negative numbers are used to designate an interval in seconds 5 would be 5 minutes 30 would be 30 seconds This time is from the start of the first playback to the start of the next one If the interval is set to 30 seconds and the message is 10 seconds in duration then there will be approximately 20 seconds between playbacks Delayed Advanced Properties The following properties will only be visible atter selecting the Show All Fields button Copy Action Tee Entry Code range i Announcement Class i Zone ID aaa Use Prompt Zone Group All Call Frame 1 101 3 _ Use Prompt Blanking ZoneGroup D 7J Pre Announce Tone Figure 7 9 Delayed Action Type Show All Fields 168 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 7 Action Types Blanking Zone Group Select the zone group to use as a blanking zone group trom the drop down list box The zone group selected will ettectively be muted when this action is executed Blanking zone groups are typically used to mute areas that are adjacent to where the announcement will be made to prevent other announcements messages or background music trom intertering with the
208. ill prompt the station user for either the zone code or zone group code for the action This gives the operator flexibility to choose the mute destination at the time of launch This requires the microphone station operator to know a valid Zone ID or Zone Group that is available tor use Mute Advanced Properties The tollowing properties will only be visible atter selecting the Show All Fields button 190 ill IED GLOBALCOM Chapter 7 Action Types Copy Action Type i Mute gt _ Show Base Fields Description an Call Live Entry Code range 10 gt Announcement Class i Zone ID Ui na Use Prompt Zone Group i Al Call Frame 1 101 J9 L _ Use Promt Figure 7 35 Mute Action Type Show All Fields Visual Take List This section is used to select a visual take to display on any visual displays included in the assigned zone group This allows a visual take from the take library to be displayed while a the system is muted in an area Refer to the Prerecorded section for instructions on using the Take Browser to add takes to the list Match to Audible Takes This button has no function for this action type as there are no audible takes for a mute action Visual Alert Select one of the pre defined visual alerts to display on any visual displays included in the assigned zone group Visual alerts are displayed after the completion of the visual message if defined and remain on the displays u
209. information Direct Action Extensions When defined each line will immediately execute the defined action when the line is answered Ext This is the extension number that this line will use to connect to the PBX You must obtain this information from the PBX provider SIP User This is the user ID that this line will use to connect to the PBX You must obtain this information from the PBX provider SIP Password This is the password associated with the SIP User that this line will use to connect to the PBX You must obtain this information from the PBX provider SIP Port This determines the SIP port used by this line for the VolP service This is automatically set and should not be edited unless required by the PBX vendor RTP Port This determines the RTP port used by this line for the VolP service This is automatically set and should not be edited unless required by the PBX vendor Action Performed This is where you define the action that will be performed when the line answers You define the action by clicking on the small yellow gear icon in the list or by double clicking on the item in the list This will open the standard action definition window Refer to the Action Types section of the documentation for more information on defining an action Locked When checked security is enabled Access is restricted based on the data entered in Mic Passwords Caller ID can be used to automatically login a user calling from
210. ing an audio network Each station is capable of having a local source that gets overridden when an announcement is sent to the station trom the command center The audio is placed on a virtual audio bus on the network and then commands are sent to each station that is to route the audio bus to local zones 99 Ww TED Chapter 6 Devices GLOBALCOM Aux Feed E J External Titan Zone nnn O i Start Zone Li 10 2 128 174 Titan 1 External System Feec Figure 6 55 External Titan Zone Setup Description Enter text here to give the device a descriptive name Location Enter text here to describe the physical location of the device Start Zone This is the zone number that represents this device The system will automatically use the next available zone number as the starting zone number when you add a new device It can be edited here if needed For example you have a system that already has 32 zones When you add a new External Titan Zone the zone will be 33 Output Channel Select the output channel that will be used for this zone from the drop down list Audio Network Bus This field sets the audio bus number for installations that utilize networked audio busses that are typical of transit type installations This setting will be determined by the audio network configuration at the system head end Audio Bus Manager IP Enter the IP address of the network device that will be responsible for managing the audio
211. ion as fault indicators and have definitions in the Triggers field Solid The relay will activate while the fault condition is present and deactivate once the fault condition has cleared e Momentary The relay will activate for approximately 1 second and then deactivate e Pulsating The relay will cycle between active and inactive states at a rate of approximately 1 second on and 1 second off Activation Type Momentary Pulsating Figure 6 62 1522LR Activation Types Reverse Polarity Check this box to reverse the operating polarity of the relay Normally a relay is in its de energized state until it is triggered When this box is checked it will normally energize and will de energize when triggered This is most useful when a relay is used to indicate a fault to an external system or indicator panel That way a fault condition will be triggered if the unit loses power Actions Actions are available tor the two logic inputs on the device When you open the Actions tor the device you will notice that there are two actions for each logic input One is associated with the activation of the input and the other with the deactivation of the input You can differentiate between the two by looking tor On or Off in the Logic State field in the Extra Info column This allows you to create an action that will remain active while a contact closure is held To do this you must define an action to start the announcement and t
212. is You can also set the test tone output level by entering a value in dBFS in the individual frequency level input boxes 113 Ww TED Chapter 6 Devices GLOBALCOM Use these checkboxes to completely remove a frequency from the display window Use these boxes to enter the test tone output level to be used for each 400Hz Set Test 1kHz Set Test IV Show IV Show E 36 _lis i o Frequency AmpIn AmpOut SpeakerCurrent Test Var Set Test Var 20 477 20 484 0 007 9 852 9 867 0 015 49 305 49 52 0 015 20 5 20 5 0 10 156 10 164 0 008 44 422 44 422 0 20 602 20 617 0 015 7 93 7 93 0 46 961 46 953 0 008 Enable disablea frequency on a per channel basis using these checkboxes Figure 6 65 T9160 Monitor Test Caution Clicking either the Test or Set buttons on the 400Hz or 1 kHz will cause audible tones to be played through the system Test Click one of the test buttons to start a test for that frequency Once completed the results will be shown in the results table as shown in Figure 6 66 peakerCurrent Test Var Ampin Set Test Var 20 477 20 484 0 007 9 852 9 867 0 015 49 305 495 324 0 015 20 5 20 5 0 10 146 10 164 0 016 44 422 44 422 0 20 602 20 602 0 7 93 56 43 DEEE 46 061 22 ERT Figure 6 66 Test Results Table The actual measured values at each point are displayed in the Test column for each test point The
213. it has been defined here it will appear as an available source when defining actions ra ill TED Chapter 6 Devices GLOBALCOM Start Zone This is the zone number that represents the first zone in the device The system will automatically use the next available zone number as the starting zone number when you add a new device It can be edited here it needed For example you have a system that already has 32 zones When you add a new Annuncicom 100 the starting zone will be 33 Total Zones This number represents the total number of zones that will be present on this device An Annuncicom 100 supports a total of 2 zones but you may want to set this to 1 if you are only using one output This will prevent the unused output trom contributing to the total number of zones allowed with your software license Local Receive Port This is the port number that the vACS will use to receive audio trom the Annuncicom 100 It must match the destination port in the Annuncicom 100 setup The detault port setting is 3030 and can be lett at that for most applications Destination Port This is the port number that the vACS will use to transmit audio to the Annuncicom 100 It must match the UDP Intertace Port set in the Annuncicom 100 setup The detault port setting is 12301 and can be left at that for most applications Time Slice msec This value determines the sampling window for the audio to be included in each network packet Larger va
214. kes list thus showing the complete text of the message Use any of the language buttons to display the text in one of the other available languages Filter The Filter entry box allows the takes shown in the Available Takes list to be filtered by a keyword typed into the Filter box 197 Ww TED Chapter 7 Action Types GLOBALCOM 198 Available Takes PDRP Text Filter baggage Japanese Korean Chinese German Spanish French English Welcome to Louisville International Airport Numbers 0 Current Takes Airlines 0 Append Take 609 Welcome to Loui Delete Take None 0 b Cities 0 Insert Take 9991 Letters 0 b Time 0 General Messages 13 Colors 0 Delay Reasons 0 Welcome Messages 0 b Airport Messages 5 Test Messages 0 gt Chimes Tones 0 7 Up Down OK Cancel _ Figure 7 40 Take Browser Figure 7 40 shows the list with the word baggage used as a filter keyword Notice how the number of displayed messages in each category has been significantly reduced Only takes with the word baggage not case sensitive in the text are shown If you already know the take number you can type it into the Filter box to quickly locate the take Note Flyover help is available tor each take Hovering the mouse pointer over a take in the Available Takes list will display the complete text of the take in a pop up window Languages Each available language that is insta
215. l Dual Channel Dual Channel Description Night BGM Duck Delay BGM Channel 9 Ticketing 1A 0 0 Channel 1 10 Ticketing 1B 0 Channel 1 11 Ticketing 2A Channel 1 12 Ticketing 2B Channel 1 13 Ticketing 3A Channel 1 Figure 6 64 T9160 Digital Amplifier Frame Setup Description Enter text here to give the device a descriptive name 111 ill TED Chapter 6 Devices GLOBALCOM Location Enter text here to describe the physical location of the device IP Address Enter the IP address for the device here Dev Handle This is a sottware address used by the system It is assigned by the system and provided here for reterence it needed Frame Number This is a unique ID number used to identity the Titan frames used in the system When you add the device the system will automatically assign the next available frame number Start Zone This is the zone number that represents the first zone in the device The system will automatically use the next available zone number as the starting zone number when you add a new device It can be edited here it needed For example you have a system that already has 32 zones When you add a new T9160 the starting zone will be 33 Total Zones This number represents the total number of zones that will be present on this device A T9160 supports a total of 16 zones but you may want to reduce the number if all 16 are not needed You will want to manage this because the so
216. l address of the card using a separate contiguration utility described later in this section 52 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 6 Devices CobraNet Transmitters and Receivers The CobraNet transmitters and receivers are automatically set by the system and the defaults are sufficient tor most applications The ability to override the defaults is provided here if it is required Configuring the ASI Card IP Address The Internal CobraNet Audio Device is an internal plug in card with its own IP address information with its own configuration utility The System Management Center cannot directly contigure the card s address intormation so it is imperative that you contigure the IP address of the card using the supplied configuration utility if you ever change the IP address of the controller Locating the ASI IControl Utility The Internal CobraNet Audio Device is configured using the AS Control utility Unless it has been inadvertently deleted there should be a shortcut located on the desktop that will give you access to the Tools tolder Locate and double click on the icon shown in Figure 6 7 Figure 6 7 Desktop Tools Icon This will open the Tools folder as shown in Figure 6 8 Locate the ASIControl application and double click it to launch the utility L Tools 15 x a JN J A Tools b Search T EJ Organize m Open Sharewith New folder Gil R Name Date modified Type Size a ASIControl 5 2
217. l v 18 v 18 v Figure 6 76 EQ Settings Window Bands are selected by clicking on one of the nine band names immediately below the frequency response curve graph A specific band can be selected and then adjusted using the edit boxes below the names It is also possible to select a filter and edit its frequency gain and bandwidth directly in the Frequency Response display window using the mouse to drag the filter position cut boost or bandwidth Type Select a filter type in the drop down list The available options are e Peaking A typical bandpass type filter e Notch Sharp bandpass cut only filter e Hi Pass Filter tor rolling off frequencies lower than the cutoff frequency e Lo Pass Filter tor rolling off frequencies higher than the cutoff frequency e All Pass Filter used tor phase adjustments near the center trequency e Disabled Turn this filter off Note The options for the filter parameters will change slightly depending on the filter type selected Center Frequency Hz The center frequency or cutoff frequency of the filter is set by entering a numeric value in the edit box The trequency parameter can also be changed by dragging the diamond icon in the graph laterally lett or right Gain dB This is only available tor Peaking and Notch filter types 132 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 6 Devices The filter gain is set by entering a numeric value using or values for relative dB
218. lanking zone group trom the drop down list box The zone group selected will ettectively be muted when this action is executed Blanking zone groups are typically used to mute areas that are adjacent to where the announcement will be made to prevent other announcements messages or background music trom intertering with the delivery of an announcement Click the X icon to clear the selection trom the list Pre Announce Tone Enter the take number to be played at the start of the action to alert individuals to the message or announcement being made Leave this field blank if you do not want to play a pre announce tone Visual Take List This section is used to select a visual take to display on any visual displays included in the assigned zone group This allows a visual take trom the take library to be displayed while a live announcement is in progress Refer to the Prerecorded section for instructions on using the Take Browser to add takes to the list Match to Audible Takes This button has no function for this action type as there are no audible takes for a live announcement Visual Alert Select one of the pre detined visual alerts to display on any visual displays included in the assigned zone group Visual alerts are displayed atter the completion of the visual message it detined and remain on the displays until cleared Visual alerts can also be used without any visual takes or sign text Use the Clear Alert item if this a
219. lay directly from the Devices list then you will be prompted to add the new Display to an Owner Device when you exit the properties window as shown in Figure 6 30 Select the appropriate device trom the drop down list and then press the OK button The Display will now be available tor editing trom within the contiguration of the owner device Owner Device Sign Zones X OK Figure 6 30 Owner Device Prompt Titan 9032LVIO Logic Voltage I O The IEDT9032LVIO is a logic input output device with 32 channels that are configured as either inputs or outputs The type of each channel input or output is determined in groups of eight 8 so the following combinations are possible e 320UT OIN e 240UT 8IN e 160OUT I16IN e 8OUT 24 IN e QOUT 32IN The I O configuration of the device is determined by the value entered in the Total Relays field The channels are configured with outputs first and then inputs If you decide to use eight 8 channels for logic outputs then you would enter a value of 8 in the Total Relays field This would configure the device with channels 1 through 8 as logic outputs and 9 through 32 would then be ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 6 Devices available as logic inputs and available to launch actions If you entered a value of 16 in the Total Relays tield then channels 1 through 16 would be logic outputs and 17 through 32 would be inputs To configure the device as all logic inputs just leave the Total Re
220. lays field blank Figure 6 31 shows the setup properties of a device with eight 8 channels contigured as outputs 7 h Logic Interface Titan 9032LWIO Logic Voltage IO rm Apply Configuration Now Description i Logic Interface Show Base Fields Location i Main Equipment Room IP Address i 10 2 128 191 i l Dey Handle 15408 had a E Mic Number i 258 Pullup Resistor i Start Relay Zone ij 101 Frame Number Total Relays i Zones Match To First P Pea Triggers Activation Type Reverse Polarity 101 Relay Zone 101 Edit None Solid 102 Relay Zone 102 Edit None Solid hal 103 Relay Zone 103 Edit None Solid 104 Relay Zone 104 Edit none Solid a 105 Relay Zone 105 Edit None Solid h 106 Relay Zone 106 Edit None Solid r 107 Relay Zone 107 Edit None Solid 108 Relay Zone 108 Edit None Solid ounces Figure 6 31 Titan 9032LVIO Logic Voltage I O Setup Note You can configure a device with a number of outputs that are not a multiple of 8 However doing this will block the remaining channels of that group trom use For example you only want to use channels through 4 as outputs This will block 5 through 8 trom use and the first available action source will be input 9 Description Enter text here to give the device a descriptive name Location Enter text here to de
221. learing the log when necessary You will find the information in a new log titled IED_ User The log will record each change event with a date and time stamp that appears on the lett side of the display as shown in Figure 25 1 The right section will display the parameters that were changed with the username appearing at the top of each property list a User admin made the following changes kE kkkkttkE kkkt kkkt ktkt ktkt lt action id 219 EC 17 InputType MS528 gt lt AnncID value 2 gt lt Description value All Call gt 2012 07 10T15 01 45 07 00 Information lt Type value Live gt lt StartDelay value 0 gt lt AVflag value 1 gt lt ZoneGroupID value 100 gt lt action gt User admin made the following changes SKESKKAKCSKKSKKCSKSHKSHKCSKCKKSKKSKKSHKREHKSAEK SH lt zonegroup id 100 gt 2012 07 10T15 02 33 07 00 Information lt Desc value All Call Frame 1 gt lt zoneID value 1 25 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 gt lt zonegroup gt I4 4 Page 1 of1 gt gt I Figure 25 1 User Log As the log grows in size it will exoand to multiple pages The current page and total number of pages available are displayed at the lower right corner of the User Log tab From here you can use the navigation arrows to navigate to the first previous next or last pages You can also type in a page number in the box to go directly to that page 2 ill TED GLOBAL
222. level at the sensor is too low When the detected level from the ambient noise sensor rises above the threshold setting then the system will actively operate It will filter the system program audio component trom the detected level to accurately adjust the output attenuation based on the calculated noise level When the level is below the threshold the system will stop actively adjusting the output attenuation and return to the maximum attenuation setting which is the base level setting as detined by the Overall attenuation control 135 ill TED Chapter 6 Devices GLOBALCOM The threshold is set by adjusting the slider with the mouse or by manually typing a value in the edit box below the slider using a positive numerical value Gain Calc Scaling Constant The Scaling Constant determines the amount of ambient noise level that will result in the output level to increase by 1dB A scaling constant of 1 will result in the output level increasing by 1dB for each 1dB increase in ambient sensor level Figure 6 77 shows a scaling constant of 1 4 With this setting a 1 4dB increase in ambient sensor level will result in a 1dB increase in output level up to the point where the Limit has been reached Gain Calc Calibration Constant This value is calculated and automatically entered during the channel calibration process It can be manually adjusted by typing in a new value in the edit box Caution This value should only be manually adjus
223. list of what functions are tied to which internal cards Table B 2 T9160 Internal Card Functions Internal Card Functions Impacted Channels 1A through 4B inputs on the back of the frame Amplitier outputs to channels 1A through 4B AIO Unit J Note It is possible that an AIO card will continue to pass audio even when the card is experiencing communication faults The digital audio to from the card is passed via a separate connection One may wish to evaluate whether audio is still flowing to determine whether this fault condition is critical or not Channels 5A through 8B inputs on the back of the trame AIO Unit 2 Amplifier outputs to channels 5A through 8B Supervision of amplifier voltage outputs and speaker line current sensors for channels 1A through 4B MTC Unit 1 Supervision of amplifier voltage outputs and speaker line current sensors for channels 5A through 8B LVIO Unit 1 Supervision of Ground Faults for channels 1A through 4B MTC Unit 2 295 ill TED Chapter B Basic Troubleshooting Guidelines GLOBALCOM Supervision of amplifier good status lines and amplifier temperature sensors for channels 1A through 4B Supervision of all Fan statuses 1 4 Supervision of amplifier good status and amplifier temperature on the backup amplifier slot 9 Control of power on the backup amplitier slot 9 Control of all backup amplifier switching relays In summary Loss of backup amplifier switching functionality
224. lled in the system requires its own unique list of take tiles The take library has been structured so that the same take numbers for each language correspond to the same message phrase translated to the appropriate language Therefore once takes have been assembled to create a complete message in one language it is easy to play the message in additional languages Figure 7 41 shows a message using multiple languages Ww ED GLOBALCOM Chapter 7 Action Types Copy Action re o Entry Code range ij Announcement Class i Zone ID i L Re Binion Zone Group i All Call Frame i 101 _ Use Prompt Welcome to Louisville International Airport glish 9991 Baggage should be attended at all times Figure 7 41 Using Multiple Languages Because of this feature it is easiest for the user to create a message in their native language and then add more languages by clicking the appropriate check box next to the language Each language row has a pair of buttons used to change the order in which each language will play when the message is triggered The language at the top of the list will play first followed by each language activated Use the up down arrow buttons to move a language to a new location in the list Prerecorded Advanced Properties The following properties will only be visible atter selecting the Show All Fields button a7 TED Chapter 7 Action Types GLOBALCOM Blanking Zone
225. ller has an IP address of 10 2 128 10 then you would set the CobraNet card to 10 2 1128 11 There is one final critical step is required when configuring the Internal CobraNet Audio Device You must check to ensure that the card is not configured to auto assign CobraNet IP addresses Go to the Options menu and select Configure Network Interface and Auto IP Assignment Range as shown in Figure 6 12 FA ASIC ontral File Adapter isle Help Configure Adapter Interface ddress IP fade Configure Message Logging des Pad Configure Metwork Interface and Auto IP Assignment Range 05 FB 0C 1 21 Cobrahlet O0 02 C1 01 16 06 10 2 1 CobraMet 00 02 C 11 01 16 10 10 2 1 Figure 6 12 ASIControl Options Menu This will open the window shown in Figure 6 13 ASIControl choose network interface x Network Adapter Select the network adapter that is attached to your CobraNet network or device Realtek RTL8168D 8111D Family PCI E Gigabit Ethernet NIC NDIS 6 20 CobraNet IP Address Assignment Make sure that this CobraNet devices require an IP address For configuration 5 Enter the address range that you want to use For dynamic IP assignment for CobraNet devices box is NOT checked If the CobraNet devices on your network have static IP addresses assigned you may leave this feature off Enable dynamic CobraNet IP address assignment starting IP 10 I2 1128 an Ending IP 10 gi ie 128 100 Ald OK Figure 6 13 Disable Dyna
226. lues increase latency while smaller values may lead to disruptions in the real time audio The default value of 20msec is acceptable in most applications RTP Mode When checked the data packets will include RTP headers instead of raw data packets This setting must match the settings in the Annuncicom 100 setup Codec The codec selection determines the sample size number of bits and compression used for the audio data This setting must match the setting in the Annuncicom 100 setup 98 ill IED GLOBALCOM Chapter 6 Devices TEDPCMSW Ta PCMA G72 IEDPCM Figure 6 54 Annuncicom 100 Codec Types Available codecs are as follows e PCMU PCM u Law 8 bit samples e PCMA PCM a Law 8 bit samples e G 22 G 722 16 bit samples e EDPCM Raw PCM 16 bit samples e EDPCMSW Raw PCM 16 bit samples reversed byte order Sample Rate This number detines the number of samples per second used to digitize the audio This setting will affect packet size and the network bandwidth used by the audio data Typical values for each codec type are listed below This must match the setting in the Annuncicom 100 setup e PCMU or PCMA 8000 e G722 16000 e IEDPCM or IEDPCMSW 16000 or higher External Titan Zone This is a specialty device that is used when a Titan frame is used at a station in a transit application This type of system utilizes a centralized command center that sends messages down to a series of stations us
227. ly be muted when this action is executed Blanking zone groups are typically used to mute areas that are adjacent to where the announcement will be made to prevent other announcements messages or background music trom intertering with the delivery of an announcement Click the X icon to clear the selection trom the list Visual Take List This section is used to select the visual takes to display on any visual displays included in the assigned zone group By default these takes will be set to match any audible takes configured in the Audio Take List section For this type of action you will typically want the visual takes to match the audio takes Reter to the Prerecorded section for instructions on using the Take Browser to add takes to the list Match to Audible Takes This button will copy the current audio take list to the visual take list so the visual displays will show text that will match the audible message Pre Announce Tone Enter the take number to be played at the start of the action to alert individuals to the message or announcement being made Leave this field blank if you do not want to play a pre announce tone Visual Alert Select one of the pre defined visual alerts to display on any visual displays included in the assigned zone group Visual alerts are displayed after the completion of the visual message it detined and remain on the displays until cleared Visual alerts can also be used without any visual takes o
228. ly type in the numeric entry code in this field Typically you will select the action from the drop down list but you must use this field when the microphone station is launching actions that are not part of the local system This is the case when you are using the optional Flight Announcement System FAS that utilizes the IED Enterprise software suite with an external SQL database 228 Mic Passwords This section is used to contigure user access to microphone stations that have the Lock Enabled box checked in the microphone station setup x ID Name Company Template Phone Numbers Accept Phone Login Password Test HM IED Default Template amp x 1234 ix 2 Fire Department FD Fire Dept Security 9111 Figure 12 1 Mic Passwords Click this icon to add a new user to the list x Click this icon to delete the highlighted item from the list ID This is an index number used to identify the user It is system assigned and cannot be edited Name This is a text field used to describe the user It could be an individual name department or other entity Double click this field to edit the text Company This will associate the user with a specitic company Double click this tield to open a drop down list that is populated with the information in the User Groups tab Template Use this tield to assign a graphical template to a user This is how you will control what announcements a user can access trom a g
229. m is busy and the user must wait to make the announcement In the case of delayed or pre recorded messages the system will wait until all zones are available and then play the message Lower priority announcements and general informational messages typically allow for partial activation This allows scheduled messages to continue at their designated playback interval while allowing higher priority announcements and messages to continue as needed Partial Continuous This parameter determines what happens when an announcement ot higher priority or one with Pre empt All enabled takes over some of the zones of an active announcement When enabled the announcement will proceed with only the zones that are available When disabled the entire announcement will be terminated and the user will need to restart the announcement In the case of delayed and pre recorded messages the message will be killed and placed into a busy state It will play back trom the beginning once the zones are available Preempt All When enabled the announcement will always take priority over any other active announcements acquiring all needed resources such as zones and playback channels Atter the announcement has started its priority level is then used to determine what other announcements may have priority over it ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 8 Announcement Classes Preempt Kill When an announcement is overridden by one ot a higher priority this parameter
230. me to Wash 604 Welcome to Pitt 605 Welcome to Denv 606 Welcome to Will 607 Welcome to Buff 608 Welcome to Pied Individual take information 609 Welcome to Loui 610 Welcome to Vanc 611 Welcome to New 612 Welcome to Calg 613 Welcome to Edmo Figure 26 8 Take Management Save Take Info Click this button to save the changes you have made to the take Tile Take ID This is a read only index number for the take file This number corresponds to the number included in the filename of the take Short Description Enter a short description of the take in this tield This is the description that will be applied to the take in the take list Category Select a category tor the take trom the drop down list This will place the take in that category to ease searching when using the Take Editor to select takes tor messages It the category does not exist you can create a new one by entering a new category name in the box immediately below the drop down list Then click the icon to add the new category Languages Click this checkbox tor each language that has this take Note that you must physically have the correct take file placed in the correct language library with for it to work properly Length This is the length of each language take in 1 60th second intervals For example a take 2 seconds long would use a value of 120 This information is used along with the entry in the Visual
231. mergency messages such as a building evacuation You could grant such emergency messages to security and facility management personnel and even give login information to emergency personnel such as the fire and police departments Using templates without logins allows you to define what announcements and messages will be available at each station You could program a microphone station in the security office with access to launch specific security related messages and make general and emergency announcements You program other microphone stations where they can only make announcements and launch messages to local areas while blocking facility wide pages Using various combinations of templates with microphone station logins provides you with nearly limitless combinations You can configure the system where some microphone stations are locked and others are not This allows you to tailor the system to meet the needs of the facility by locations or by individual users Mic Template Editor When you first open the Mic Templates tab you will see a list of templates currently programmed for use as shown in Figure 11 3 Mic Templates 4 ID Description Button Width Lock Timeout Default Text Color Default Button Color Text Table Default Template 96 900 B B m 2 Security 96 900 ED H Figure 11 3 Mic Template Editor X These icons are used to add or delete templates from the list Click the icon to add a new templ
232. mic CobraNet IP Address Assignment 1100 1200 Message Server This device type is used to provide record and playback capacity tor prerecorded messages ITS messages and delayed announcements The 1200MSG version adds eight 8 logic inputs and eight 8 relays that can be used to launch messages or interface with external systems oe Ww TED Chapter 6 Devices GLOBALCOM MSG Group 1 Device 1 J 1100 1200 Message Server Description i MsG Group 1 Device 1 show Base Fields Location i Main Equipment Room IP Address J 10 81 33 101 Wer or Push Takes V Push All Takes TTS Enabled Type Description Location Actions Extra Info b 1200 Log MSG Group 1 Devit Actions 1 Mic 258 b Internal MSG Group 1 Devic v Figure 6 14 Message Server Device Properties Description Enter text here to give the device a descriptive name Location Enter text here to describe the physical location of the device IP Address Enter the IP address for the device Note This IP address will automatically be assigned to the two VolP interfaces and the 1200LIR device since they utilize the main network port on the unit The Internal CobraNet Audio Device uses its own network port thus will have a different IP address Make sure this IP address is contigured properly Push Takes It this box is checked the local controller will transfer new audio and visual takes to the message server a
233. microphone station or telephone intertace it enabled 230 Scheduled Actions Actions created here are played on a schedule rather than triggered trom a device Actions can be scheduled to play at periodic intervals throughout the day or only on specific days and during a programmed time window The most common type of action used on a schedule is a prerecorded message By using scheduled actions tor prerecorded messages the system can play various informational messages in a facility as determined by the management staff Scheduled Actions x Schedule Entry Foyer Welcome Message Parking Garage Safety i Entry Foyer Welcome Message Fd i Daily ie 1 3 9 izo am A 127 31 Oom OK Cancel Figure 13 1 Scheduled Actions Click this button to add a new action to the list New actions will automatically open the action definition window to configure the action as shown in Figure 13 2 This process of creating the action is identical to creating actions for devices Refer to the section on Action Types for details on configuring specific actions 231 Ww TED Chapter 13 Scheduled Actions GLOBALCOM Copy Action Type i Unused v Show All Fields Figure 13 2 Action Detinition Window x Click this button to delete the highlighted scheduled action trom the list Scheduled actions are highlighted by clicking on the name in the list Schedule When a scheduled acti
234. mines the amount of ambient noise level that will result in the output level to increase by 1dB A scaling constant of 1 will result in the output level increasing by 1dB for each 1dB increase in ambient sensor level Figure 6 82 shows a scaling constant of 1 4 With this setting a 1 4dB increase in ambient sensor level will result in a 1dB increase in output level up to the point where the Limit has been reached Gain Calc Calibration Constant Caution This value is calculated and automatically entered during the channel calibration process It can be manually adjusted by typing in a new value in the edit box This value should only be manually adjusted after an automatic cal ibration has not been completely successtul Adjustments should be made in very small increments of 2 or 3 dB at a time Use the following guidelines when adjusting the calibration constant if the system is not properly responding atter an automatic calibration e tthe system turns down as soon as an announcement is active then the calibration constant is too high It should be reduced in small increments until the system remains stable while an announcement is active e fthe system gets louder as while an announcement is active then the calibration constant is too low It should be increased in small increments until the system remains stable while an announcement is active ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 6 Devices Filter Attack This value det
235. n Figure 5 6 of the My System section For the 1 1OOMSG and 1200MSG devices it is configured trom the individual device configuration page as shown in the 1100 1200 Message Server This device is responsible tor playing back all prerecorded messages delayed announcements and text to speech TTS messages over the network using CobraNet It is also responsible for recording the audio used for delayed announcements Message Server Sound Card r Internal CobraNet Audio Device B Description i Message Server Sound Card Show Base Fields Location i IP Address j 10 2 128 162 Transmitters ID Bundle Number Type Number of Channels 1965 RemoteOrLocal 2 2 1966 LocalOnly 2 3 1967 LocalOnly 2 4 1968 LocalOnly 2 Receivers ID Bundle Type Number of Channels 1 0 RemoteOrLocal 1 2 0 RemoteOrLocal 1 3 0 RemoteOrLocal 1 0 RemoteOrLocal 1 E 0 RemoteOrLocal 1 6 0 RemoteOrLocal 1 7 0 RemoteOrLocal 1 8 0 RemoteOrLocal 1 Figure 6 6 Internal CobraNet Audio Device Properties Description Enter text here to give the device a descriptive name Location Enter text here to describe the physical location of the device IP Address Enter the IP address for the device It will usually be 1 digit higher than the IP address of the unit that contains the device Note This address field only informs the System Management Center and the vACS of the address of the device You MUST contigure the actua
236. n be used as sources to launch actions audio inputs available tor routing logic outputs to control other pieces of hardware or used as a destination for an announcement or message Devices Fox Filter Type IP Description Location Actions Extra Info 4 Mic Stations 2 items MS528 Graphical P 10 2 128 172 Ticketing Counter Ticketing Counter Station Actions 2 Mic 8 Template Default Template MS528 Graphical P 10 2 128 173 Security Security Actions 2 Mic 9 Template Default Template 4 Amplifiers 1 item Frame 1 16384 16 Zones Start Zone 9 BGM SOURCE 1 T9160 Digital Ampl 10 2 128 171 Titan 1 channels Figure 6 1 Devices The specitic details on contiguring a device vary signiticantly with each type of device They are broken down and grouped into tive 5 basic categories that share similar functions and properties e Aux I O Devices e Displays e Controllers Mic Stations Amplifiers Click this icon to add a new device to the system A new window will appear as shown in Figure 6 2 Select the device and click the OK button to continue Clicking the Cancel button will close the window without adding a new device 49 i TED Chapter 6 Devices GLOBALCOM 50 OO Device Types Controllers Aux I O Devices Internal CobraNet Audio Device Titan 9032LV10 Logic Voltage I O _ 1100 1200 Message Server _ Barionet50 Remote Logic Relay 1 0 _ External 8000 Device Q 1200 Logic Input Rela
237. n for the announcement Zones are entered either by directly typing them into the entry box i e 1 2 3 7 18 or by opening the Zone Selector by clicking the button immediately to the right of the entry box Click on an individual zone to add or remove it trom the action To add a range of zones in the same device select the first zone and then the last zone in the range while holding down the SHIFT key 195 ill TED Chapter 7 Action Types GLOBALCOM 196 Zone Group A zone group is assigned to the action by selecting one of the previously defined zone groups trom the drop down list Multiple zone groups can be assigned to an action by clicking the icon to add more fields each with its own drop down selection list Click the X icon to remove a zone group tield Once detined the announcement will play cumulatively to all zones included in the selected zone groups Use Prompt This feature requires a graphical paging station such as the IEDA528 series microphone station When checked this action will prompt the station user for either the zone code or zone group code for the action This gives the operator flexibility to choose the announcement or message destination at the time of launch This requires the microphone station operator to know a valid Zone ID or Zone Group that is available for use Prerecorded messages allow for repeats to be detined as part of the message by using the following three fields Play Count A message
238. n the operating system does not provide any addressing information because the network service is not operating Once you have resolved the network issue you will need to close and reopen the SMC to get the correct information Login Logout Button The text on this button will change based on the current login status If you are logged in it will display Logout and you can click it to log out of the system It no one is logged in it will display Login Click it and you will be prompted to enter a username and password to log into the system ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 1 Introduction When a user is logged in the name of that account will appear immediately to the lett of the Login Logout button It will be blank if no user is currently logged in Configuration Options Tabs The SMC is divided into three basic sections that are reterred to as tabs in this documentation Access to each tab is based on permissions assigned to each individual user account and they are categorized based on system usage and increasing degree of complexity Click on the buttons to take you to the different tabs The content available in the Configuration Options section of the application window will change to reflect the options available within that tab e Overview See Overview Tab on page 11 e Configuration See Configuration on page 33 e Admin See Admin on page 261 System Name and Link Status This text will display
239. ncement is made with an announce class that has the Emergency tlag set This allows you to increase the level of the output for emergency announcements The default value is 6dB If you use this setting with an Overall setting of 20dB then an emergency announcement will be played using an output level that is 6dB louder than normal announcements Night This field defines an offset to the Overall level to use when the night schedule is invoked as programmed in the Day Night Schedule section of the Configuration tab This allows you to decrease the level of the output based on the time of day tor each day of the week The default value is OdB and is set by entering a value to turn the output down For example if you enter a value of 6 then the channel level will be turned down by 6dB when the Night schedule is placed in effect e BGM This field sets the BGM level for the zone This number represents the amount of attenuation relative to OdBFS So a value of 30 will attenuate the level by 30dB To reduce the level by an additional 10dB you would enter a value of 40 e Duck This field controls how much the level of BGM will be reduced when an announcement is made to the zone A value of 10 will reduce the BGM level by 10dB when an announcement is made A value of 60 will ettectively mute the BGM level when an announcement is made Delay Each output on the T9116 has signal delay that can be used tor loudspeaker alignmen
240. ncements and BGM This number represents the amount of attenuation relative to OdBFS So a value of 30 will attenuate the level by 30dB To reduce the level by an additional 10dB you would enter a value of 40 e Emg This field defines an offset to the Overall level to use when an announcement is made with an announce class that has the Emergency tlag set This allows you to increase the level of the output for emergency announcements The default value is 6dB If you use this setting with an Overall setting of 20dB then an emergency announcement will be played using an output level that is 6dB louder than normal announcements Night This field defines an offset to the Overall level to use when the night schedule is invoked as programmed in the Day Night Schedule section of the Configuration tab This allows you to decrease the level of the output based on the time of day tor each day of the week The default value is OdB and is set by entering a value to turn the output down For example if you enter a value of 6 then the channel level will be turned down by 6dB when the Night schedule is placed in effect e BGM This field sets the BGM level for the zone This number represents the amount of attenuation relative to OdBFS So a value of 30 will attenuate the level by 30dB To reduce the level by an additional 10dB you would enter a value of 40 e Duck This field controls how much the level of BGM will be reduced
241. ncements gt lt announcement id 1 gt lt Desc value Emergency gt lt Priority value 2 gt lt ReadyTime value 5 gt lt WarnTime value 0 gt lt MaxTime value 0 gt lt PartialAct value True gt lt PartialCont value True gt lt Preemptall value False gt lt Preemptkill yalue False gt lt RecoverZones value True gt lt RequirePTT value False gt lt Duck value False gt lt MuteFlag value 7 gt lt announcement gt lt announcement id 2 gt lt Desc yalue High Priority gt lt Priority value 4 gt lt ReadyTime value 5 gt lt WarnTime value 5 gt lt MaxTime value 120 gt Figure 21 2 Internet Explorer Backup File View At this point you can close the backup file window if you are only creating a local backup copy If you wish to save the backup tile to another location you can do so by saving the file from the browser window menu bar Figure 21 3 shows the File menu in Internet Explorer where you would select the Save As option to save the file https localhost bak 2012_5 3 13 tr 4 B hitp localhost b pe Edit iew Favorites To Mew Tab Ctrl T Duplicate Tab Ctrl k New Window Ctrl h Mew Session Oper Ctrl 0 Close an Ctrl i Figure 21 3 Internet Explorer File Menu This will prompt you to select a tile location with a dialog window as shown in Figure 21 4 It you are accessing the System Management Center trom anot
242. nd Receivers Chapter 6 Devices The CobraNet transmitters and receivers are automatically set by the system and the defaults are sufficient for most applications The ability to override the defaults is provided here if it is required Transmitters o o o 0 o 0 o 0 o 0 Type Number of Channels LocalOnly 1 LocalOnly 1 Type Number of Channels LocalOnly 1 LocalOnly 1 LocalOnly 1 LocalOnly 1 LocalOnly 1 LocalOnly 1 LocalOnly 1 LocalOnly 1 LocalOnly 1 LocalOnly 1 LocalOnly 1 Figure 6 71 T9160 CobraNet Transmitters and Receivers OK Cancel Click the OK button to save any changes you made on this window It will appear dimmed it there are no changes to save Changes made to the EQ Monitor Test of Ambient settings are saved when you close their respective windows This OK button may appear grayed out even if you have made changes in those sub systems Click the CANCEL button to discard any changes you have made to this screen This will not undo any changes made to the EQ Monitor Test or Ambient sub systems 125 Ww TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 6 Devices y T9116 Zone Output Device T9116 Zone Output Processor 1 T9116 Zone Output Device Apply Configuration Now Description i T9116 Zone Output Processor 1 Show Base Fields Location i Equipment Room E3174 IP Address i 10 2 128 178 Dev Handle 16408 Frame Number i 4 Start Zone Li 49
243. nd typing in a new value 24 Cha 242 pter 14 Events Extra Info ill TED GLOBALCOM This column contains a text string that summarizes the main contiguration properties of the action In the case of prerecorded actions it displays the take numbers included in the message along with a flag indicating audible visual or both delivery types Extra Info AC Emergency Pri 2 Play Count 10 Repeat Interval 15 Takes 40152 7084 ZoneGroup Count 1 AV Both Event Schedule Figure 14 5 Extra Into The event schedule shows a time line for the event It will show you at what point each action will be launched atter the event has been launched Figure 14 6 shows the event schedule for the actions that are shown in Figure 14 4 You can see that the Fire Evac Building 11 action will play every 15 seconds for a total of 10 plays It also shows the zone group for the action The In Place Alarm Building 12 action will start one 1 minute after the initial action launch and repeat at one 1 minute intervals Event Schedule 00 00 00 Oo 00 OO 00 OO O00 00 00 OO 00 00 00 oo oo og og O1 O1 O1 O1 O1 O2 O2 O2 O3 OO 15 30 45 00 In Place Alarm Building 12 7G 104 15 30 45 OO In Place Alarm Building 12 7G 104 15 00 00 00 04 00 05 Fire Evac Building 11 ZG 105 Fire Evac Building 11 2G 105
244. ne group is selected with the mouse it will appear highlighted in the list and the zone editor window for that group will be displayed below the list as shown in Figure 9 2 Use the check box tor each zone to determine it it will be included in the zone group Available zones are grouped according to the device that contains the zones Each group contains a Select All and Clear All button to quickly select or clear all available zones within that device Clicking on the X icon will delete the currently selected zone group 213 ill TED Chapter 9 Zone Groups GLOBALCOM x ID Description Zone Count Remote ZoneGroups 7 100 All Call Frame 1 25 0 101 Ticketing 5 0 102 Security 2 0 103 Building 12 All Call 2 0 104 Building 11 All Call 2 0 s IED GLOBALCOM System LIR Titan 1 T9040NLR DNA7800 Amplifier Frame 1 Select All Clear All SelectAll Clear All Select All Clear All Select All Clear All Relay Zone 1 Ticketing 1A _ Curbside 5A Relay Zone 41 J Building 12 __ Relay Zone 2 Ticketing 1B _ Concourse 5B CJ Relay Zone 42 J Building 12 Relay Zone 3 Ticketing 2A _ Concourse 6A Relay Zone 43 __ Building 11 Relay Zone 4 Ticketing 2B _ Concourse 6B C Relay Zone 44 C Building 11 __ Relay Zone 5 Ticketing 3A _ Concourse 7A CJ Relay Zone 45 __ Relay Zone 6 I Security 3B Corridors 7B __ Relay Zone 46 __ Relay Zone 7 CJ Security 4A _ Corrido
245. necessarily need to be running the System Management Center application on the local controller in order to perform the update You can update the system from any computer that is able to connect to the controller through the network Software Update The Software Update utility will allow the vACS Software to be Update Software updated Click the Update Software button to begin the update process Figure 20 1 Sottware Update Click the Update Software button to open the file selection dialog window as shown in Figure 20 2 x as nm v Removable Disk E updates v Search updates 2 Organize New folder v fil sk Favorites Name Date modified Type msg_1_0_0 gcz 4 5 2012 10 15 AM GCZ File Libraries _ Regurgitator_1_0_3 gcz 4 5 2012 11 19AM GCZ File Documents L SMC_20120403 gcz 4 6 2012 10 40 AM GCZ File a Music vacs_1_2_0 gcz 4 5 2012 4 05 PM GCZ File lua Pictures 4 4 2012 4 18PM GCZ File F Videos jE Computer By SYSTEM C co LIBRARY D a Removable Disk E hi Network File name vacsdevicediscovery114gcz gt GlobalCOM Update File gt Cancel 4 Figure 20 2 Open Update Package Navigate to the appropriate directory and highlight an update package Click the OK button to begin the update process The system will stop the necessary services install the new tiles and then start the new services This may take a few minutes for larger updates and you will see
246. ng to an HTML page or a media file e Format Enter HTML to identity this message as an HTML page Enter FILE if the link points to a media tile Valid media tile types are mpg mpeg wmv avi mov mp4 jog joeg git bmp ong and swt e Count This is the number of times this message will play before moving on to the next message in the list e Priority This field is currently not implemented 7o ill TED Chapter 6 Devices GLOBALCOM 74 e Hold Time This is the amount of time that this message will stay on the screen before moving on to the next message This value is in 60 S of a second A value of 300 will hold the image on the display tor 5 seconds e Refresh This is the interval in seconds between refreshes of the HTML page This property has no tunction when the Format is set to FILE Visual Alerts Visual Alerts are detined as described in the Visual Alerts and Wayfinding section There you will create individual alerts and upload the images that will be available tor use in each alert You will see a list of the available alerts in this tield Select an image tor each alert trom the drop down list Click the X icon to clear an image selection Owner Device A Display device must be associated with an owner Display Zone Controller device You can either add a new display trom the Devices list or from within the configuration window of an individual Display Zone Controller If you add a new Disp
247. nly saves the printable report It does not save the data to be used as a backup file To store a tile backup that can be restored you must use the Backup Restore feature located in the Admin section of the software E E WWiewPrint htm Windows Internet Explorer le E WiewPrint htm si Edit View Favorites Tools New Tab Ctrl T Duplicate Tab Ctrl K New Window Ctrl M New Session Open Ctrl 0 oooO OOOO K K K KKK KKK Edit with Notepad KOK KOK KOKK KK KK KK KK OK OK KK KKK KK K Close Tab Ctrl W ee Oef al rfoooo Page Setup BGMChaneljs Print Ctrl P Print Preview Emergency Bundle Kill Ufeline False Send i Import and Export ae Work Offline Exit Figure 19 3 Windows Explorer File Menu Section 3 Admin SOUWE AE eS E E REE E EEA EEO 263 Backup Restore ssc cs wot oes nn ae E E EUAS 265 PTET lt GONMO cisrenan e a a EEEE aea 269 SE e a E E S 271 PDRP Lang dge s sodioa aa inns see tere hous Le es 275 SOP TOT cue ace onanesquassecedascinee E E N 2 7 Depoo UUE Sessenta g Beko es nck gent dS thoes hoa caauneee ard 279 261 oeafac l E D Admin GLOBALCOM This page has been intentionally left blank 262 software Update You must be logged in as a user with Advanced permissions in order to update the system software You access the Software Update screen shown in Figure 20 1 from the Admin tab of the System Management Center application You do not
248. nnel Note Sensor inputs on collector units are sub divided into groups of eight 8 All sensors for a single channel must reside on the same collector unit group If a sensor is currently selected tor a channel then all other groups will be grayed out and not available tor selection To change to a sensor that is not located in the currently selected group tirst un check all sensor assignments then any sensor group will be available for selection Calibration Take Enter the take number that you wish to play during the calibration if you wish to use something other than the detault of 7770 Calibrate Press this button to start the calibration process A calibration message will be played to the channel output Caution The ambient noise level in the area being calibrated needs to be at least 15dB below the sensor threshold level setting during calibration in order to yield a valid calibration Test The Test button will play the calibration take to the selected channel This is used atter the calibration process is complete to see if the system correctly differentiates between program and ambient noise When the test take is playing and the calibration has been successtul the level should not change It the system turns up or down during the test playback then either the either the calibration constant should be adjusted or a re calibration should be attempted ill TED GLOBALCOM CobraNet Transmitters a
249. nslate the Software You shall not remove any copyright notice or other proprietary or restrictive notice or legend contained or included in or on any Software or other material provided by IED and You shall reproduce copy and include all such information on all copies made including such copies for archival or backup purposes You shall use Your best efforts to assist IED in iden tifying any use copying or disclosure of any portion of the Software by any of Your present or former personnel contrary to the terms of this License Termination You may terminate this License at any time by returning the Software and all copies and extracts thereof to IED You are not entitled to a refund upon Your termination In addition to other available remedies IED may at its option terminate this License if You fail to pay any fees due or fail to carry out any other obligation under this License Upon IED s termination of this License You are required to return or destroy and certify destruction as requested by IED all copies of the Software in Your possession whether modified or unmoditied Upon termination all accrued fees shall he immediately due and pay able Law Scope of Agreement This License shall be governed by the laws of the Commonwealth of Kentucky as it applies to contract made and performed in such state without giving effect to conflict of law rules You consent to jurisdiction and venue in the Commonwealth of Kentucky the courts in Jefferson C
250. ntil cleared Visual alerts can also be used without any visual takes or sign text Use the Clear Alert item if this action is used to end the alert Sign Text Type in the text to be shown on any visual displays included in the assigned zone group Sign text can be used as an alternative to visual takes to define a visual message to accompany a live message 191 ill TED Chapter 7 Action Types GLOBALCOM 192 MuteAll This action type is used to mute the entire system The action is given an Announcement Class that determines what if any other actions can override the mute For example if a mute action is given a medium priority priority 6 announcement class then any actions with high priority 4 or emergency priority 2 announcement class will override the mute and be allowed to go active This example outlines a case where perhaps background music and general low priority announcements are blocked due to a special event High priority and emergency announcements will still be allowed Copy Action Type i MuteAll Show All Fields Description Mute System gt Emergency Pri 2 kd Figure 7 36 Action Types MuteAll Figure 7 36 shows the most common use of the MuteAll action type By using an Emergency priority 2 announcement class all other announcement functions will be blocked This example is common when the system must be muted entirely while the fire alarm system takes over the di
251. number of channels that will be received trom the transmitting device here It you are not using all eight 8 channels defined in the of Channels field you should change this number to match the number of channels actually being used SIP Telephone Interface This internal software device is used to provide VoIP telephone interface lines tor the 1 1 OOACS 32 1 200ACS 32 1 1OO0MSG and 1200MSG devices It is capable of providing up to two 2 152 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 6 Devices lines that will prompt the user to select the actions that they wish to pertorm by using pre detined action templates It can also support up to 8 direct action extensions that will immediately execute the pre defined action when the line answers System 1 vACSTel SIP Telephone Interface OY Apply Configuration Now Description i System 1 vACSTel Show Base Fields Location i IP Address i 10 2 128 161 SIP Server IP 10 2 128 1 SIP Server Port 5061 DTMF Payload Number 105 DTMF Type RFC2833 z Prompting Extensions Ext SIP User SIP Password SIP Port RTP Port Template 1601 12345 5075 40026 Default Telephone Template 1602 1602 12345 5076 40028 Default Telephone Template Direct Action Extensions Ext SIP User SIP Password SIP Port RTP Port Action Performed Locked 1603 1603 12345 5067 40010 5 1604 1604 12345 5068 40012 1605 1605 12345 5069 40014 5070 40016 5071 40018 st
252. o use display zone numbers that match audio zone numbers This is useful when you have displays that match up with audio zones and you always want to include the visual display in any actions that include the corresponding audio zone For example if you have an audio zone 10 and a display zone 10 you only need to select zone 10 in the zone group and both the display and audio zone will be used Non lIED DDC Check this box when this Display Zone Controller will be used to broadcast visual paging data to a non lED system This will cause the visual paging text to be sent without the formatting and queuing tags used by the IED VisDID Visual Display application Zones This list allows you to contigure associate each sign in the group with a logical name This is the number that will be used to identify this sign in the system This number is calculated based on the values in the Start Sign and Total Signs fields Each sign will appear as an individual zone Description Double click on this field to edit a text descriptor for the display Devices This list is used to add individual displays to the Display Zone Controller Refer to the Display device section of the help for information on configuring each device Click this icon to add a new Display device to the Display Zone Controller A new window will appear as shown in Figure 6 28 in the Display section of this documentation F Click this icon to edit the properties tor t
253. ogrammed for the event Figure 14 4 shows an event with two emergency prerecorded messages to be played to two different areas zone groups Note When actions are used as part of a event the Entry Code field will be set to 1 by default This is correct for embedded actions and you must not edit this field Actions fs 4 gt ID Type Description Announcement Class Start Delay Play Count Play Interval Extra Info AC Emergency Pri 2 Play Count rane n 10 Repeat Interval 15 Takes 62 Prerecorded Fire Evac Building 11 Emergency Pri 2 0 10 15 49152 7084 ZoneGroup Count 1 AV Both AC Emergency Pri 2 Play Count 5 Repeat Interval 1 Takes 49152 7046 ZoneGroup Count 1 AV Both 63 Prerecorded In Place Alarm Building 12 Emergency Pri 2 60 1 Figure 14 4 Actions List 240 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 14 Events ID This is a unique action identification number used by the system to store the action This is assigned by the system and cannot be edited Clicking on the column header will sort the column using the ID number Clicking will toggle between high to low and low to high sorts Type This displays the action type that has been selected for the action You must open the action definition window to edit this property Description This displays the description for the action You must open the action definition window to edit this property Announcement Class This displays
254. om neighboring zones and then listen to the individual speakers 277 ill TED GLOBALCOM This page has been intentionally left blank VolP User Interface This appendix will describe how a user will operate the VoIP telephone interface when dialing into the system on a prompting extension trom a VolP telephone system If the extension is configured to be locked then you will be prompted with the message of Enter password when the line is answered You then enter your tour 4 digit password as configured in Mic Passwords You will then hear the following welcome message and the three available options IED GLOBALCOM Telephone Interface For zone page press 1 For zone group page press 2 To initiate an event press 3 Note If the extension is not configured as locked you will not be prompted to enter your password and will be directly prompted for the available options when the line is answered Option 1 This option is used for to initiate a delayed page to an individual zone 1 Press 1 and you will hear Enter zone 2 Enter the zone number If you wait two seconds before the next entry it will assume you are finished with the entry and attempt to use the number you have entered You can also use the button to indicate you are finished 3 Ifyou entered an invalid number then you will hear the prompt Invalid entry and will need to attempt to enter the correct one again 4 Ifthe code is acce
255. ome more critical in systems that utilize the optional Flight Announcement System FAS or other automated systems In the case of the FAS members of one group cannot launch flight messages that belong to a different user group F Click this icon to add a new user group to the list It will add a new row to the list as shown in Figure 10 4 You can then type in an abbreviation and a name in the appropriate fields 1 UA United Airlines US Airways Southwest Must provide a Name Figure 10 4 Add a new user group 218 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 10 User Groups X Click this icon to delete the highlighted item from the list ID This is a system assigned index number for the user group This field cannot be edited Abbreviation This field is used to display an abbreviation of the user group or company name Double click on this field to edit the text Name This is a text field for the name of the group or company Double click on this field to edit the text 219 ill TED GLOBALCOM This page has been intentionally left blank Mic Templates Templates are used to create buttons on graphical paging stations such as the 528 series of microphone stations You begin by detining a template based on the tunctional needs such as information center security tire department ticket agent etc Once a template has been created you then have two methods for deploying its use For microphone stations that
256. on is selected in the list it displays the Schedule window to the right of the list This window provides access to the schedule and action contiguration options OK After an edit to the scheduled action has been made click the OK button to save the changes and move to a different action This will not apply the changes to the system That must be done using the Save All Changes icon betore moving to another tab Cancel Select Cancel to discard the edits Action This field displays the description of the action as entered in the description field of the action definition window Click the small yellow icon on the right Figure 13 3 to open the action definition window to edit the action parameters Refer to the section on Action Types for details on configuring specific actions Edit Action Icon Figure 13 3 Edit Action Icon 232 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 13 Scheduled Actions Note When actions are used as part of a scheduled action the Entry Code field will be set to 1 by default This is correct tor embedded actions and you must not edit this field Description Use this text field to enter a basic description of the scheduled action This is the text that will be used to identify the action in the scheduled actions list Enabled When this box is checked the action will play based on the programmed schedule When not checked the action will not play This allows actions to be turned on or off without
257. on the same network as long as it has a compatible browser application installed Since the application is hosted as a web page on the device you simply need to know the IP address of that device in order to access it from your web browser Enter the IP address in the address bar of the browser and you can launch the application On many systems a shortcut will be provided on the desktop Figure 1 1 shows the SMC main window ED System Management Center J Oar Netmask 255 0 0 0 MAC Address E069954F7693 System Version 1 0 4570 19814 Header GLOBAL System 1 Overview Configuration Admin Welcome Admin User logout Announcement Activity Mic amp Zone Status Current Faults My Devices Available Devices Configuration Options Status Bar urrent Zones 20 Current Frames 1 SMS True Licensed 32 Licensed Unlimited System Mode vACS Figure 1 1 System Management Center The SMC interface is divided into three different sections The Header and Status Bar provide various status information and overall system interface options The Configuration Options section of the intertace will change as needed based on the system parameters that you are editing Header This section of the SMC interface contains various status intormation as well as general system commands accessible using icons or buttons as shown in Figure 1 2 ill TED Chapter 1 Introduction GLOBALCOM CoN wal Syvctam Management Cantor
258. onstant dBspl E Figure 6 82 Ambient Analysis Attenuation Mode Each channel can be set to one of three different possible attenuation modes as described below e Fixed This mode deactivates the ambient noise compensation for this channel The channel output level will remain at the level set by the Overall attenuator e Automatic This mode will allow the level of the channel to automatically adjust based on the ambient noise level as detected by the ambient sensor input The level will increase above the Overall attenuator setting as higher ambient noise levels are detected by the ambient noise sensor The level will increase by an amount proportional to the detected level as determined by the Scaling Constant The maximum level increase is determined by the Limit slider e Slave This mode will cause the selected channel to follow the ambient noise compensation settings of another channel Using this setting allows multiple outputs on the same DNA amplifier frame to be adjusted by a single sensor or a pair of sensors This setting is useful in very large spaces where multiple amplifier channels are required due to the power load requirements of the loudspeaker lines Select the channel that this channel will be slaved to from the drop down list Note A channel can only be slaved to a channel that is located in the same DNA amplifier mainframe Program This level meter displays the real time audio signal level
259. op actively adjusting the output attenuation and return to the maximum attenuation setting which is the base level setting as detined by the Overall attenuation control 121 Ww TED Chapter 6 Devices GLOBALCOM The threshold is set by adjusting the slider with the mouse or by manually typing a value in the edit box below the slider using a positive numerical value Gain Calc Scaling Constant The Scaling Constant determines the amount of ambient noise level that will result in the output level to increase by 1dB A scaling constant of 1 will result in the output level increasing by 1dB for each 1dB increase in ambient sensor level Figure 6 69 shows a scaling constant of 1 4 With this setting a 1 4dB increase in ambient sensor level will result in a 1dB increase in output level up to the point where the Limit has been reached Gain Calc Calibration Constant This value is calculated and automatically entered during the channel calibration process It can be manually adjusted by typing in a new value in the edit box Caution This value should only be manually adjusted after an automatic cal ibration has not been completely successtul Adjustments should be made in very small increments of 2 or 3 dB at a time Use the following guidelines when adjusting the calibration constant if the system is not properly responding after an automatic calibration e fthe system turns down as soon as an announcement is active t
260. op down list box displays all the available sources in the system Select the appropriate input source that will be routed as a result of this action Copy Action Medium Priority Prise es MS530 1 MS530 2 6 6 6 6 Ticketing Counter Security LIR 257 Fire Panel Audio Input Mic 25 Fire Panel Audio Input Mic R Titan Frame Input 1 Figure 7 24 Alternate Source Selection The destination for the announcement is determined by the Zone ID or Zone Group fields These parameters are mutually exclusive thus only one zone destination method may be used Zone Group A zone group is assigned to the action by selecting one of the previously defined zone groups from the drop down list Multiple zone groups can be assigned to an action by clicking the icon to add more fields each with its own drop down selection list Click the X icon to remove a zone group field Once defined the announcement will play cumulatively to all zones included in the selected zone groups Copy Action Type W Description New Action Entry Code range i i Fire Panel Audio Inpu v iar ie Ticketing 102 z Figure 7 25 LiveFromAlternateSource Zone Group Selection Zone ID The Zone ID field specifies one 1 or more system zones as the destination for the announcement Zones are entered either by directly typing them into the entry box i e 1 2 3 7 18 or by opening the Zone Selector by clicking the button imme
261. ophone station Templates are detined in theMic Templates tab of the software This template will be used only when the Lock Enabled box is not checked When that box is checked the template used is determined by the one assigned to the user in the Mic Passwords tab If no template is selected here the station will use the one specitied in the Default Template tield in the My System tab You can clear the selection in this field by clicking on the X icon to the right of the field Mic Local Each microphone station can have up to four 4 Mic Local zone groups assigned Mic Local zone groups are a method of consistently assigning actions that have destinations that are relative to the location of the microphone station Let s say you always want the push to talk PTT button on the microphone station to do a live page to the same zone where the microphone station is physically located You would create a single action that has an entry code of 0 0 is for the PTT or ANNC buttons with a zone group destination of Mic Local 1 You would then assign the Mic Local 1 field in the microphone station setup to correspond to a zone group programmed with the zone s local to that station Each station can have a different zone group assigned to the Mic Local 1 field Since the action references that field as the destination it will always go to the local zone group This logic can apply to all of the available Mic Local zone group assignments Mic Local
262. or clear the tault Device Select the device that will be reporting this fault as shown in Figure 18 5 In this example we are using a logic input on a 200LIR to detect and report the fault 227 System 1 VoIP Interface 1 228 System 1 VoIP Interface 2 229 Ticketing Counter 230 Security 231 test System 1 LIR X Titan 1 pe Fault Numb System 1 Sound Card System 1 LIR Figure 18 5 Device Selection Windows System Log The controller writes the system faults to the ED Fault Log which is stored created using the built in system logging tools available in Windows To get to the log you must first open the Windows Event Viewer which may be available as a shortcut icon on the desktop as shown in Figure 18 6 T fs pa i EEI z ie E X Windows stem Log Figure 18 6 Windows System Log Icon If you do not have this icon on your desktop go to the Windows START menu and open the Control Panel In the Control Panel window locate the Administrative Tools as shown in Figure 18 7 254 wil TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 18 System Supervision Administrative Tools Kea Administrative Tools Figure 18 7 Control Panel Next locate the Event Viewer icon in the Administrative Tools window as shown in Figure 18 8 Data Sources ODBC f Event Viewer Data Sources ODBC atl Event Viewer Ep Internet Information Services MS 6 0 Ma Internet Information Services
263. ou add the device the system will automatically assign the next available frame number Mic Number This is the number used to identity the device as an input device within the announcement controller It must be a unique number within the local announcement controller This number is automatically assigned when you add the device but can be edited if necessary Start Relay Zone This is the zone number that represents the first relay zone on the device The system will automatically use the next available zone number as the starting zone number when you add a new device It can be edited here it needed Total Relays This number represents the total number of relay zones that will be present on this device Each output is numbered sequentially based on the start zone entered in the Start Relay Zone field The TVO40NLR can have a total of 8 relay zones defined Fewer can be defined it necessary Zones Match To First This button has no function for this device Zone Number This is the zone number that will be associated with this relay output This is calculated based on the values entered in the Start Relay Zone and Total Relays fields 8 ill TED Chapter 6 Devices GLOBALCOM Description This is a text tield used to describe the output function or connection To edit double click on the field Triggers It a relay zone is used as part of a zone map in an announcement then the relay will energize tor
264. ou to the vACS First Run Setup Wizard page as shown in Figure 5 4 From here you can define initial usernames and passwords for the three levels of access More users can be added later from the Admin tab Refer to the vACS First Run Setup Wizard documentation for additional information 37 Ww TED Chapter 5 My System GLOBALCOM IP Address 10 2 128 161 System Management Center netmask R s MAC Address E069954F7693 GLOBAL System Jl System Version 1 0 4444 16140 vACS First Run Setup Wizard Please define the three levels of users present in the system Each class of user has different permissions with Admin being the highest level then Installers then Users Detailed system definition follows installer installer user user Save Users amp Discover Devices Current Zones 16 Current Frames 1 SMS False VOIP False Licensed 32 Licensed Unlimited System Mode vACS Figure 5 4 User Definition My Controller This represents the local controller to which you are currently connected To edit the local controller options select it under the My Controller list The right section of the window will change to list the current contiguration of the local controller Any time you make changes to the local controller you must click either the OK or CANCEL buttons betore attempting to select anything else 38 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 5 My System aT hi My System My
265. ounty Ken tucky and the U S District Court for the Western District of Kentucky in any proceeding arising out of or relating to this License or Your use of the Software If any term of this License is declared void or unenforceable by any court such declaration shall have no effect on the remaining terms hereof No modification of this License shall be binding on IED unless expressly accepted in writing by IED This License is the entire agreement concerning the Software between You and IED and it supersedes any prior representation or understanding i ill TED GLOBALCOM End User License Agreement This page has been intentionally left blank Section 1 Getting Started IVT OCU CHIN ARANEA reese ANA AA EN A EAE 3 EI A E e AANEEN E E E T AE 1 PI CONSIAG a dnletieaceuamnentbaceeeuawuceesbadete 23 First Run Setup Wizard 2 2 20 c0cecceccecccceececceceeceeeeceececeeeeeeeeees 27 ill TED GLOBALCOM Getting Started This page has been intentionally left blank Introduction The System Management Center SMC is a browser based configuration and control application used to manage GLOBALCOM systems The SMC is hosted on the hardware for the 1 1OOACS 1200ACS 1100MSG 1200MSG and 1100TEL When used as part of a server based vACS it is hosted on the server that is also hosting the vACS application Because it is browser based all functions and features available within the SMC can be accessed trom any computer
266. ow that the T9160 zones are configured to adjust the levels of the BGM signal you must configure the 1502Al as a BGM input device See 1502 as BGM source on page 96 for details on configuring this device Once complete you will be able to select the 1502 as a BGM Device on the Titan amplifier frames DNA amplifier frames or 1502AO output modules The next images shows a 1502Al named Audio Inbox selected as a BGM device in the Titan frame You can then select either channel for each output zone on the device BEGM a Ci Audio Inbox S Figure D 4 BGM Device Selection 305 ill TED GLOBALCOM This page has been intentionally left blank Wil TED Innovative Electronic Designs Innovative Electronic Designs LLC 9701 Taylorsville Road Louisville KY 40299 United States of America www iedaudio com Wel G Communications Group
267. pany a live message LiveFromAlternateSource When a live action is triggered from a microphone station the audio input source for the announcement is the microphone station The LiveFromAlternateSource action type is used to activate an announcement using an audio source ditterent trom the activating device For example you may have a tire alarm system where the audio must be routed to a zone group when a dry contact closure is tripped When the system senses the closure it must route the audio input associated with the fire alarm system Closures are detected using devices that are not directly associated with an audio input therefore they must be defined using a LiveFromAlternateSource action type if they are to route any audio signals In such cases the source will be the logic device and the Alternate Source will be the audio input Copy Action Type i LiveFromAlternateSor v Show All Fields Description New Action Entry Code range i 15 gt Announcement Class i Medium Priority Pri v aerate soure O O o gt JD ID i Figure 7 23 LiveFromAlternateSource Action Type Announcement Class Select the appropriate announcement class for the action The announcement class determines the announcement priority relative to other announcements as well as various other behaviors as detined tor each announcement class 180 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 7 Action Types Alternate Source This dr
268. pted you will hear a chime and the announcement will go live Make the announcement and then hang up when complete 5 Itthere is an error or the zone is not available you will hear Cannot start announce ment goodbye and the line will hang up Option 2 This option is used to initiate a delayed page to a zone group 1 Press 2 and you will hear Enter zone group 301 ill TED Chapter C VolP User Interface GLOBALCOM 2 Enter the zone group number If you wait two seconds before the next entry it will 302 assume you are finished with the entry and attempt to use the number you have entered You can also use the button to indicate you are finished 3 Ifyou entered an invalid number then you will hear the prompt Invalid entry and will need to attempt to enter the correct one again 4 Ifthe code is accepted you will hear a chime and you can begin recording the announcement Make the announcement and then hang up when complete and it will play 5 Itthere is an error and the announcement cannot play back you will hear Cannot start announcement goodbye and the line will hang up Option 3 This option is used to start the event based on the code you enter l 2 Press 2 and you will hear the prompt Enter event code Enter the zone group number If you wait two seconds before the next entry it will assume you are finished with the entry and attempt to use the number you have entered You can also use the
269. quiring at least a 1 to be in this field 164 wil TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 7 Action Types Indefinite When checked the Play Count edit box disappears This will allow the message to play continuously at the specified Repeat Interval until it is stopped using a StopAnnc action type programmed to stop this action Repeat Interval This is the time between successive message playbacks Positive numbers are used to designate an interval in minutes while negative numbers are used to designate an interval in seconds 5 would be 5 minutes 30 would be 30 seconds This time is from the start of the first playback to the start of the next one It the interval is set to 30 seconds and the message is 10 seconds in duration then there will be approximately 20 seconds between playbacks CombinedPrerecorded Advanced This action type is only available for the MS520 type of microphone station The following properties will only be visible after selecting the Show All Fields button Copy Action Type CombinedPrerecordec vy Show Base Fields Entry Code range i 11000 gt Announcement Class i Medium Priority Pri v Blanking ZoneGroup i o rX a E A A Figure 7 7 CombinedPrerecorded Action Type Show All Fields 165 ill TED Chapter 7 Action Types GLOBALCOM Blanking Zone Group Select the zone group to use as a blanking zone group trom the drop down list box The zone group selected will ettective
270. r This is a unique ID number used to identity the Titan frames used in the system When you add the device the system will automatically assign the next available frame number Start Relay Zone This is the zone number that represents the first relay zone on the device The system will automatically use the next available zone number as the starting zone number when you add a new device It can be edited here it needed Total Relays This number represents the total number of relay zones that will be present on this device Each output is numbered sequentially based on the start zone entered in the Start Relay Zone field The T9016RY can have a total of 16 relay zones defined and the T9032RY can have a total of 32 Fewer can be defined if necessary Zones Match To First This button has no function for this device Zone Number This is the zone number that will be associated with this relay output This is calculated based on the value entered in the Start Relay Zone and the relay output number The T9OT6RY has 16 relays and the T9032RY has 32 relays Description This is a text field used to describe the output function or connection To edit double click on the tield Triggers It a relay zone is used as part of a zone map in an announcement then the relay will energize for the duration of the announcement It will function this way as long as no triggers are detined for the relay The Trigger tield is used to associa
271. r download files to from the vACS To upload a file type in the remote path in the upload box and click Upload to vACS to select a file on your local machine To download type in the remote path in the download box and click Download from vACS to save the file to your local machine Path Entry Box C 201 1 4 11 vbk Upload to vACS Download from vACS C 2011_4_11 vbk y D autoexec bat bootmar SRECYCLE BIN y BOOTSECT BAK j WINDOWS BT config sys File system on En ie lan log vACS y MSVoices reg Boot realtek log P RHDSetup log y Cirrus Logic Voices reg j Documents and Settings y IED y inetpub Intal v Figure 26 3 File Management Download from vACS Click this button to initiate a transter of the selected tile trom the vACS to your local machine You must first select the tile to transfer by either navigating the file system windows and selecting the appropriate tile or you can manually type in the complete tile path in the Path 280 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 26 Debug Utilities Entry Box Due to system constraints tiles downloaded using this method must be transferred as a zip tile The remote tile will be compressed into a tile named temp zip and sent to your local machine Upon clicking the button to download the file Windows will prompt you to specify what you want to do with the tile as shown in Figure 26 4 You can choose to open temp zip or save it It is r
272. r inputs e 16 logic inputs e 8torm C relay outputs T9040NLR J T9040NLR Noise Logic amp Relay Device r Apply Configuration Now Description i T9040NLR Show Base Fields Location i Main Equipment Room IP Address i 10 2 128 186 Dev Handle 6400 H Frame Number Mic Number i D Start Relay Zone i 41 Total Relays Zones Match To First Description Triggers Activation Type Reverse Polarity 41 Relay Zone 41 Edit None Solid v 42 Relay Zone 42 Edit None Solid 43 Relay Zone 43 Edit None Solid v i 44 Relay Zone 44 Edit None Solid v 45 Relay Zone 45 Edit None Solid a 46 Relay Zone 46 tll Solid v 47 Relay Zone 47 Edit None Solid v 48 Relay Zone 48 Edit None Solid Z ID Description Sensor 2 Sensor 3 Sensor 4 Sensor 5 Sensor 6 Sensor 7 Sensor 8 Figure 6 43 TJO40NLR Noise Logic amp Relay Device Setup 86 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 6 Devices Description Enter text here to give the device a descriptive name Location Enter text here to describe the physical location of the device IP Address Enter the IP address for the device Dev Handle This is a sottware address used by the system It is assigned by the system and provided here for reterence it needed Frame Number This is a unique ID number used to identity the Titan frames used in the system When y
273. r periodic supervision since this frequency will be inaudible in most systems Note Clicking the OK button on this window will immediately send and save any changes to the device The window contains checkboxes that allow you to enable or disable the test trequencies either globally or on a per channel basis Use these checkboxes to completely remove a frequency from the display window Use these boxes to enter the test tone output level to be used for each 400Hz Set Test 1kHz Set Test I Show I Show x 36 dB 36 dB frequency AmpOut SpeakerCurrent Test Var Set Test Var V 400Hz 20 477 20 484 0 007 9 852 9 867 0 015 49 305 49 32 0 015 Zone 15 Iv 1kHz 20 5 20 5 0 10 156 10 164 0 008 44 422 44 422 0 V 20kHz 20 602 20 617 0 015 7 93 7 93 0 46 961 46 953 0 008 5 10 516 10 516 Enable disable a frequency on a per channel basis using these checkboxes Figure 6 73 T9116 Monitor Test Caution Clicking either the Test or Set buttons on the 400Hz or 1kHz will cause audible tones to be played through the system Test Click one of the test buttons to start a test for that frequency Once completed the results will be shown in the results table as shown in Figure 6 74 128 ill ED GLOBALCOM Chapter 6 Devices Ampin SpeakerCurrent Set Test Var Set 20 477 20 484 0 007 9 852 9 867 0 015 49 305 49 32 0 015 20 5 2
274. r sign text Use the Clear Alert item if this action is used to end the alert Sign Text Type in the text to be shown on any visual displays included in the assigned zone group Sign text can be used as an alternative to visual takes to define a visual message to accompany a prerecorded message Delayed A delayed message is one that is recorded into the system trom a microphone station and is immediately played back once the push to talk PTT switch is released If the zones are busy then the message will be held in queue until the zones are available tor playback of the message 166 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 7 Action Types Copy Action Description all Call Recorded Entry Code range i Announcement Class i a Figure 7 8 Delayed Action Type Announcement Class Select the appropriate announcement class for the action The announcement class determines the announcement priority relative to other announcements as well as various other behaviors as detined tor each announcement class The destination for the announcement is determined by the Zone ID or Zone Group fields These parameters are mutually exclusive thus only one zone destination method may be used Zone ID The Zone ID tield specities one 1 or more system zones as the destination tor the announcement Zones are entered either by directly typing them into the entry box i e 1 2 3 7 18 or by opening the Zone Selector by clicking the b
275. r the total number of times to play the message once it has been recorded All messages must play at least once thus requiring at least a 1 to be in this field Repeat Interval This is the time between successive message playbacks Positive numbers are used to designate an interval in minutes while negative numbers are used to designate an interval in seconds 5 would be 5 minutes 30 would be 30 seconds This time is from the start of the first playback to the start of the next one If the interval is set to 30 seconds and the message is 10 seconds in duration then there will be approximately 20 seconds between playbacks DelayedFromAlternateSource Advanced Properties The following properties will only be visible after selecting the Show All Fields button Copy Action Action specific to device Administrator Rack LIR Overrides default action Logic Input 8 ON Logic 8 On Type i DelayedFromAlternat Show Base Fields Description All Call Recorded Legic ID i 3 Logic State On Announcement Class Medium Priority Pris ternate Source i 1502A1 1 Mic 201 one ID i aai Ei TS ID f i I I iar a ame sroup i All Call System Wide _ Use Prompt as m o ia Match to Audible Takes Figure 7 14 DelayedFromAlternateSource Action Type Show All Fields 173 ill TED Chapter 7 Action Types GLOBALCOM Blanking Zone Group Select the zone group to use as a b
276. raphical paging station such as an MS528 type station When logins are enabled a user must enter their password to gain access to the 229 ill TED Chapter 12 Mic Passwords GLOBALCOM microphone station The graphical template that appears when they access the station is determined by the selection specitied in this tield Double click the field to open the drop down list Company Template Phone Numbers Accept Phone Login F FOX HM IED Default Template v 502 555 7436 1 Default Template X 502 555 9005 Securi ment FD Fire Dept ty bi x c Figure 12 2 Template Selection Phone Numbers When a number is in this list the system will automatically login when the number is matched using caller ID Use the icon to add a new number to the currently selected user You can then type in the number in the windows as shown in Figure 12 3 This same window appears when you select the edit icon Select the X icon to delete the highlighted number from the list Please enter a phone number Phone 502 555 7436 Cancel Figure 12 3 Add a Phone Number Accept Phone Login When checked this user will have the ability to access the system from using the VoIP telephone intertace Leaving this unchecked will block a user trom accessing the system via the telephone while still allowing them access using a microphone station Password This is a numeric password to be used for login This password can be used trom either a
277. rate entered here This time is in seconds and the detault is 30 seconds Zones Match To First This button has no function for this device Zone Number This is the zone number that will be associated with this relay output This is calculated based on the values entered in the Start Relay Zone and Total Relays tields Description This is a text tield used to describe the relay tunction or connection To edit double click on the field Triggers If a relay zone is used as part of a zone map in an announcement then the relay will energize tor the duration of the announcement It will function this way as long as no triggers are detined for the relay The Trigger tield is used to associate the relay with faults that are reported as part of the System Supervision module Click the Edit button to assign a trigger to the relay This will open the assignment window as shown in Figure 6 40 From here select a specific fault trom the drop down list and click the icon This will add the selected fault to the list To remove a fault select the fault with the mouse and then click the X icon You can stack multiple faults on a single relay The relay will activate as determined by the setting in the Activation Type tield when any of the assigned faults are reported 84 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 6 Devices 3 Amplifier Problem e 1 Test Point Pass Fail Audible Test 1 1 UPS Failure 9 10 Communication Channel Ne
278. red Check network connection to Microphone take microphone station out of power the unit Station is saver mode first If non PoE powered Check that electrical Powered Up IED524 Green power indicator in adapter is connected and plugged into hot upper left corner is lit power source IED528 Press and hold both the 1 and 3 keys on the keypad Microphone If no response reboot the microphone station station should display a yellow preferably by removing power e g network Unit is background status window Press the cable it PoE waiting a few seconds and re Operating Enter key to go back to the normal applying power Wait for the microphone screen station to boot up and then re test see note IED524 Press any key Busy Ready below LEDs should light Verity network connectivity Possible actions IED528 Unit is not displaying a status box with Waiting For Host Or when a action is initiated status box Contacting same equipment room as the ACS Unit is Host does not remain up for several Relocate this microphone station to the Communicating seconds a brief flash of this box is OK same network switch as the ACS and re test w the ACS suity IED524 Pressing PTT switch causes SS microphone station to go to active or 1 PING this microphone station from the Seek help from local network administrator e g network port enabled properly con busy state figured on the right VLAN etc
279. red Ethernet switch verity that it is connected to a port with PoE enabled and operating If not blinking try rebooting unit by turning off the power switch waiting a few seconds and re powering If not blinking try rebooting unit by removing power waiting a few seconds and re powering ee below Correct any local switch connection issue switch powered Relocate this unit to the same network switch as the ACS and or system supervision server and see if unit can communicate then Consult local network administrator to investigate tur ther e g port enabled configured on VLAN Note Some network switches can take 30 60 seconds to turn on PoE power after a connection is made One may have to be patient at this point waiting for the switch to re apply power to the network port Monitor Test Point Failure This condition indicates that the reading for a test point taken during the last automated or manual test or last two consecutive tests in the case of a 20K test failure differs trom the Set value by more than the established deviation e g 3 dB The fault report in system supervision listing will be of the torm lt Test gt lt Zone Description gt lt Point Type gt lt Device channel gt So for example it might say something like 20kHz Test Concourse A North Amp Output Titan 1 Channel 1A 297 Ww TED Chapter B Basic Troubleshooting Guidelines GLOBALCOM The description
280. roll Box 3 Title Select Flight Message Entry Code __ 8 Al Stondby Possenges Cleared 1070 9 Intemational Regulations O Table A 5 Scroll Box 4 Title Security Breach Message Re open Security Checkpoint 1799 While Checkpoint Closed 1800 292 Basic Troubleshooting Guidelines The following information is provided to allow some basic troubleshooting of the equipment in a digital Paging System such as the 510 520ACS or 1xOOACS based systems This includes components such as digital microphone stations Titan digital power amplitiers and other Titan peripheral components These basic actions could should be performed before calling the support contractor or equipment vendor technical support In the event of one time or very infrequent problems this may be all that is required However for repeat problems the technician may want to escalate the problem to the available technical support resources for turther investigation If possible this escalation should be done without taking corrective actions first e g don t reboot problem equipment but leave it in a failed taulted state Basic Principles When an off normal condition occurs the most basic externally observable issues to investigate are 1 Does the unit have power 2 Does the unit appear to be operating internal firmware running 3 Is the unit able to communicate over the network Some of the steps described below amount to the various w
281. round music trom intertering with the delivery of the announcement Click the X icon to clear the selection trom the list Pre Announce Tone Enter the take number to be played at the start of the action to alert individuals to the message or announcement being made Leave this field blank if you do not want to play a pre announce tone Visual Take List This section is used to select a visual take to display on any visual displays included in the assigned zone group This allows a visual take trom the take library to be displayed while a live announcement is in progress Refer to the Prerecorded section for instructions on using the Take Browser to add takes to the list 179 ill TED Chapter 7 Action Types GLOBALCOM Match to Audible Takes This button has no function for this action type as there are no audible takes for a live announcement Visual Alert Select one of the pre defined visual alerts to display on any visual displays included in the assigned zone group Visual alerts are displayed atter the completion of the visual message it detined and remain on the displays until cleared Visual alerts can also be used without any visual takes or sign text Use the Clear Alert item if this action is used to end the alert Sign Text Type in the text to be shown on any visual displays included in the assigned zone group Sign text can be used as an alternative to visual takes to define a visual message to accom
282. rs 8A CJ Relay Zone 47 J Relay Zone 8 _ Curbside 4B _ Spare Relay Zone 48 Figure 9 2 Editing Zone Groups Select this icon to add a new zone group to the list You may then edit the ID Description or Remote Zone Groups as needed A Select this icon to delete the currently selected zone group trom the list ID This is a zone group ID number that is used by actions in the local system or trom remote systems to reference the zone group used This number must be unique within the system but may be reused in other remote systems For example an ID of 101 may be used in multiple announcement controllers to define an All Call zone group in each frame Double click on this field in order to edit the ID number Description This is a text tield used to logically describe the zone group Double click on the tield in order to edit This description should provide a user with sufficient information to be able to understand the general areas within the facility that are included in the zone group Zone Count This tield provides a quick reterence of the total number of zones included in the zone group This tield is calculated by the system and cannot be edited This number only counts zones that are part of the local system It does not include any remote zone groups 214 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 9 Zone Groups Remote ZoneGroups A zone group can include one or more zone groups that are located in
283. rsion 1 0 4498 19996 VACS First Run Setup Wizard Use this screen to select a pre made default configuration file or load a completed configuration file which has been previously constructed If a default file is chosen more detailed system descriptions will follow If a completed configuration file is chosen this wizard will complete Load Default Configuration Load Default Configuration Figure 4 1 Load Default Configuration Load Configuration From File Select this option if you want to load a system configuration trom a tile that has been created on another system This method is usetul when you have multiple instances of the vACS in a system and each one has a similar configuration You can fully configure one system and 2 ill TED Chapter 4 First Run Setup Wizard GLOBALCOM then use that configuration as the starting point for the remaining systems Once loaded you can go in and make the necessary changes This is also useful if you are replacing a vACS in a system It you have maintained a backup copy of the configuration you can use it to configure the replacement unit Ge j JE http localhost FirstRun SystemXML v i X File Edit View Favorites Tools Favorites e SystemXML Page LED System Management Center 2 ee MAC Address E069954F7693 System Version 1 0 4498 19996 GLOBAL vACS First Run Setup Wizard Use this screen to select a pre made default configuration fil
284. s 88 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 6 Devices Reverse Polarity Check this box to reverse the operating polarity of the relay Normally a relay is in its de energized state until it is triggered When this box is checked it will normally energize and will de energize when triggered This is most usetul when a relay is used to indicate a fault to an external system or indicator panel That way a fault condition will be triggered if the unit loses power Noise Sensor Descriptions This list is used to assign your own descriptive names for each noise sensor This is the name that will appear when you assign a sensor to a channel It is recommended that you use a name that references the either the name or zone number where the sensor is located ID This is a read only field that matches the physical sensor input number on the back of the TSO40NLR device Description Double click on this field to edit the text used to describe name the sensor Actions Actions are available tor the 16 logic inputs on the device When you open the Actions tor the device you will notice that there are two actions for each logic input One is associated with the activation of the input and the other with the deactivation of the input You can differentiate between the two by looking tor On or Off in the Logic State field in the Extra Info column This allows you to create an action that will remain active while a contact closure is held To do this
285. s can either be used as output zones that close while announcements are in progress or they may be tied to the System Supervision module to indicate faults Note Relay 8 on the 1200LIR board will ALWAYS momentary close when the unit powers up or is restarted Care should be taken to not use this relay as an output to trigger emergency conditions to an external device such as a tire alarm system 82 ill TED GLOBALCOM Description Chapter 6 Devices IED GLOBALCOM System LIR J 1200 Logic Input Relay Output 5 Apply Configuration Now Description i IED GLOBALCOM System LIR Show Base Fields Location i IP Address 10 2 128 161 Mic Number i 256 Start Relay Zone 1 Total Relays 8 Poll Rate i 30 Zones Match To First Description Triggers Activation Type Reverse Polarity Relay Zone 1 Edit None Solid v 2 Relay Zone 2 Edit None Solid v 3 Relay Zone 3 Edit None Solid X 4 Relay Zone 4 Edit None Solid x 5 Relay Zone 5 Edit None Solid z 6 Relay Zone 6 Edit None Solid v Fi Relay Zone 7 Edit None Solid v 8 Relay Zone 8 Edit None Solid z ok Figure 6 39 1200 Logic Input Relay Output Setup Enter text here to give the device a descriptive name Location Enter text here to describe the physical location of the device IP Address Enter the IP address for the device that contains the 1200LIR card If the device is installed in
286. s the total number of relay zones that will be present on this device Each output is numbered sequentially based on the start zone entered in the Start Relay Zone tield The detault is four 4 but you can detine tewer if needed Zones Match To First This button has no function for this device Zone Number This is the zone number that will be associated with relay This is calculated based on the values entered in the Start Relay Zone and Total Relays tields Description This is a text tield used to describe the output tunction or connection To edit double click on the field Triggers Ita relay is used as part of a zone map in an announcement then it will energize for the duration of the announcement It will function this way as long as no triggers are defined for the relay The Trigger field is used to associate the relay with faults that are reported as part of the System Supervision module Click the Edit button to assign a trigger to the output This will open the assignment window as shown in Figure 6 36 From here select a specific fault trom the drop down list and click the icon This will add the selected fault to the list To remove a fault select the fault with the mouse and then click the X icon You can stack multiple faults on a single output The output will activate as determined by the setting in the Activation Type field when any of the assigned faults are reported 80 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 6
287. s they are added to the local controller When used appropriately this will ensure that all controllers will have the same take files Note When multiple playback devices are used it may take up to one 1 minute for recorded takes to be transterred to all other playback devices in the system 56 miw ED GLOBALCOM Chapter 6 Devices Push All Takes Click this button to immediately copy all audio and visual takes on the local controller to the remote controller Caution This option requires the system fo transter very large amounts of data over the network and will probably load the controller and network to a point where it may no longer be able to process announcements Only use this option in a controlled situation where the system can be taken oftline while the copy is in progress TTS Enabled Check this box if the message server has the Text to Speech TTS option installed When enabled the message server will also create and play TTS messages Is 1200 Check this box and the 1200 Logic Input Relay Output device will be shown in the Devices list This enables the logic inputs and relay outputs on the unit when it is a 120OMSG It it is an 1100MSG this option should not be checked Note Actions tor the 1200LIR inputs are configured by accessing the device actions trom the Devices section below Devices This section lists various devices that are contained within the message server Highlight the de
288. s to view details Object Filter 0 Clear List Message ID Filter 9 IP Filter 0 l 0 I 0 Incoming Time Occurred IP Address Object ID Message ID Message Number Data F Sent 7 16 2012 2 07 54 PM 10 255 255 255 FF 00 OC 67 3065 ly 00 03 00 00 FF FF 00 00 00 00 FF Received 7 16 2012 2 07 54 PM 10 2 128 161 FF 00 OC 67 3065 00 03 00 00 FF FF 00 00 00 00 FF Sent 7 16 2012 2 07 54 PM 10 2 128 161 FF 00 oc 01 814 00 00 00 00 FF 21 00 00 00 00 01 Received 7 16 2012 2 07 54 PM 10 2 128 161 FF 00 oc 01 814 00 00 00 00 FF 21 00 00 00 00 01 Sent 7 16 2012 2 07 54 PM 10 2 128 161 FF 00 oc 01 3848 00 00 00 00 FF 21 00 00 00 00 02 Received 7 16 2012 2 07 54 PM 10 2 128 161 FF 00 oc 01 3848 00 00 00 00 FF 21 00 00 00 00 02 Received 7 16 2012 2 07 55 PM 10 2 128 172 FF 00 Oc 01 20978 00 00 00 00 FF 21 00 00 00 00 03 Received 7 16 2012 2 07 55 PM 10 2 128 173 FF 00 oc 01 20981 00 00 00 00 FF 21 00 00 00 00 04 Sent 7 16 2012 2 07 57 PM 10 2 128 186 FF 00 10 6C 3066 00 03 00 00 11 40 00 00 00 00 FF Sent 7 16 2012 2 07 57 PM 10 2 128 161 10 00 00 27 3067 Received 7 16 2012 2 07 57 PM 10 2 128 161 10 00 00 27 3067 Sent 7 16 2012 2 07 57 PM 10 2 128 161 10 00 80 27 3067 00 00 Received 7 16 2012 2 07 57 PM 10 2 128 161 10 00 80 27 3067 00 00 Lal a vv Figure 26 11 NetMon Object Filter Enter a valid object ID here to filter the message list and display messages that only contain that object ID Message ID Filter Enter a valid messa
289. s will depend on what was entered in Enterprise for the zone descriptions The most useful portion of the description in terms of possible follow up diagnoses is the Point Type portion The possible values for this field what it means and what further investigations might be done are listed below in Table B 4 Note A possible cause of any Monitor Test fault are configuration changes to the frame or speakers attached to a frame without re running the test calibration to get new Set values The table below assumes this possible contiguration error has already been addressed Table B 4 Monitor Test Point Types and Actions Point Type Possible Further Investigation Internal o May indicate a problem in the one of the DSPs of the i An internal digital domain Ambient Out resolution The analog audio being May indicate an internal problem such as an AIO Amp Input fed to the power amp is board problem Resolution will have to involve the out of tolerance manufacturer Is the power amplifier turned off or failed If Amplifier Input fault also occurring for this chan The voltage out of the l l l l nel then that is the root cause investigate first Amp Output power amp is out of If it is not apparent that amp is failed one could try putting a spare ditferent amp of the same model into the slot and seeing if the fault clears tolerance If Amp Input or Amp Output fault also occurring for this channel then that is th
290. sSuct ec at eyieacte G 23 First Run Setup Wizard 2222222 22 27 Contiguration 33 MAY oylan 25s etd ate cas e ae 35 My COmmolletint 2 2 ete ie eit ee acs ae 38 Remote Controler sorrara aroro Gee yee eS ieee 44 Devices eere ieee tubs dden ten unitios 49 Internal CobraNet Audio Device 52 1100 1200 Message Server 2 0 eee ee ee oe T9032NS Titan Noise Sensor Device 2 22 58 External S000 Device o Uec ee ledhoveediueueweeews 97 MS528 Graphical Paging Station 2 62 MS524 4 Button Paging Station _ 66 Display Zone Controller 22 3 cseceucouwsesacesten os 69 DS OIGE ciate 5 ad cated e See ANERE 72 Titan 9032LVIO Logie Voltag e I O 22 sc acdc uesneays 74 Barionet5O Remote Logic Relayl O 2 79 1200 Logic Input Relay Output 2 222 22 82 TIO4ONLR Noise Logic amp Relay Device 2222 86 T9O16RY T9032RY Titan Relay Device 90 1502 Audio Outbox Device 222 2 2 eee 93 1502 Audio Inbox Device 22222 eee eee eee eee 95 Annuncicom 100 Device 2 22 2 97 Erect Than Zone ie be pe 2 ding tra evra EE oe Ext emmal Titan SOURCE 22 es bere E oat 10 1 100TEL Telephone Interface 2 102 1100 Digital Audio Bridge 22 222220 2 106 1522LR Logic Relay Module 0 108 T9160 Digital Amplifier Frame 111 91
291. scovery Service that will detect and report any unknown devices on the network This greatly simplities the process of adding and contiguring new devices You simply plug in the new device wait for it to appear in the list and then add it to the system There are three different configuration 18 scenarios Completely New Device ill TED GLOBALCOM In this scenario the system knows nothing of the newly detected device You simply add the new device and then contigure it as needed Replacement Of Existing Device In this scenario you are adding a new device to the system that is replacing one that has already been contigured You will choose which device in the contiguration that the newly discovered device will replace Adding a New Device Already Configured in Software This scenario is similar to the previous but in this case you have contigured the device in sottware prior to physically installing the hardware The process is essentially the same Figure 2 10 shows an MS528 microphone station detected in the Other Devices list In this case the station has been used before because it already has information in the Description Location and Extra Info tields In this example our goal is to replace the missing station named Main Office with this new one IP Description T 10 2 128 161 System 1 VoIP Interface 1 S 10 2 128 161 System 1 LIR 10 2 128 171Titan 1 Wrey 10 2 128 161 System 1 VoIP Interface 2
292. scribe the physical location of the device IP Address Enter the IP address for the device 5 ill TED Chapter 6 Devices GLOBALCOM Dev Handle This is a sottware address used by the system It is assigned by the system and provided here for reterence it needed Frame Number This is a unique ID number used to identity the Titan frames used in the system When you add the device the system will automatically assign the next available frame number Mic Number This is the number used to identity the device as an input device within the announcement controller It must be a unique number within the local announcement controller This number is automatically assigned when you add the device but can be edited if necessary Pullup Resistor When checked the input will detect dry contact closures between the input and the ground reterence on the device When not checked the input will activate when it receives a voltage above a certain threshold Start Relay Zone This is the zone number that represents the first output logic zone on the device The system will automatically use the next available zone number as the starting zone number when you add a new device It can be edited here it needed Total Relays This number represents the total number of output logic zones that will be present on this device Each output is numbered sequentially based on the start zone entered in the Start Relay Zone tield Note
293. scroll box at the bottom of the window This is used to help you set the colors for the scroll box The preview is limited to show only the first three items in the list and the width setting will not affect the width of the preview Click the OK button to save changes and close the window J No Scroll Box Define Scroll Box Title Messages Width 250 Background Colors Title Item Selected Item Item Selected Item Text Colors Pipe Action Text Fire Evac Fire Evac EC 1701 ZG v A Tornado Tornado EC 1702 ZG Intruder Security Intruder EC v Mute Fire Evac ornado Figure 11 11 Scroll Box Editor No Scroll Box Define Scroll Box When you open the editor window the Define Scroll Box radio button is selected by default If you want to remove the scroll box from the button definition select the No Scroll Box radio button and then select the OK button Title This is the text that will appear at the top of the scroll box when it is open Width This is the width in pixels of the scroll box as it will appear on the microphone station A value of 250 is a good width tor most applications with a maximum width of 320 Background Colors Text Colors This group of buttons allows you to select the background and text colors of the three different types of items in a scroll box Figure 11 12 points out where each type of item will appear in the scroll box The selecte
294. se the window Note that this does not save or apply the changes to the system That must be done using the Save All Changes icon before moving to another tab Cancel Select Cancel to discard the edits and close the window ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 7 Action Types Unused The unused action type is the default action type that appears when a new action is created While it has no tunctional use it is the starting place tor creating a new action by either selecting a new action type or using the Past Action command This type also allows a place holder action to be defined and reserve an Entry Code for future use Copy Action Figure 7 1 Unused Action Type ActivateEntryCode This action type is exclusively used to assign specitic Flight Announcement System FAS actions to 524 series 4 button paging stations 528SK 4 button expansion paging stations or logic closures In many airport applications using the FAS the initial flight sequence is loaded using the 528 station located at the ticket counter or automatically through the FAS database The 528 series station provides you with a graphic display along with selection buttons that allow you to easily select messages to play while managing a flight at the gate However 4 button stations are often installed near the jetway door as they typically do not require the full feature set available in a 528 series station This action type allows you to continue interacting with the FAS
295. sk of the controller Note The Internal CobraNet Audio Device has its own network port that must be contigured separately The System Management Center cannot directly set this address Refer to the Internal CobraNet Audio Device documentation for instructions on setting this address 29 ill TED Chapter 4 First Run Setup Wizard GLOBALCOM Inputs Outputs Core Devices From here you can enter the number ot each type of device that you will have in the system These devices will be added to the system configuration and automatically be assigned an IP address consistent with the settings of the System IP Address and System Netmask Any devices that are not added here can be individually added to the system at any time trom the Devices tab of the contiguration Save System Description amp Define Users Click this button to save the system intormation that you entered on this page and continue on to the next page of the wizard Configure Users This page allows you to define the default users tor the system There are three 3 security levels for users and you must define at least one user at each level in order to utilize the system More users for each level can be added later as needed Admin A user with this permission level will have access to all system contiguration options on the Admin tab Installers A user with this permission level will have edit access to everything on the Overview and Configuration tabs Som
296. stribution of emergency messages and or alert tones MuteAll Advanced Properties The following properties will only be visible after selecting the Show All Fields button ill IED GLOBALCOM Chapter 7 Action Types Copy Action Type i MuteAll Show Base Fields Description an Call Live Entry Code range i 10 l gt Announcement Class i Medium Priority Pri v Figure 7 37 MuteAll Action Type Show All Fields Visual Take List This section is used to select a visual take to display on any visual displays included in the assigned zone group This allows a visual take from the take library to be displayed while a the system is muted in an area Refer to the Prerecorded section for instructions on using the Take Browser to add takes to the list Match to Audible Takes This button has no function for this action type as there are no audible takes for a mute action Visual Alert Select one of the pre defined visual alerts to display on any visual displays included in the assigned zone group Visual alerts are displayed after the completion of the visual message if defined and remain on the displays until cleared Visual alerts can also be used without any visual takes or sign text Use the Clear Alert item if this action is used to end the alert Sign Text Type in the text to be shown on any visual displays included in the assigned zone group Sign text can be used as an alternativ
297. system The permissions associated with each role are defined at the top of this topic 27 3 ill TED GLOBALCOM This page has been intentionally left blank PDRP Languages The system is capable of supporting multiple languages tor PDRP messages The languages available on your system will vary based on the language libraries purchased This tab allows you to contigure which languages will appear as available selections when detining actions that utilize PDRP message takes Refer to the Action Types section of this documentation for information on contiguring actions that utilize the PDRP Languages PDRP Languages Description Enabled French Spanish German Korean Japanese Chinese PRC Russian Dutch British English Cantonese Figure 24 1 PDRP Languages Contiguration Figure 24 1 shows a list for a system with 11 different languages You should check the Enabled check boxes tor the languages that you have installed on your system If you add a new language to the system you must return to this section to enable it before it will appear as an available selection when defining messages 275 ill TED GLOBALCOM This page has been intentionally left blank User Log The User Log is used to keep a record of any changes made by system users The system utilizes the Windows System Log for logging user actions Refer to the Windows System Log for details on accessing the log directly or for c
298. system while boarding a flight without moving back to the 528 series station installed at the counter Default action for all 524 4 Button Paging Stations Type Li ActivatetntryCode Show Base Fields 6 Figure 7 2 Activate Entry Code Activated Entry Code This drop down list allows you to select the FAS action to be triggered with the action If you are using a non standard FAS code you can manually type it into the edit box immediately to the right of the drop down list 159 ill TED Chapter 7 Action Types GLOBALCOM Caution Only use manually entered codes when directed by IED support per sonnel Note This action will not work with any FAS messages that require prompting tor information or multiple sequence operations A full featured 528 series microphone station is required tor these operations ee ee Next Arrival Next Departure Pause Departure Automation Repeat Last Departure Pause Arnival rams a Repeat Last Arrival Skip Next Arrival Skip Next Departure Delete Sequence Figure 7 3 Activated Entry Code Next Arrival Immediately play the next arrival message in the sequence Next Departure Immediately play the next departure message in the sequence Pause Departure Automation If any timers are used in the sequence to automatically play the sequence of departure messages this will pause the playback of the sequence It is resumed when the Next Departure entry code is a
299. t Enter a numerical value to represent the number of milliseconds ms to use for the delay BGM Channel This drop down list allows you to select an individual channel to use as the zone BGM The channels available are for the device selected in the BGM Device field and the local inputs on the back of the T9160 mainframe Match to First Click this button to take the three levels Overall BGM and Duck Delay and the BGM Channel selection of the first zone and copy them to the remaining zones in the device EQ Each channel has a nine band parametric EQ available to adjust the signal as necessary to meet the needs of the loudspeakers and allow the system to be adjusted to maximize intelligibility in the acoustic space Press the EQ button tor a channel to open the EQ window as shown in Figure 6 68 117 Ww TED Chapter 6 Devices GLOBALCOM eQ zoneit O 118 Set Flat Copy Peaking v Peaking v Peaking v Peaking v Peaking v Peaking v HiPass v LoPass v 182 477 766 82 1000 40 16000 1 05 1 35 3 5 55 2 1 o 0 332362282 1 41634277 0 223384567 0 037804305 0 50563088S 1 ButterWc ButterWc v 8 x 6 v Load From File Save To File Apply OK Cancel Figure 6 68 EQ Settings Window Bands are selected by clicking on one of the nine band names immediately below the frequency response curve graph A specific band can be selected and then adjusted using the edit boxes below the names It
300. t playback then either the either the calibration constant should be adjusted or a re calibration should be attempted CobraNet Transmitters and Receivers The CobraNet transmitters and receivers are automatically set by the system and the defaults are sufficient for most applications The ability to override the defaults is provided here if it is required f i ID Bundle Number Type Number of Channels f i 1901 LocalOnly 1 2 1933 LocalOnly 1 Bundle Type Number of Channels LocalOnly 1 O LocalOnly 1 LocalOnly 1 LocalOnly 1 LocalOnly 1 LocalOnly 1 LocalOnly 1 LocalOnly 1 LocalOnly 1 LocalOnly 1 LocalOnly 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Figure 6 79 T9116 CobraNet Transmitters and Receivers 139 i TED Chapter 6 Devices GLOBALCOM DNA7800 Series Amplifier DNA7800 Amplifier Frame 1 DNA7800 Series Amplifier a Apply Configuration Now Description i DNA7800 Amplifier Frame 1 Show Base Fields Location i Equipment Room B137 satzen st Tetaizomea Oa o Description i Delay BGM Channel Building 12 0 Channel 1 Building 12 Channel 2 0 Building 11 0 0 Building 11 Figure 6 80 DNA7800 Series Amplifier Setup Description Enter text here to give the device a descriptive name Location Enter text here to describe the physical location of the device IP Address Enter the IP address for the device here Start Zone This is the zone number th
301. t has previously been configured with a different IP address you will see them in the list and highlighted in gold as shown in Figure 4 6 below 3 Ww TED Chapter 4 First Run Setup Wizard GLOBALCOM e ActivityMonitor Page Windows Intemet Explorer a ind Go E http localhost ActivityMonitor File Edit View Favorites Tools yy Favorites ActivityMonitor Page T IP Address 10 2 128 161 ILD System Management Center nema MAC Address E069954F7693 GLOBAL COM Jo a Ol OP Syst Admin System Version 1 0 4498 19996 login My Devices Description Faults Location Extra Info IED GLOBALCOM System VoIP I Mic 2 SIP Server IED GLOBALCOM System VoIP I Mic 1 SIP Server J 10 2 128 177 Mic 5 Mic 5 5 10 2 128 178 Mic 6 Mic 6 J 10 2 128 179 Mic 7 Mic 7 5 10 2 128 180 Mic 8 Mic 8 Mic 11 Mic 11 _ Mic 12 Mic 12 D 10 2 128 161 IED GLOBALCOM System LIR Mic 256 10 2 128 171 Titan 1 B Frame 1 16384 16 Zones Start 10 2 128 172 Titan 2 Frame 2 16392 16 Zones Start 10 2 128 173 Titan 3 Frame 3 16400 16 Zones Start o 0 0 0 0 IED GLOBALCOM System Sound Mic 13 SMS False VOIP False System Mode vACS Figure 4 6 Device Discovery It you click the Resolve button you will be prompted with the dialog window shown in Figure 4 7 From here you can elect to use the IP addr
302. t must be detined in the Remote Controllers list Default Configuration Device Definition User Definitioz Default Configuration Device Definition User Definition Figure 5 1 My System Tab There are three clickable text options located at the upper right corner of Figure 5 1 Clicking on one of the options will take you to a page in the First Run Setup Wizard to quickly configure the system It is not recommended that you use these options if you have already configured devices in the system Default Configuration Clicking on this text will take you to the vACS First Run Setup Wizard page as shown in Figure 5 2 From here you can select a default configuration from the list or load one from a file Refer to the vACS First Run Setup Wizard documentation for additional information 39 Ww TED Chapter 5 My System GLOBALCOM 36 LD System MElar te aaan Center 3 IP Address 10 2 128 161 Netmask 255 0 0 0 MAC Address E069954F7693 GLOBAL System 1 System Version 1 0 4444 16140 vACS First Run Setup Wizard Use this screen to select a pre made default configuration file or load a completed configuration file which has been previously constructed If a default file is chosen more detailed system descriptions will follow If a completed configuration file is chosen this wizard will complete Load Default Configuration Generic vACS vACS Transit Load Configuration From File urrent Zones
303. t not operating or a problem in the network connection to the unit Table B 3 below lists the checks and possible remedial actions that can be done to further diagnose this fault condition In the table the description 1RU Titan indicates all other non amplitier products like the TPO4ONLR T9O32LVIO T9032NS and similar 296 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter B Basic Troubleshooting Guidelines Table B 3 Unit Communication Fault Checks Actions Check Check Procedure Remedial Actions T9160 Green power Unit is P dU nit is Powered Up indicator on top tront is lit TRU Titan Green power indicator on the back below the network connector is lit T9160 System LED Unit is Operating indicator on top tront is blinking TRU Titan System LED indicator on the back below the network connector is blinking Verity network cable is plugged in Verity that network con nection light is on and Unit is Communicating the network traffic light blinks Verity the unit can be PINGed from the equipment room where the ACS is located over the Network T9160 Check that both power cords are firmly pushed in the power switch is on and the cords are plugged into a hot source TRU Titan If the unit is powered using an external power supply module check that the power adapter is plugged into the unit and into a hot source Perhaps try substituting a new power adapter If the unit is powered using PoE trom a powe
304. te button will be grayed out as you cannot delete something that has not been defined Note If you have a Device Specific action defined for a button and you wish to revert to the Default action simply delete the Device Specific action associated with that button Action specific to Information Delete Live Local EC 0 2G6 101 Action for all 524 4 Button Paging Stations us oO fale ECO 4b 65555 Delete E E Ei i j rus fa oA Figure 6 26 Delete Action Display Zone Controller Use this device type to define a group of displays tor visual paging When you are using a text to speech TTS or prerecorded message the display will show text that is synchronized to the audible message Each display will appear as an available zone in the Zone Group setup and individual Action configuration This allows you to define a group of displays that will be addressed using a broadcast IP address For situations where you must individually contigure each display you must add a Display device type tor each individual display that is required This would be the case if you must configure displays to show other content when idle or if they are used for waytinding 69 Ww TED Chapter 6 Devices GLOBALCOM A Sign Zones Display Zone Controller E Apply Configuration Now Description i Sign Zones Show Base Fields Location i IP Address i 255 0 0 0 Start Sign i 29 Total Signs i 4
305. te the relay with faults that are reported as part of the System Supervision module Click the Edit button to assign a trigger to the relay This will open the assignment window as shown in Figure 6 48 From here select a specitic tault trom the drop down list and click the icon This will add the selected fault to the list To remove a tault select the fault with the mouse and then click the X icon You can stack multiple faults on a single relay The relay will activate as determined by the setting in the Action Type field when any of the assigned faults are reported 91 Ww TED Chapter 6 Devices GLOBALCOM 3 Amplifier Problem 1 Test Point Pass Fail Audible Test 1 1 UPS Failure 9 10 Communication Channel Network Figure 6 48 T9OxxRY Triggers Activation Type The Activation Type applies only to outputs that function as fault indicators and have definitions in the Triggers field e Solid The relay will activate while the fault condition is present and deactivate once the fault condition has cleared e Momentary The relay will activate for approximately 1 second and then deactivate e Pulsating The relay will cycle between active and inactive states at a rate of approximately 1 second on and 1 second off Activation Type Momentary Pulsating Figure 6 49 T9OxxRY Activation Types Reverse Polarity Check this box to reverse the operating polarity of the relay Normally a r
306. teSource Action Type Show All Fields Blanking Zone Group Select the zone group to use as a blanking zone group from the drop down list box The zone group selected will effectively be muted when this action is executed Blanking zone groups are typically used to mute areas that are adjacent to where the announcement will be made to prevent other announcements messages or background music from interfering with the delivery of an announcement Click the X icon to clear the selection from the list Pre Announce Tone Enter the take number to be played at the start of the action to alert individuals to the message or announcement being made Leave this field blank if you do not want to play a pre announce tone Visual Take List This section is used to select a visual take to display on any visual displays included in the assigned zone group This allows a visual take from the take library to be displayed while a live announcement is in progress Refer to the Prerecorded section for instructions on using the Take Browser to add takes to the list 183 ill TED Chapter 7 Action Types GLOBALCOM Match to Audible Takes This button has no function for this action type as there are no audible takes for a live announcement Visual Alert Select one of the pre defined visual alerts to display on any visual displays included in the assigned zone group Visual alerts are displayed atter the completion of the visual message it detin
307. ted after an automatic cal ibration has not been completely successtul Adjustments should be made in very small increments of 2 or 3 dB at a time Use the following guidelines when adjusting the calibration constant if the system is not properly responding after an automatic calibration e fthe system turns down as soon as an announcement is active then the calibration constant is too high It should be reduced in small increments until the system remains stable while an announcement is active e Ifthe system gets louder as while an announcement is active then the calibration constant is too low It should be increased in small increments until the system remains stable while an announcement is active Filter Attack This value determines the rate at which the output level will increase when an increase in the ambient sensor level has been received The value is in the number of seconds and can be directly entered in the box using the keyboard Filter Release This value determines the rate at which the output level will decrease when a decrease in the ambient sensor level has been received The value is in the number of seconds and can be directly entered in the box using the keyboard Filter Presets e Fast Preset where the attack time is second and the release time is 2 seconds e Medium Preset where the attack time is 3 seconds and the release time is 4 seconds e Slow Preset where the attack time is 7 se
308. ter selecting the Show All Fields button 185 Ww TED Chapter 7 Action Types GLOBALCOM Type i LiveOrDelayed_ Show Base Fields Description an Call Live Entry Code range i io jel Announcement Class i Zone ID i _ Use Prompt Zone Group i AICA frame 3 03 9G PI Use Promet sarkin zonc X Pre Announce Tone Live m E Wo o TC eC A ee Wooo o Ft tC SC eee Figure 7 29 LiveOrDelayed Action Type Show All Fields Blanking Zone Group Select the zone group to use as a blanking zone group trom the drop down list box The zone group selected will ettectively be muted when this action is executed Blanking zone groups are typically used to mute areas that are adjacent to where the announcement will be made to prevent other announcements messages or background music trom intertering with the delivery of an announcement Click the X icon to clear the selection trom the list Pre Announce Tone Enter the take number to be played at the start of the action to alert individuals to the message or announcement being made Leave this field blank if you do not want to play a pre announce tone Visual Take List This section is used to select a visual take to display on any visual displays included in the assigned zone group This allows a visual take from the take library to be displayed while the announcement is in progress Reter to the Prerecorded section for instructions on using
309. that references the either the name or zone number where the sensor is located ill TED GLOBALCOM ID Chapter 6 Devices This is a read only field that matches the physical sensor input number on the back of the T9O40NLR device Description Double click on this field to edit the text used to describe name the sensor External 8000 Device This device type allows the vACS to operate in a system with an IED 8000 series system In each 8000 you must contigure a source using the EXTERNAL type in the 8000 contiguration to allow it to receive announcement commands trom the vACS You must also configure a zone using the EXTERNAL type in the 8000 contiguration to enable the 8000 to send commands to the vACS This device type enables only the data communications between the vACS and the 8000 system You must also contigure an audio input source that will be used to receive the audio signal trom the 8000 An analog audio zone is used to send the audio signal from the vACS to the 8000 Fire Station 8000 External 8000 Device Description Location Mic Number My Node ID CoController IF Addresses Fire Station 8000 Fire Station 260 10 2 128 1 10 2 126 2 ID Description ee 8000 Frame i All Call 34 8000 Frame 1 Group 1 Entry Code 100 35 8000 Frame 2 All Call 36 8000 Frame 2 Group 1 Figure 6 16 External 8000 Device Setup Description Enter text here to give the device a d
310. the Take Browser to add takes to the list 186 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 7 Action Types Match to Audible Takes This button has no function for this action type as there are no audible takes for a this type of action Visual Alert Select one of the pre defined visual alerts to display on any visual displays included in the assigned zone group Visual alerts are displayed atter the completion of the visual message it detined and remain on the displays until cleared Visual alerts can also be used without any visual takes or sign text Use the Clear Alert item if this action is used to end the alert Sign Text Type in the text to be shown on any visual displays included in the assigned zone group Sign text can be used as an alternative to visual takes to define a visual message to accompany an announcement Monitor The monitor action type is reserved only tor hardware devices that support 2 way communications You must have a room module or sound reinforcement module located in the zone to be monitored The microphone station that initiates the action must also support 2 way communications This action will route the microphone signal trom the room to the speaker or earpiece located at the monitoring device It can also be contigured to play a pre announce tone when the monitor action is started as well as providing a periodic tone to indicate that the room is being monitored Copy Action Type i Monitor kaj S
311. the announcement class assigned to the action It shows both the name given to the class and the priority number You must open the action definition window to edit this property Start Delay This is the time in seconds that the system will wait to launch the action after the event has started For example a value of 60 will cause the system to wait one 1 minute after the event is started to begin playback of the action This field is edited directly trom the list by double clicking on the tield and typing in the value Play Count This is the number of times to launch the action within the event It is edited either from the action definition window or by double clicking on the field and typing in a new value A value of O indicates that the action will repeat continuously until it is stopped by an appropriate action This also checks the Indefinite check box in the action definition window Play Interval This is the time between successive playbacks of the action Positive numbers are used to designate an interval in minutes while negative numbers are used to designate an interval in seconds 5 would be 5 minutes 30 would be 30 seconds This time is trom the start of the first playback to the start of the next one If the interval is set to 30 seconds and the message is 10 seconds in duration then there will be one 20 seconds between playbacks It is edited either trom the action definition window or by double clicking on the field a
312. the capacities allowed with the current license The right portion of the bar indicates the operational mode of the system 23 ill TED Chapter 3 Licensing GLOBALCOM 24 System Modes vVACS In this mode the vACS service is functioning as an announcement controller MSG In this mode the controller is tunctioning as a message server and is seen as a device by a vACS controller assigned as this device s owner Lifeline Monitoring In this mode the vACS service is functioning in Lifeline mode It will monitor other VACS controllers in the system and take over the functionality of any vACS controllers that tail Lifeline Active This mode indicates that the controller has detected a failure with one of the vACS controllers that it was monitoring It has assumed control of the tailed controller s devices to maintain system functionality Transit This mode indicates that the controller has been licensed for a transit application such as a subway light rail bus etc LANcom This mode indicates that the controller is functioning as part of aLANcom SCS school communications system Telephone Interface This mode indicates that the controller is functioning as a VoIP telephone interface unit such as the 1 1OOTEL ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 3 Licensing 0 x 7 http localhost ActivityMonitor sal leas A h File Edit View Favorites Tools iy Favorites ActivityMonitor Page IP Address
313. the condition of certain buttons on the station When you contigure the station you have the option of designating buttons as combine buttons A zone group is assigned to each button and then the action destination will be an accumulation of all selected zone groups 163 Wl TED Chapter 7 Action Types GLOBALCOM Copy Action Type CombinedPrerecordec v Show All Fields Entry Code range 11000 gt Announcement Class i Medium Priority Pri v mudora ceme nA Figure 7 6 CombinedPrerecorded Action Type Announcement Class Select the appropriate announcement class for the action The announcement class determines the announcement priority relative to other announcements as well as various other behaviors as defined for each announcement class Audio Take List This section is where the individual audio takes are selected and organized in the proper playback order Use the check boxes to turn on or off individual languages The up down arrows to the right are used to change the order of language playback Refer to the Take Browser section of the Prerecorded action type for details on adding takes to the message Prerecorded messages allow for repeats to be defined as part of the message by using the following three fields Play Count A message can be played multiple times Enter the total number of times to play the message once it has been launched All messages must play at least once thus re
314. the duration of the announcement It will function this way as long as no triggers are detined for the relay The Trigger tield is used to associate the relay with faults that are reported as part of the System Supervision module Click the Edit button to assign a trigger to the relay This will open the assignment window as shown in Figure 6 44 From here select a specific fault from the drop down list and click the icon This will add the selected fault to the list To remove a fault select the fault with the mouse and then click the X icon You can stack multiple faults on a single relay The relay will activate as determined by the setting in the Activation Type field when any of the assigned faults are reported 3 Amplifier Problem x 1 Test Point Pass Fail Audible Test 1 1 UPS Failure 9 10 Communication Channel Network Figure 6 44 T9O032LVIO Triggers Activation Type The Activation Type applies only to outputs that function as fault indicators and have definitions in the Triggers field Solid The relay will activate while the fault condition is present and deactivate once the fault condition has cleared e Momentary The relay will activate for approximately 1 second and then deactivate e Pulsating The relay will cycle between active and inactive states at a rate of approximately 1 second on and 1 second off Activation Type Momentary Pulsating Figure 6 45 T9032LVIO Activation Type
315. the local controller then you will use the address of the local controller That address can be found in the upper right corner of the System Management Center window It the device is installed in an external 1200MSG Message Server then you will need to use the IP address of that device Mic Number This is the number used to identity the device as an input device within the announcement controller It must be a unique number within the local announcement controller This number is automatically assigned when you add the device but can be edited if necessary Start Relay Zone This is the zone number that represents the first relay zone in the device The system will automatically use the next available zone number as the starting zone number when you add a new device It can be edited here it needed 83 ill TED Chapter 6 Devices GLOBALCOM Total Relays This number represents the total number of relay zones that will be present on this device The device has eight 8 relays that will function as zones and this is the default number when adding the device Since relay zones do not count towards the total number of zones used in the sottware license this should always be set to 8 Poll Rate The device will automatically transmit any changes of input states to the system as they occur The Poll Rate is a backup in the event that a change message is missed The system will poll the device for the status of all inputs at the
316. the system name and other information that is used to determine the status of the system The different possibilities are defined below System name The system name will typically be displayed here in gray text so you will know which system you are viewing It this text appears in red then the SMC is not getting a response trom the vACS service application and you must investigate the cause of this problem as your system is most likely not running System name Offline This will appear with the system name and in a red color This indicates that the SMC is communicating with the vACS application but it is not running This may not necessarily indicate a system failure as a vVACS will be oftline it a Liteline has assumed its control tunctions Lifeline Monitoring This will appear on a system that is operating as a Lifeline system It indicates that it is up and running but monitoring all programmed systems and will take over their functions if a failure is detected Lifeline System x This will appear on a system that is operating as a Lifeline system It indicates that it has taken over control tor the system indicated as the x variable and is no longer monitoring other systems for failures Configuration Options The middle portion of the SMC screen will change to display the content associated with the Configuration Options Tab you have selected in the header Figure 1 3 shows this section when the Overview tab is s
317. tilities GLOBALCOM Reboot Click this button to reset the unit It will shut down the operating system and restart the device This will take the controller offline until it has completely restarted and all the supporting services are fully operational Restart Services The announcement controller functions are managed by what are known as Services in the Windows operating system These run in the background and most are started when the operating system starts while others are started and stopped on an as needed basis This eliminates the possibility of a user inadvertently shutting down a system critical application There are cases where simply restarting all of the services that are operating in the background is all that is necessary instead of completely restarting the entire controller The controller will still be ottline while the services are in the process of shutting down and restarting but the time is much less than a complete reboot File Management This tab allows you to remotely transfer individual tiles trom a client or server to a VACS located on the network Figure 26 3 shows the File Management tab and its major components The Path Entry Box is used to specify a directory or complete tile path on the vACS When uploading a tile this will be the path to place the selected tile When downloading this is the complete path and tilename that you will download to the local machine File Management This allows you to upload o
318. ting in this mode The majority of this documentation is dedicated to devices operating in this mode as they have the most contiguration options available 1100MSG 1200MSG This mode is used for the message server devices In this case the device will be owned by an Announcement Controller and the parent device will manage the configuration of the device Since the parent device will do the contiguration the options available on a device operating in this mode are very limited The Configuration tab is not available and you will tind that most of the items on the Overview tab provide very little information as they are managed on the vACS device The Admin tab is the only tab of use for this mode but typically reserved tor debugging only You will need to log in with an account with admin privileges to access that tab ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 1 Introduction IP Address 10 11 99 6 mm c LED System Management Center MAC adana Jr GLOBAL Overview Admin System Version 1 0 4577 25890 login s Announcement Activity Mic amp Zone Status Current Faults Available Devices System Mode MSG Figure 1 5 Message Server Options Lifeline This mode is used for Liteline devices that monitor other announcement controllers in the system and will assume their role it a failure is detected Each announcement controller in the system will push their configuration file to the Lifeline so the Configuration tab is not av
319. tion Copy Action Entry Code range L s iJ High Priority Pris4 Ticketing 102 Figure 7 21 Live Multiple Zone Groups Use Prompt This teature requires a graphical paging station such as the IEDA528 series microphone station When checked this action will prompt the station user for either the zone code or zone group code for the action This gives the operator flexibility to choose the announcement or message destination at the time of launch This requires the microphone station operator to know a valid Zone ID or Zone Group that is available for use Live Advanced Properties The following properties will only be visible atter selecting the Show All Fields button 178 ill IED GLOBALCOM Chapter 7 Action Types Copy Action me O Description All Call Liwe ce code ge C Announcement Class i Medium Priority Pri Zone ID i Use Prompt Zone Group i All Call Frame 1 101 x Use Prompt slang Zonacroup E Pre Announce Tone i 3076 is lt lt i Lou taf Figure 7 22 Live Action Type Show All Fields Blanking Zone Group Select the zone group to use as a blanking zone group trom the drop down list box The zone group selected will effectively be muted when this action is executed Blanking zone groups are typically used to mute areas that are adjacent to where the announcement will be made to prevent other announcements messages or backg
320. to identity the input as a usable source within the announcement controller When you add the device each number is automatically detined It can be changed if needed Once it has been defined here it will appear as an available source when defining actions Is BGM Source When checked the system will treat each input on the device as a BGM source for the system The Mic Number fields are both blanked out when this is checked as shown in Figure 6 52 When contigured as a BGM source the device will appear as an available BGM source for output devices such as the T9160 Digital Amplifier Frame Channel Descriptions This description is used to give a name to each channel This name will appear in selection lists for devices when you are configuring outputs to receive BGM Mic Number i Is BGM Source i Channel 1 Channel Descriptions Channel 2 Transmitters ID Bundle Number Type Number of Channels 1803 BGM 2 p LocalOnly 0 Figure 6 52 1502 as BGM source CobraNet Transmitters The CobraNet transmitters are automatically set by the system and the defaults are sufficient for most applications The ability to override the defaults is provided here if it is required Note If you need to use a single 1502Al to supply BGM to multiple GLOBALCOM controllers that are on the same vLAN then you will need to manually override the bundle numbers Start by adding the main 1502Al to its parent controller and make
321. to editthe action forthe highlighted button Button Description Extra Info Live EC 65500 7G 65535 Live EC 65501 26 65534 Live 6C 65502 476 65533 Figure 6 20 Sidekick Button Configuration All microphone stations that are the MS528 type share the same set of actions You can limit access to individual actions by simply not including them in the various graphical templates you create for the system Figure 6 21 shows a list of actions defined tor MS528 microphone stations Refer to the Action Types section for information on configuring individual actions MS528 Graphical Paging Station Actions 3 Live All Call Live 10 Delayed All Call Recorded 11 Prerecorded Fire Evac 12 Prerecorded Tornado 13 Prerecorded Security Intruder 14 StopAnnc Clear Fire Evac 15 Type Description Entry Code Extra Info IAC AC AC Ac Ac Medium Priority Pri 6 ZoneGroup Count 1 AV Audio a Medium Priority Pri 6 Play Count 3 Repeat Interval 5 ZoneGroup Count 1 Emergency Pri 2 Play Count 0 Repeat Interval 30 Takes 49152 9040 7084 ZoneGroup Count 1 AV Both Emergency Pri 2 Play Count 0 Repeat Interval 30 Takes 49152 9041 7414 ZoneGroup Count 1 AV Both Emergency Pri 2 Play Count 0 Repeat Interval 2 Takes 49152 7002 ZoneGroup Count 1 AV Both Stop Action Fire Evac EC 12 ZG 101 Figure 6 21 MS528 Actions 65 ill TED Chapter 6
322. ton supports a maximum of two 2 lines of text for the button caption If the text entered in the Caption Line 1 field is too wide for the button it will automatically scroll to the next line However it will probably not separate the way you want so two fields are provided so you can specify exactly what you want to appear on each line Text Color Button Color Preview sjaj Caption Line 2 All Zones Caption Line 1 Live Fage Delayed Page Logout Figure 11 8 Single and 2 line Button Captions 229 ill TED Chapter 11 Mic Templates GLOBALCOM Scroll Box This field displays a list of the items contained within the scroll box if the button is defined as a scroll box button Double click this field and you will see an Open Editor button appear Click this button to open the scroll box editor Refer to the Scroll Boxes section that follows for more intormation on creating scroll boxes Is Logout When checked the button will only be used to log the user out of the microphone station It will only appear if the microphone station is configured to use logins If the button is defined but the lock teature is disabled in the microphone station setup then the button will not be visible Scroll Boxes Scroll boxes allow you to create a list of items trom which you scroll through and select Each item in the list is then associated with an action or entry code When a button has a scroll box detined for it pressing
323. tone Visual Take List This section is used to select the visual takes to display on any visual displays included in the assigned zone group By default these takes will be set to match any audible takes configured in the Audio Take List section For this type of action you will typically want the visual takes to match the audio takes Refer to the Prerecorded section for instructions on using the Take Browser to add takes to the list Match to Audible Takes This button will copy the current audio take list to the visual take list so the visual displays will show text that will match the audible message Visual Alert Select one of the pre detined visual alerts to display on any visual displays included in the assigned zone group Visual alerts are displayed atter the completion of the visual message it detined and remain on the displays until cleared Visual alerts can also be used without any visual takes or sign text Use the Clear Alert item if this action is used to end the alert sign Text Type in the text to be shown on any visual displays included in the assigned zone group Sign text can be used as an alternative to visual takes to define a visual message to accompany a prerecorded message Record Take This action type allows a message take to be recorded and stored on the system using the specitied take number It can then be used in a pre recorded action type tor playback 201 Ww TED Chapter 7 Action T
324. tor each logic input One is associated with the activation of the input and the other with the deactivation of the input You can differentiate between the two by looking for On or Off in the Logic State field in the Extra Info column This allows you to create an action that will remain active while a contact closure is held To do this you must detine an action to start the announcement and then a separate action to stop it using the other logic state Note The T9032LVIO operates slightly different from the 1200LIR in that it has a reference voltage available in addition to a ground To control an action using a contact closure you must wire the closure between the input and the ground reference on the terminal connector When a closure is present between the input and ground it will trigger the action programmed for the On logic state When the closure is removed it will trigger the action programmed for the Off logic state If you wire between the input and the reference voltage the logic is reversed It is recommended that you only use the ground terminal and NOT use the voltage reterence terminal The number in the Entry Code field corresponds to the physical input on the device Note that the first available input is not 1 in Figure 6 34 This is because through 8 were defined to be outputs The starting inout number is determined by the value placed in the Total Relays field of the device setup To edit an action select th
325. troller If you will have a Lifeline system monitoring this controller you will need to come back here to add it once you have defined the Lifeline system in the Remote Controllers tab You need to skip the 1 200LIR and VoIP configuration at this time You will come back and do this when you are ready to detine Actions 3 Configure Remote Systems Here you must tell the controller about all the other controllers in your system You will need these detined when it comes time to program Actions that go between controllers 4 Define Announcement Classes You must have some Announcement Classes defined in order to define Actions for input devices The system will have some detaults already programmed but you may want to add more or edit the existing ones as needed Again you can always come back and add more as you have a need ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 1 Introduction 10 Define User Groups You will need to detine some basic User Groups in order to complete the contiguration of graphical paging stations and the Mic Passwords and Mic Templates sections You can skip this step it you do not have any graphical paging stations such as the 528 series stations Define Output Devices Output devices include 1502AO T9160 T9116 DNA68xx T9016RY T9032RY TPO4ZONLR relays T9032LVIO logic outputs visual displays and other devices that are used as system outputs Output devices own zone outputs and you must have zones in the system in order
326. ts 6001 and 6002 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 5 My System Audio IP This is the multicast group IP address used by this controller The detault address is 239 192 0 x where x corresponds to the system number When combined with the port number this provides a unique transmitter address The address and or port contiguration can be changed to meet the installation network requirements as needed Devices This section lists various devices that are contained within the local controller Figure 5 6 shows the devices that are contained in the 1200ACS Highlight the device and click the settings icon located at the top of the list or double click on the item to open the editor tor the device The 200 Logic Input Relay Output device can be used to launch actions Refer to the Devices section of the documentation to learn how to configure each individual device Note The Internal CobraNet Audio Device has its own network port that must be contigured separately The System Management Center cannot directly set this address Refer to the Internal CobraNet Audio Device documentation for instructions on setting this address RTP Transmitters f ID Audio Port Audio IP Devices Type Description Location Actions Extra Info 1200 Logic Ir IED GLOBALCOM System L 8 Zones Start Zone 1 Mic 256 gt Internal Cobr IED GLOBALCOM System S SIP Telephon System 1 vACSTel Actions 3 Mic 5 SIP Server 10 2 128 1
327. twork Figure 6 40 1200LIR Triggers Activation Type The Activation Type applies only to relays that function as fault relays and have definitions in the Triggers field e Solid The relay will activate while the fault condition is present and deactivate once the fault condition has cleared e Momentary The relay will activate for approximately 1 second and then deactivate e Pulsating The relay will cycle between active and inactive states at a rate of approximately 1 second on and 1 second off Activation Type Momentary Pulsating Figure 6 41 1200LIR Activation Types Reverse Polarity Check this box to reverse the operating polarity of the relay Normally a relay is in its de energized state until it is triggered When this box is checked it will normally energize and will de energize when triggered This is most useful when a relay is used to indicate a fault to an external system or indicator panel That way a fault condition will be triggered if the unit loses power Actions When you open the Actions for a logic device you will notice that there are two actions for each logic input One is associated with the activation of the input and the other with the deactivation of the input You can differentiate between the two by looking for On or Off in the Logic State field in the Extra Info column This allows you to create an action that will remain active while a contact closure is held To do this you
328. ults on a single output The output will activate as determined by the setting in the Activation Type field when any of the assigned faults are reported 3 Amplifier Problem x x 1 Test Point Pass Fail Audible Test 1 1 UPS Failure 9 10 Communication Channel Network ee Figure 6 32 T9O32LVIO Triggers Activation Type The Activation Type applies only to outputs that function as fault indicators and have definitions in the Triggers field Solid The output will activate while the fault condition is present and deactivate once the fault condition has cleared e Momentary The output will activate for approximately 1 second and then deactivate e Pulsating The output will cycle between active and inactive states at a rate of approximately 1 second on and 1 second oft Activation Type Momentary Pulsating Figure 6 33 T9032LVIO Activation Types ill TED Chapter 6 Devices GLOBALCOM Reverse Polarity Check this box to reverse the operating polarity of the relay Normally a relay is in its de energized state until it is triggered When this box is checked it will normally energize and will de energize when triggered This is most useful when a relay is used to indicate a fault to an external system or indicator panel That way a fault condition will be triggered if the unit loses power Actions When you open the Actions tor a logic device you will notice that there are two actions
329. umbers by providing you with the ability to create a list and then use that list in multiple actions If you later need to change the telephone numbers you simply edit the appropriate list and do not need to edit any individual actions Note SMS Messaging requires an Internet connection This is a feature that must be purchased as an option as part of the software license SMS Lists x ID Description Fault Notify Phone Numbers 1 Maintenance Department 7 502 555 6896 502 555 1967 X 502 555 6648 502 555 6363 502 555 3697 502 555 3365 502 555 9397 2 IT Department 3 Security Figure 17 1 SMS Lists Click this icon to add a new list Once added you can edit the Description tield by double clicking on the field x Click this icon to delete the currently selected list ID This is an index number used to reference the list It is generated by the system and cannot be edited Description Use this field to enter a descriptive name for the list This is the name that will be used in the drop down lists in other areas of the application where you select individual lists 249 ill TED Chapter 17 SMS Lists GLOBALCOM Fault Notify When checked members of the list will receive SMS notitications when there is a system fault Phone Numbers You can enter multiple phone numbers in each list by placing them in the Phone Numbers column using the icons shown in Figure 17 2 Fault Notif
330. umeric value in the edit box The value used is measured in Octaves For example if a 1 3 octave filter is required then a value of 0 333 would be used The bandwidth can also be altered using vertical line icons located on each side of the diamond filter icon in the frequency response graph Click a line and move the mouse laterally to change the bandwidth Class This is only available tor Hi Pass and Lo Pass filter types The mathematical function used to calculate the filter is selected by picking an available type trom the drop down list box There are three available class types listed below e Butterworth Bessel e Linkwitz Riley Slope dB Oct This is only available tor Hi Pass and Lo Pass filter types This value determines the frequency roll off rate for the filter in decibels per octave Available values range trom a shallow 6 dB Octave to a very steep 48 dB Octave Bypass EQ When checked this removes the effects of all filter bands trom the signal path without resetting the filters to a flat response curve When the EQ is bypassed the signal will pass through the object without any moditications to the trequency characteristics Gain Slider Edit Box The EQ provides a small range of gain adjustment in order to compensate for the overall ettect of the EQ curve and allow signal to noise ratio and dynamic range to be maximized This gain is set by entering a value in or relative dB in the edit box It should only be
331. uncement Classes GLOBALCOM 210 Ready Time When an announcement is initiated from a microphone station with a push to talk switch or button a green READY light will tlash along with a chime This indicates to the user that the system is ready tor the and they should key the microphone and make the announcement The Ready Time specities how long the system will wait in seconds for the user before killing the announcement request A typical value for this setting is tive 5 seconds Warn Time The system will warn the user that the maximum time limit for the announcement has almost been reached It does so by flashing the READY light on the microphone station Enter the time in seconds to issue the warning before the end of the announcement Max Time This is the maximum time in seconds that an announcement can be made trom the time the user keys the microphone Atter this time has elapsed the announcement will be automatically killed by the system Typical values tor most applications range trom 60 1 minute to 120 2 minutes For no time restrictions enter a value ot O Partial Activation This parameter determines what the announcement will do it some of the zones required are busy with announcements of equal or higher priority When enabled the announcement will proceed and activate only those zones that are available or are busy with lower priority announcements When disabled the announcement will indicate that the syste
332. unicipal Airport For the health and comfort of the traveling public all terminals are smoke free Smoking is permitted at designated curbside areas only Thank you To prevent takes trom running together the system also has takes that are nothing but silence These takes are inserted in between individual takes to produce natural pauses in the message In addition to silence the system also contains takes of chimes or alert tones used to draw attention to the announcement To produce the tinal Welcome message the following takes will be assembled using the Take Browser Take Number Description Text 9991 1 Second of silence Welcome to Abilene Municipal Airport For the health and comfort of the traveling public all 7250 terminals are smoke free Smoking is permitted at des ignated curbside areas only 7a25 Thankyou 1 Second of silence is recommended at the beginning of all PDRP messages Once a message has been assembled it can be played through a variety of methods Messages can be programmed to play on a schedule so they will play every few minutes to specific areas of the facility Schedules offer flexibility by allowing messages to play only during a certain date range certain times of the day or only on specitic days of the week A good application example for this feature would be a major event occurring in a city over a specitic weekend The airport wants to play a special welcome messa
333. until cleared Use the Clear Alert item if this action is used to end the alert 208 Announcement Classes Announcement classes are used to define specific behaviors for the actions in the system Most but not all actions require the assignment of an announcement class This determines how the action will interact with other actions in the system as they start and stop Announcement Classes ESen Ready Warn Max Partial Partial Preempt Preempt Recover Time Time Time Activation Continuous All Kill Zones T Emergency 2 5 0 0 2 High Priority 4 5 a 120 3 Medium Priority 6 5 5 60 Low Priority 8 5 5 60 Figure 8 1 Announcement Classes Click this button to add a new announcement class to the list x Click this button to delete the highlighted announcement class from the list ID This is a positive whole number used to identify the announcement class Each announcement class defined must have a unique ID number Description This is a text description for the announcement class Double click on the field to edit the text Priority Each announcement class must have a priority level Lower numbers designate a higher priority over larger numbers Announcement classes with a higher priority lower number will override announcements of a lower priority higher number in most cases The exceptions are any announcement classes with the Pre empt All selected 209 ill TED Chapter 8 Anno
334. upervision section of the application Mwl ED Chapter 2 Overview Tab 16 GLOBALCOM Optional This field will display any additional information if any reported by the System Supervision module First This field displays a date and time stamp of when the fault was originally reported Last As long as a tault condition exists the System Supervision module will continue to collect fault reports This field displays the most recent fault report received My Devices This tab displays a list of all devices that are contigured in the controller It also indicates an overview of device status If the device is highlighted in red as shown in Figure 2 7 then the device is not responding on the network It a device is communicating but reporting internal faults then you will see an exclamation point icon in the Faults column You can hold the mouse pointer over the icon to reveal a detailed list of the reported taults as shown in Figure 2 9 IP Description Faults Location Extra Info T 10 2 128 161 System 1 VoIP Interface 1 Mic 259 SIP Server 1601 SIP Extension 1601 TJ 10 2 128 161 System 1 VoIP Interface 2 Mic 258 SIP Server 1602 SIP Extension 1602 10 2 128 174 Information Information Mic 10 Template Default Template JE 10 2 128 161 System 1 LIR Mic 257 10 2 128 171 Titan 1 Main Equipment Room Rack 2 Frame 1 16384 16 Zones Start Zone 9 BGM SOURCE 1 channels 10 2 128 162 System 1 Sound Card Figure 2
335. used for the inaudible and audible tests by typing it into the appropriate edit box The output level of the test tone for each test is also adjustable You change the output level by typing in the output level in the edit box The valid range for the test tone is 100 to 3 where 3 will product a tone just shy of driving the amplifier into clipping Frequency You have the option to individually enable or disable the audible and inaudible tests for each channel When the checkbox for a test is checked it will be performed for that channel when you click the Test or Set button for the test If it is not checked then it will not read a value for that channel If the audible test is disabled for a channel then the test tone will not be played to that channel Speaker Current These two columns display the actual results of the test The Set column displays the reading that was recorded when you calibrated the test using the Set button The Var column displays the difference between the recorded set level and the level measured during the most recent test This level is the dB above or below the set value for the channel When the measured value is beyond a 3dB window then the point is considered faulted and it will be displayed with a red background Note lIfa 2 is shown it indicates that data ws not available for that channel This could be the case if the test has been disabled for a channel or if no set has been performe
336. utton immediately to the right of the entry box Click on an individual zone to add or remove it trom the action To add a range of zones in the same device select the first zone and then the last zone in the range while holding down the SHIFT key Zone Group A zone group is assigned to the action by selecting one of the previously detined zone groups trom the drop down list Multiple zone groups can be assigned to an action by clicking the button to add more fields each with its own drop down selection list Click the X icon to remove a zone group field Once defined the announcement will play cumulatively to all zones included in the selected zone groups Use Prompt This teature requires a graphical paging station such as the IEDA528 series microphone station When checked this action will prompt the station user for either the zone code or zone group code for the action This gives the operator flexibility to choose the announcement or message destination at the time of launch This requires the microphone station operator to know a valid Zone ID or Zone Group that is available for use 167 i TED Chapter 7 Action Types GLOBALCOM Play Count A delayed message can be played multiple times Enter the total number of times to play the message once it has been recorded All messages must play at least once thus requiring at least a 1 to be in this field Indefinite When checked the Play Count edit box disappears This w
337. ve This tield will display True when it detects that the primary announcement controller is online It will switch to False it it can no longer communicate with the primary controller Taken Over This field will display True it the Lifeline has taken over control for this primary announcement controller It will display False when it has not taken control and is monitoring if the Monitoring checkbox is checked for that system Force Lifeline Each primary announcement controller in the monitoring list will have this button Click this button to immediately torce the Liteline controller to take over the duties of the primary announcement controller It takes approximately 45 to 55 seconds tor this process to take place Save Lifeline Click this button to manually switch control trom the Liteline controller back to the primary controller if the automatic tail back has been disabled or if the system was manually forced into Liteline mode using the Force Lifeline button 2 0 Users When a system is initially contigured it has tour 4 detault users as shown in It you ran the First Run Setup Wizard and used different names then your list will appear different There are basically three 3 different categories of users that have a permission set based on their role as a system user These roles are defined below and you configure them on a per user basis as shown in Figure 23 3 Advanced This level is for a user that needs to hav
338. verall Level This slider controls the main output attenuator for paging BGM and program signals The meter indicates the current signal level that is teeding the analog input of the power amplitier Assign Sensors Clicking on the Assign Sensors button will launch the Ambient Sensor Assignment window as shown in Figure 6 78 This is where one or more ambient sensors are directly assigned to control the currently selected channel Each channel can have one 1 to tour 4 ambient noise sensors assigned When multiple sensors are use the system averages the signal levels trom all assigned sensors to obtain an ambient noise level reading There are three very critical rules related to using multiple ambient noise sensors in a single zone that are described below Rules for using multiple sensors for a single zone e All sensors must be connected to the same sensor collection unit e All sensors must be connected to the same input group on the collection unit e All sensors must be located in the same loudspeaker zone 137 Ww TED Chapter 6 Devices GLOBALCOM Noise Sensor Device TS032NS 3 Noise Sensor Group 1 Noise Sensor Group 3 Ticketing A1 Noise Sensor 1 Sensor 2 Nose Sensor 2 is Sensor 3 Noise Sensor 3 _ Sensor 4 Noise Sensor 4 _ Sensor 5 Noise Sensor 5 E Sensor 6 Noise Sensor 6 _ Sensor 7 Nose Sensor 7 _ Sensor 8 Noise Sensor 8 Figure 6 78 Ambient Sensor Assignment To assign sensors tirst select
339. vice Description Enter text here to give the device a descriptive name Location Enter text here to describe the physical location of the device 151 ill TED Chapter 6 Devices GLOBALCOM Is BGM Source This box is checked by detault and must be so to allow the system to treat the device as a BGM source for the system The device will appear as an available BGM source for output devices of Channels This is the total number of channels that will be used as BGM inputs on the device Maximum of 8 channels Note Ifyou are using a device that has more than one 1 transmitter for more than eight 8 channels then you must contigure two or more of the Generic CobraNet Device Channel Descriptions This description is used to give a name to each BGM channel that will be sourced trom this device This name will appear in selection lists tor devices when you are contiguring outputs to receive BGM Transmitters This section is where you specify the CobraNet information for the transmitter used by the device The settings here must match the settings on the device ID This is an index number used to identity the transmitter in the list It will be tixed at 1 tor this device and cannot be changed Bundle Number Click to edit the bundle number for the device You must use the bundle number that matches the one used by the device Type This should always be set to BGM Number of Channels Enter the
340. vice and click the settings icon located at the top of the list or double click on the item to open the editor for the device Refer to the individual device type configuration in this section of the documentation to learn how to contigure each device S Ww TED Chapter 6 Devices GLOBALCOM 58 T9032NS Titan Noise Sensor Device T9032NS l TS032NS Titan Noise Sensor Device Apply Configuration Now Description i T9032NS Show Base Fields Location i Main Equipment Room IP Address i 10 2 128 185 Dev Handle 16392 Frame Number i 2 Noise Sensor Descriptions ID Description Corridor A E 2 Sensor 2 3 Sensor 3 J Sensor 4 5 Sensor 5 6 Sensor 6 7 Sensor 7 8 Sensor 8 r Figure 6 15 T9032NS Titan Noise Sensor Device Properties Description Enter text here to give the device a descriptive name Location Enter text here to describe the physical location of the device IP Address Enter the IP address for the device here Dev Handle This is a sottware address used by the system It is assigned by the system and provided here for reference it needed Frame Number This is a unique ID number used to identity the Titan frames used in the system When yo Noise Sensor Descriptions This list is used to assign your own descriptive names for each noise sensor This is the name that will appear when you assign a sensor to a channel It is recommended that you use a name
341. w SNMP Endpoint to the list X Click this icon to delete the currently selected SNMP Endpoint from the list IP Enter the destination IP address tor the SNMP Endpoint Port Enter the port number that will be used to send SNMP messages trom this controller to the SNMP Endpoint Community Enter the community name that will be used to send SNMP messages trom this controller to the SNMP Endpoint ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 18 System Supervision Fault Descriptions Generic Fault Descriptions This list is used to describe system faults with an associated device You will notice that this list does not contain a Fault Number field That number is somewhat dependant on the type of fault but often associated with the number associated with the device For example it microphone station 8 tailed you would see a fault reported with a Fault Type of 2 anda Fault Number of 8 Specific Fault Descriptions This list provides more detailed descriptions of specific types of faults Device Type Specific Fault Descriptions This list is used for breaking out faults that occur within an individual device Currently this is used to provide descriptions of the various faults that are detected within a T9160 amplifier maintrame Device Specific Fault Descriptions This section is where you define faults that will be set and cleared by programming Action Types on a device While it is possible to program a fault from any device using the
342. will determine what happens to that announcement It it is enabled the announcement will be killed and not attempt to re start It disabled the announcement will return to a busy state and attempt to re start once the needed zones and other resources are available Recover Zones When either Partial Activation or Partial Continuation are enabled then an announcement may start or continue with some ot its needed zones unavailable This parameter determines what happens to those zones that are either not available at the time the announcement is started or are taken away by one of a higher priority while it is active When enabled the zones that were taken over by another announcement will be immediately added back to the active announcement When disabled those zones will remain excluded for the duration of the announcement Emergency Devices with audio outputs have a configurable emergency gain offset used to increase the output level by the detined amount when an emergency announcement is made When this box is checked any announcements or messages that use this announcement class will be played using the higher gain amount 211 ill TED GLOBALCOM This page has been intentionally left blank Zone Groups The term zone is a rather broad term that generically reters to the outputs of several ditterent types of devices An output channel on a Titan T9160 amplifier channel is a zone A relay output on a T9016RY or internal 1200LI
343. will use to connect to the PBX You must obtain this information from the PBX provider SIP Password This is the password associated with the SIP User that this line will use to connect to the PBX You must obtain this information from the PBX provider SIP Port This determines the SIP port used by this line for the VolP service This is automatically set and should not be edited unless required by the PBX vendor RTP Port This determines the RTP port used by this line for the VolP service This is automatically set and should not be edited unless required by the PBX vendor Action Performed This is where you define the action that will be performed when the line answers You define the action by clicking on the small yellow gear icon in the list or by double clicking on the item in the list This will open the standard action definition window Refer to the Action Types section of the documentation for more information on defining an action Locked When checked security is enabled Access is restricted based on the data entered in Mic Passwords Caller ID can be used to automatically login a user calling from a particular extension If this is not defined then the user will be prompted to enter their 4 digit password to gain access It this box is not checked there will be no security protection Refer to the Mic Passwords section of the documentation for more information 105 Ww TED Chapter 6 Devices GLOBALCOM Devic
344. xclusive thus only one zone destination method may be used Zone ID The Zone ID field specifies one 1 or more system zones as the destination for the announcement Zones are entered either by directly typing them into the entry box i e 1 2 3 7 18 or by opening the Zone Selector by clicking the button immediately to the right of the entry box Click on an individual zone to add or remove it trom the action To add a range of zones in the same device select the first zone and then the last zone in the range while holding down the SHIFT key Click here to open the Zone Selector LIR 257 Titan 1 LILI Ibs Figure 7 19 Live Individual Zone Selection Zone Group A zone group is assigned to the action by selecting one of the previously detined zone groups trom the drop down list as shown in Figure 7 20 Multiple zone groups can be assigned to an action by clicking the icon to add more fields each with its own drop down selection list Click the X icon to remove a zone group field Once defined the announcement will play cumulatively to all zones included in the selected zone groups Figure 7 21 shows an announcement with two zone groups assigned 177 i TED Chapter 7 Action Types GLOBALCOM Copy Action Mic Local 1 65535 Mic Local 2 65534 Mic Local 3 65533 Mic Local 4 65532 All Call Frame 1 eo Ticketing 102 Secunty 103 Figure 7 20 Live Zone Group Selec
345. y Output Mic Stations I T9040NLR Noise Logic amp Relay Device 4 Button Paging Station m q m M a Figure 6 2 Add a New Device After you click the OK button the device will be added to the system and the properties window for the new device will appear Figure 6 3 shows the window for a 4 button microphone station Configure the properties and click OK to finish adding the new device to the system If you click Cancel the window will close and the device will not be added to the system To add multiple of the selected device type enter the quantity in the Number of Devices field When used the configuration window that appears will be for the last device added You will then need to go into each device and configure it appropriately Information Counter E 7 MS524 4 Button Paging Station Description i Information Counter Show All Fields Location i Information Booth IP Address 10 2 128 167 Mic Number i le Figure 6 3 New MS524 Device ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 6 Devices By default only the most commonly used fields are shown when you edit a device s properties Click the Show All Fields button to reveal all available properties Once the button has been used the caption will change to Show Base Fields You can click it again to hide the less commonly used fields Note For simplicity this documentation covers device setup with all fields shown e Click this
346. y Phone Numbers FOX 502 555 6896 902 555 1967 Fix Figure 17 2 Phone Numbers Click this button to add a new phone number to the list You will be prompted with an entry box as shown in Figure 17 3 Please enter a phone number Number 502 555 1234 Cancel OK Figure 17 3 Edit a Phone Number we Click this button to edit the highlighted phone number in the list You will be prompted with an edit box as shown in Figure 17 3 x Click this button to delete the highlighted phone number in the list 250 system Supervision The system constantly polls all of the programmed devices for their current status and will report a fault if a device tails to respond Titan series amplifier frames also monitor the analog audio outputs and loudspeaker lines and will report a fault if the tested audio level is out of tolerance Each controller is responsible tor monitoring its own devices and will report any faults on the Current Faults section located in the Overview tab of the System Management Center application as shown in Figure 18 1 In this example we have a Titan frame with an amplifier card that has tailed Fault history is recorded in the IED Fault Log located within the Windows System Log Refer to the Windows System Log later in this section tor details on viewing the IED Fault Log For larger systems where you need the ability to view the taults trom all controllers from a central location you can creat
347. you must detine an action to start the announcement and then a separate action to stop it using the other logic state Note The TVO40NLR operates slightly different trom the 1200LIR in that it has a reference voltage available in addition to a ground To control an action using a contact closure you must wire the closure between the input and the ground reference on the terminal connector When a closure is present between the input and ground it will trigger the action programmed for the On logic state When the closure is removed it will trigger the action programmed for the Off logic state Make sure you use the ground terminal and NOT the voltage reterence terminal To edit an action select the action and then click the edit icon located at the top of the window It is the small round gear shaped icon You can also double click on a row in the Type column to open the editor Refer to the Action Types section for information on contiguring actions 89 ill TED Chapter 6 Devices GLOBALCOM TS040NLR 4 Actions __ Type Description Entry Code Extra Info Logic Input 1 ON I7 Logic ID 1 Logic State On E Unused Logic Input 1 OFF iy Logic ID 1 Logic State Off Unused Logic Input 2 ON 18 Logic ID 2 Logic State On Unused Logic Input 2 OFF 18 Logic ID 2 Logic State Off Unused Logic Input 3 ON 19 Logic ID 3 Logic State On Unused Logic Input 3 OFF 19 Logic ID 3 Logic State Off Unused Logic Input 4 ON 20
348. you perform final level adjustments prior to calibrating the system supervision Any changes made after that calibration will require a new set be performed to record the new levels correctly Calibrate System Supervision Once all loudspeaker lines have been fully connected and all output levels set you can calibrate the supervision sub system and configure the periodic testing Calibrate Ambient Analysis This is one of the last operations to be performed because it requires the system to be installed and in a normal operating mode prior to calibration Most of the operations described above must be complete prior to attempting a calibration Overview Tab The Overview tab provides access to view system activity and system health This intormation is provided even without logging into the application A user that logs in will have the additional ability to control levels and BGM selection for individual audio zones as well as the ability to terminate active announcements it needed Figure 2 1 shows the Overview tab selected Each accordion tab can be opened or closed by clicking on its title bar to reveal the information contained within each tab GLOBAL ED System Management Center D Announcement Activity Mic amp Zone Status Current Faults My Devices Other Devices Announcement Activity System 1 Overview Configuration Admin Figure 2 1 Overview Tab IP Address 10 2 128 161 Netmask 255 0 0 0 MAC Address
349. ypes GLOBALCOM Copy Action i Medium Priority Pri American English Figure 7 43 RecordTake Action Type Note When multiple playback devices are used it may take up to one 1 minute for recorded takes to be transferred to all other playback devices in the system Announcement Class Select the appropriate announcement class for the action The announcement class determines the announcement priority relative to other announcements as well as various other behaviors as detined tor each announcement class Record Take Enter the take number that will be used to record the take in this field Use the drop down list immediately to the right of the field to select the language that will be used for this take This ensures that the take is stored in the correct directory and allows you to record the take in multiple languages while using the same take number SMS Short Message Service SMS allows the system to send text messages to one or more mobile devices Once an SMS list has been detined in the system the SMS action type can be used to alert individuals of system events or issues Refer to the SMS Lists section for information on adding SMS Lists Copy Action Description UPS Failure Wo Audio System UPS has a fault Maintenance Departr v Figure 7 44 SMS Action Type 202 ill TED GLOBALCOM Chapter 7 Action Types SMS Text Enter the text that will be sent as the mess
350. zard Page Windows Internet Explorer iojx E S gt je http localhost FirstRun Wizard1 4 x File Edit View Favorites Tools F sly Favorites Wizard1 Page LED System Management Center GLOBAL vACS First Run Setup Wizard This screen allows the definition of basic system components Using information provided on this page the wizard will make assumptions about your system and define basic properties for all devices More detailed setup will be performed on the device discovery page Figure 4 4 Contigure Devices System Number Each vACS controller in a system must have a unique number You enter the number tor this controller in this tield You must reterence this number when contiguring other controllers to communicate with this controller The System Number is synonymous with the term Group Number that is used for microphone station setup You must configure a microphone station with the Group Number ot its parent controller System IP Address By default this field is populated with the current IP address obtained trom the operating system It you change the address here it will change the IP address of the controller System Netmask This setting also detaults to the subnet mask setting obtained trom the operating system Enter a subnet mask tor the vACS that is appropriate tor your network contiguration it the default is not sufficient If you change the address here it will change the subnet ma
351. zone Levels Overall This is the master output level control tor the zone Adjusting this level will change the levels of both announcements and BGM This number represents the amount of attenuation relative to OdBFS So a value of 30 will attenuate the level by 30dB To reduce the level by an additional 10dB you would enter a value of 40 Emg This field defines an offset to the Overall level to use when an announcement is made with an announce class that has the Emergency tlag set This allows you to increase the level of the output for emergency announcements The default value is 6dB If you use this setting with an Overall setting of 20dB then an emergency announcement will be played using an output level that is 6dB louder than normal announcements Night This field defines an offset to the Overall level to use when the night schedule is invoked as programmed in the Day Night Schedule section of the Configuration tab This allows you to decrease the level of the output based on the time of day tor each day of the week The default value is OdB and is set by entering a value to turn the output down For example if you enter a value of 6 then the channel level will be turned down by 6dB when the Night schedule is placed in effect BGM This field sets the BGM level for the zone This number represents the amount of attenuation relative to OdBFS So a value of 30 will attenuate the level by 30dB To reduce th

GLOBALCOM SMC User Manual - Low Res

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents